VER. 5.1/[Link].

00 - LB000576

INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL

SERIAL N° ___________

MW310 - V2.29 - R13.3

CN10 / CN12
MW310 – Project Windows

Table of Contents
1 MW310 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................................. 10
1.1 MINIMUM HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 10
1.2 OPERATING SYSTEM SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3 SOFTWARE AVAILABILITY ON THE INTERNET SERVER.................................................................................................. 12
1.4 INSTALLING MW310 ON A PC OR NC .......................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.1 Installation Part One ................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.2 Installation Part Two ................................................................................................................................... 18
[Link] Installing the patches (if supplied)............................................................................................................................. 18
[Link] Support utility installation ......................................................................................................................................... 19
1.4.3 Finishing the installation ............................................................................................................................. 20
[Link] Syncro initialization procedure.................................................................................................................................. 20
2 DESCRIPTION OF INCLUDED APPLICATIONS.............................................................................................. 21

3 MAIN TOOLBAR ..................................................................................................................................................... 22

3.1 GENERAL TOOL BAR .................................................................................................................................................... 22
3.2 STATUS BAR ................................................................................................................................................................. 23
4 AUTOMATIC MENU............................................................................................................................................... 24
4.1 WORKING STEP SETTING.............................................................................................................................................. 25
4.2 SEQUENCE EDITOR ....................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.3 CLAMPING MEANS PATTERNS ...................................................................................................................................... 27
4.4 SINGLE STEP EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................. 29
4.5 PROGRAM CHECK-UP ................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.6 AUTOMATIC LOADER ................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.7 ENABLING AUTOMATIC VACUUM-PAD MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 30
4.8 BARCODE EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................................. 31
4.9 MANUAL DATA INPUT EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................. 32
4.10 FILE CSV EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................................. 33
4.11 USING THE LASER PROJECTOR ..................................................................................................................................... 35
4.12 MANUAL TOOL CHANGER ............................................................................................................................................. 36
4.12.1 Manual tool-changer operation (EC machine) ............................................................................................ 37
4.12.2 Manual Tool-Changer Operation (Non-EC Machine) ................................................................................. 38
4.13 IN LINE MODE .......................................................................................................................................................... 40
5 MANUAL MENU ...................................................................................................................................................... 41
5.1 AXIS JOG MOTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 41
5.2 TOOL ENABLING .......................................................................................................................................................... 41
5.2.1 Tool-Holding Clamps Enabling ................................................................................................................... 42
5.3 ANUBA-HINGE CYCLES ................................................................................................................................................. 42
5.4 ROUTING BIT CYCLES .................................................................................................................................................. 43
5.5 MACHINE RESET .......................................................................................................................................................... 43
5.6 MANUAL DRUM-TYPE MAGAZINE ROTATION ................................................................................................................ 44
5.7 MANUAL WORKPIECE UNLOADING ............................................................................................................................... 44
5.8 TOOLS ASSEMBLED WITH THE MAN. T.C...................................................................................................................... 44
6 MACHINE STATUS ................................................................................................................................................. 45

7 MACHINE TOOLING-UP....................................................................................................................................... 45
7.1 TOOLING-UP THE HEAD ................................................................................................................................................ 46
7.1.1 Tool Definition ............................................................................................................................................. 47
[Link] Determining tool length............................................................................................................................................. 51
[Link] Determining the tool rotating direction ..................................................................................................................... 54
7.1.2 Definition of the chip deflector..................................................................................................................... 56
[Link] Specifications and configuration ............................................................................................................................... 62
7.1.3 Tool-holder properties ................................................................................................................................. 63
7.2 TOOLING UP THE TOOL CHANGER MAGAZINES, THE INDEXED HEADS AND THE ROUTERS .......................................... 65
7.2.1 Tooling up the tool changer magazines ....................................................................................................... 65
7.2.2 Tooling up standard indexed heads ............................................................................................................. 66

Pag.1
MW310 – Project Windows
7.2.3 Tooling up a multiple indexed head ............................................................................................................. 67
7.3 ANUBA-HINGE EDITOR FOR INTERPOLATING “2004” HEAD ......................................................................................... 69
7.3.1 Single Anuba-hinge on 2004 head ............................................................................................................... 70
7.3.2 Double anuba-hinge on 2004 head ............................................................................................................. 72
7.3.3 Triple Anuba-hinge on 2004 Head .............................................................................................................. 74
7.3.4 Plate on 2004 Head..................................................................................................................................... 76
7.4 ANUBA-HINGE EDITOR FOR PNEUMATIC HEAD ............................................................................................................ 78
7.4.1 Single Anuba-hinge on Pneumatic Head...................................................................................................... 79
7.4.2 Double Anuba-hinges on Pneumatic Head .................................................................................................. 80
7.4.3 Triple Anuba-hinge on pneumatic head ....................................................................................................... 81
7.4.4 Plate on Pneumatic Head............................................................................................................................. 82
7.5 TOOLING UP THE VACUUM- PADS ................................................................................................................................. 83
8 ISO EDITOR ............................................................................................................................................................. 86
8.1 PROGRAM PROPERTIES ................................................................................................................................................. 87
8.1.1 Face programming ....................................................................................................................................... 89
[Link] Tilting face definition ................................................................................................................................................ 94
8.1.2 CUSTOM TILTING FACES ......................................................................................................................... 98
8.2 ISO WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................................. 101
8.2.1 Inserting a program line ............................................................................................................................ 101
8.2.2 Selection of Program Lines ........................................................................................................................ 102
8.2.3 Keyboard Functions Available with the Editor .......................................................................................... 102
8.2.4 Measurement Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 102
8.2.5 Workpiece-Face Selection Board ............................................................................................................... 102
8.3 DRAWING WINDOWS .................................................................................................................................................. 103
8.3.1 Zoom Function ........................................................................................................................................... 103
8.3.2 Tool Path Drawing Function ..................................................................................................................... 103
8.3.3 Step-by-step Function ................................................................................................................................ 104
8.3.4 Vacuum-pad Management ......................................................................................................................... 104
[Link] Display Vacuum pads .............................................................................................................................................. 104
[Link] Move Vacuum Pads................................................................................................................................................. 104
8.4 PROGRAMMING .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
8.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 105
8.4.2 Lines with G and M codes .......................................................................................................................... 105
8.4.3 Parametric Lines ........................................................................................................................................ 105
8.4.4 Comment Lines ........................................................................................................................................... 105
8.4.5 Parameter programming............................................................................................................................ 106
[Link] Calculating mathematical functions or expressions ................................................................................................. 106
[Link] Executing skips or cycles ........................................................................................................................................ 107
[Link] Assigning parameters to programming variables .................................................................................................... 108
8.4.6 ISO Programming ...................................................................................................................................... 109
[Link] Code G120 .............................................................................................................................................................. 109
[Link] Codes G90 - G91 ..................................................................................................................................................... 109
[Link] Code G92 ................................................................................................................................................................ 109
[Link] Code G192 .............................................................................................................................................................. 109
[Link] Code G170 .............................................................................................................................................................. 110
[Link] Code G110 .............................................................................................................................................................. 110
[Link] Code G111 .............................................................................................................................................................. 110
[Link] Code G112 .............................................................................................................................................................. 110
[Link] Code G113 .............................................................................................................................................................. 110
[Link] Code G194 .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
[Link] Codes G150 G151 G152 G153 ........................................................................................................................... 110
[Link] Code G172 .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
8.4.7 Codes to Execute Routing Bit Machinings ................................................................................................. 111
[Link] Code G40 ................................................................................................................................................................ 111
[Link] Code G41 ................................................................................................................................................................ 111
[Link] Code G42 ................................................................................................................................................................ 111
[Link] Code G101 .............................................................................................................................................................. 111
[Link] Codes G102 - G103 ................................................................................................................................................. 112
[Link] Codes G105 - G106 ................................................................................................................................................. 113
[Link] Code G205 .............................................................................................................................................................. 113
[Link] Code G204 .............................................................................................................................................................. 113
[Link] Code G108 .............................................................................................................................................................. 114
[Link] Code G109 .......................................................................................................................................................... 114
[Link] Code G211 .......................................................................................................................................................... 115
8.4.8 Codes for executing machinings with the thickness sensor ........................................................................ 116

Pag.2
MW310 – Project Windows
[Link] Code G164 .............................................................................................................................................................. 116
[Link] Code G165 .............................................................................................................................................................. 116
[Link] Code G166 .............................................................................................................................................................. 116
[Link] Code G161 .............................................................................................................................................................. 116
[Link] Code G167 .............................................................................................................................................................. 117
[Link] Code G163 .............................................................................................................................................................. 117
8.4.9 Codes for Saw Cuts .................................................................................................................................... 117
[Link] Code G180 .............................................................................................................................................................. 117
[Link] Code G181 .............................................................................................................................................................. 117
8.4.10 Codes for executing machinings with the indexed heads ........................................................................... 118
[Link] Code G178 .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
[Link] Code G189 .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
[Link] Code G188 .......................................................................................................................................................... 119
[Link] Code G173 .......................................................................................................................................................... 119
8.4.11 Codes for executing boring-works ............................................................................................................. 121
[Link] Vertical-boring slowing down............................................................................................................................. 121
[Link] Code G100 .......................................................................................................................................................... 122
[Link] Codes G182 G183 G184 G185 ........................................................................................................................... 123
[Link] Code G186 .......................................................................................................................................................... 123
[Link] Code G187 .......................................................................................................................................................... 123
8.4.12 Series of M Codes ...................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M00 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M16 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M26 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M60 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M98 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M99 ........................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M100 ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
[Link] Code M101 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M102 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M103 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M106 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M107 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M108 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M109 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M111 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
[Link] Code M112 ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
8.4.13 Management of locking and positioning Support plates/Pressers ............................................................. 125
[Link] Code M200 - Managing the Releasing and Locking of the Pressers ................................................................... 126
[Link] Code M201 - Positioning Management .............................................................................................................. 128
[Link] Code M202 - Stops management ........................................................................................................................ 130
[Link] Code M203 - Vacuum control............................................................................................................................. 131
[Link] Code M204 - Pedal input management ............................................................................................................... 131
[Link] Code M205 - Start input management ................................................................................................................ 131
[Link] Code M206 - Locking confirmation input management ..................................................................................... 132
[Link] Code M207 - Panel lifter management ............................................................................................................... 132
[Link] Code M208 - Setting Support plates/Pressers positioning values ....................................................................... 133
[Link] Code M209 - Vacuum management.................................................................................................................... 134
[Link] Mobile Support plate errors matched to the M codes.......................................................................................... 134
[Link] ISO EDITOR KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS ....................................................................................................... 136
8.5 INTERPOLATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLE WITH INDEXED HEADS ON AXIS C ROLL OVER .................................... 136
8.6 INTERPOLATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLE WITH HEAD 5 AXES COUNTER PIVOT EQUIPPED WITH AXIS C AND
AXIS A 138
8.6.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 138
8.6.2 Example of an ISO program with Axis C roll over .................................................................................... 139
[Link] Iso Code .................................................................................................................................................................. 142
8.6.3 Example of an ISO program without Axis C roll over ............................................................................... 148
[Link] Iso Code .................................................................................................................................................................. 149
8.7 PROGRAMMING MACHININGS WITH SHARP EDGES .................................................................................................... 152
8.8 FIGURE PROGRAMMING AND EDITOR .......................................................................................................................... 155
8.8.1 Programming the “Meeting” figure .......................................................................................................... 156
8.8.2 Programming the “Knob" figure ............................................................................................................... 157
8.8.3 Programming the “Bottom plates” figure ................................................................................................. 157
8.8.4 Programming the “Stanley" figure ............................................................................................................ 158
8.8.5 Programming the "Locks” figure ............................................................................................................... 158
8.8.6 Programming the "Arches” figure ............................................................................................................. 159
[Link] Frame Dimensions................................................................................................................................................... 159
[Link] Sash dimensions ...................................................................................................................................................... 162

Pag.3
MW310 – Project Windows
[Link] Glass-stop dimensions ............................................................................................................................................. 163
8.9 ANUBA-HINGE PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................................... 164
8.9.1 “Free anuba-hinges” ................................................................................................................................. 166
[Link] Number of items ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
8.9.2 “A-B Automatic Calculation” .................................................................................................................... 167
[Link] Number of items ...................................................................................................................................................... 168
8.9.3 «Automatic Calculation A – C – D - B» ..................................................................................................... 168
[Link] Number of items ...................................................................................................................................................... 169
8.9.4 “Range A-B Automatic Calculation” ......................................................................................................... 170
[Link] Number of items ...................................................................................................................................................... 170
8.9.5 Anuba-hinge profile programming............................................................................................................. 171
8.9.6 Parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 172
[Link] Anuba-hinge ............................................................................................................................................................ 173
[Link] Piece on stop (top/bottom part of frame/sash) ........................................................................................................ 174
[Link] Stop point (Inside/outside of frame/sash) ................................................................................................................ 174
[Link] Type of anuba-hinge to be worked (Male/female) .................................................................................................. 174
[Link] Disable bit protection .............................................................................................................................................. 174
8.9.7 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 175
8.10 LOUVER-BLIND PROGRAMMING ...................................................................................................................... 175
8.10.1 “Simple” Type Louver Blinds .................................................................................................................... 176
8.10.2 “Double” Type Louver Blinds ................................................................................................................... 178
8.10.3 “Through-Passing” Louver Blinds ............................................................................................................ 179
8.10.4 “Half-Passing” Louver Blinds ................................................................................................................... 180
8.10.5 “Antique” Type Louver Blinds................................................................................................................... 181
8.10.6 Creating a louver-blind program ............................................................................................................... 182
[Link] Louver-blind routed section of variable length ................................................................................................... 182
[Link] Louver-blind routed section with fixed pitch and nominal length L ................................................................... 182
[Link] Louver-blind routed section with variable pitch and fixed length L ................................................................... 182
[Link] Clear span with fixed length L ............................................................................................................................ 183
[Link] Clear span with variable length and minimum value .......................................................................................... 183
[Link] Subprogram call-up in fixed length L ................................................................................................................. 183
[Link] Subprogram call in variable length L .................................................................................................................. 183
[Link] Subprogram call-up in the previous routed section ............................................................................................. 183
8.11 ARCH MACHININGS WITH MASTERWOOD CAD PROGRAM ........................................................................................ 185
8.11.1 Foreword.................................................................................................................................................... 185
8.11.2 Stop configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 185
[Link] Theoretical definition of working areas .............................................................................................................. 185
8.11.3 Machines with First-Generation Masterwood CAD Program ................................................................... 186
[Link] Jamb Machinings ................................................................................................................................................ 186
[Link] Log Machinings .................................................................................................................................................. 187
[Link] ARCH Machinings.............................................................................................................................................. 188
[Link] Sash Machinings ................................................................................................................................................. 190
8.11.4 Machines with Second-Generation Masterwood CAD Program ............................................................... 191
[Link] Preliminary Remarks ......................................................................................................................................... 191
[Link] Jamb Machinings ................................................................................................................................................ 191
[Link] Log Machinings .................................................................................................................................................. 191
[Link] ARCH Machinings.............................................................................................................................................. 191
[Link] Sash Machinings ................................................................................................................................................. 192
8.12 LASER PROJECTOR DATA FORMAT .............................................................................................................................. 194
8.13 DATA FORMAT FOR INDEX HEADS TYPE 11/12/13 ....................................................................................................... 195
9 SYSTEM ERROR CODES .................................................................................................................................... 196
9.1 SYSTEM ERROR CODES ....................................................................................................................................... 197
9.1.1 Executor (Device Type = 0) (ZZZZ)- ......................................................................................................... 199
9.1.2 Axes (Device Type = 1) (ZZZZ)- .............................................................................................................. 200
9.1.3 Plc (Device Type = 2) (ZZZZ)- .............................................................................................................. 200
9.1.4 Remote I/Os (Device Type = 3) (ZZZZ)- .................................................................................................. 202
[Link] Station errors (Profibus Backoff) ............................................................................................................................ 202
9.1.5 Errors for executing commands on remote axis station (Device type = 4) (ZZZZ)- ................................. 203
9.1.6 Remote axes (Device type = 5) (ZZZZ)- .................................................................................................... 203
9.1.7 Station errors (CANBus) (Device type=6) (ZZZZ)- ................................................................................. 203
[Link] CANopen network functioning errors ..................................................................................................................... 204
[Link] Configuration errors on the master .......................................................................................................................... 205
[Link] Hardware or configuration errors on the Syncro ..................................................................................................... 207
9.2 STATUS SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 208
9.3 PROGRAM VALIDATION ERRORS (EDITING PROCESS) - ............................................................................................. 208

Pag.4
MW310 – Project Windows
9.3.1 Editing Process Error Codes ..................................................................................................................... 208
9.4 SYNCRO ERRORS ........................................................................................................................................................ 212
9.5 COMMUNICATION ERRORS - ....................................................................................................................................... 212
9.6 MEANING OF THE SHORT MESSAGES IN THE STATUS / PHASE BOX ............................................................................. 213
9.6.1 "Status" Box ............................................................................................................................................... 213
9.6.2 "Phase" Box ............................................................................................................................................... 213
10 MASTERWORK ................................................................................................................................................. 214
10.1 FOREWORD 214
10.1.1 MasterWork working areas ........................................................................................................................ 214
[Link] CAD program ..................................................................................................................................................... 214
[Link] CAM program ..................................................................................................................................................... 215
[Link] Interactive Program............................................................................................................................................. 215
[Link] ISO Post Processor.............................................................................................................................................. 215
[Link] ISO Program ....................................................................................................................................................... 215
10.1.2 Minimum Hardware and Software Requirements ...................................................................................... 215
10.2 USER’S INTERFACE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... 216
10.2.1 Main Window ............................................................................................................................................. 216
[Link] Working Area ..................................................................................................................................................... 216
[Link] Toolbar and menu ............................................................................................................................................... 217
[Link] Gripping (snapping) keys .................................................................................................................................... 220
[Link] Machinings’ tree ................................................................................................................................................. 221
[Link] Data chart ............................................................................................................................................................ 221
[Link] Status bar ............................................................................................................................................................ 221
[Link] Control (tool) bar ................................................................................................................................................ 222
10.2.2 Keyboard controls ...................................................................................................................................... 223
10.2.3 Selecting elements ...................................................................................................................................... 223
[Link] Selecting machinings .......................................................................................................................................... 223
[Link] Selecting polylines .............................................................................................................................................. 224
10.2.4 References to workpiece ............................................................................................................................. 224
10.2.5 Help function .............................................................................................................................................. 225
10.2.6 Importing DXF files ................................................................................................................................... 226
10.3 THE PROJECT .............................................................................................................................................................. 227
10.3.1 Project general data................................................................................................................................... 227
10.4 INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING..................................................................................................................................... 229
10.4.1 Single vertical hole..................................................................................................................................... 229
10.4.2 Multiple vertical holes................................................................................................................................ 231
10.4.3 Single horizontal hole ................................................................................................................................ 234
10.4.4 Horizontal fitting ........................................................................................................................................ 236
10.4.5 Indexed (tilted) vertical hole ...................................................................................................................... 238
10.4.6 Cuts ............................................................................................................................................................ 239
10.4.7 Trimming .................................................................................................................................................... 241
10.4.8 Routing ....................................................................................................................................................... 244
10.4.9 Multiple routings ........................................................................................................................................ 247
10.4.10 Advanced modification of a machining .................................................................................................. 249
[Link] Delete .................................................................................................................................................................. 249
[Link] Relative motion ................................................................................................................................................... 250
[Link] Move to absolute value ....................................................................................................................................... 250
[Link] Copy at relative values ........................................................................................................................................ 250
[Link] Copy at absolute value ........................................................................................................................................ 250
[Link] Rotate .................................................................................................................................................................. 250
[Link] Scale.................................................................................................................................................................... 251
[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to the axes................................................................................................................... 251
[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to a straight-line.......................................................................................................... 251
10.4.11 Turning geometrical elements into machinings ..................................................................................... 252
10.5 CAD 254
10.5.1 Drawing polylines ...................................................................................................................................... 254
[Link] Segment defined by 2 points ............................................................................................................................... 256
[Link] Tangent segment ................................................................................................................................................. 256
[Link] Segment defined by length and inclination ......................................................................................................... 256
[Link] Arc defined by 3 points ....................................................................................................................................... 256
[Link] Tangent arcs ........................................................................................................................................................ 256
[Link] Arc defined by end point and tangent on the start point ...................................................................................... 257
[Link] Arc defined by end point and center ................................................................................................................... 257
[Link] Arc defined by end point and radius ................................................................................................................... 257
[Link] Arc defined by end point and width .................................................................................................................... 257

Pag.5
MW310 – Project Windows
[Link] Arc defined by center and width ......................................................................................................................... 257
[Link] Arc defined by radius, initial tangency and width ............................................................................................... 257
[Link] Polyline symmetry .............................................................................................................................................. 257
10.5.2 Drawing rectangles .................................................................................................................................... 258
10.5.3 Drawings circles and ellipses .................................................................................................................... 259
10.5.4 Copy polyline with offset ............................................................................................................................ 260
10.5.5 Polyline deformation .................................................................................................................................. 261
[Link] Set deformation ................................................................................................................................................... 261
[Link] Modify deformation references points ................................................................................................................ 261
[Link] Remove deformation ........................................................................................................................................... 262
[Link] Restore workpiece primary dimensions .............................................................................................................. 262
10.5.6 Advanced modification of a polyline .......................................................................................................... 262
[Link] Delete .................................................................................................................................................................. 262
[Link] Relative motion ................................................................................................................................................... 262
[Link] Move to absolute value ....................................................................................................................................... 263
[Link] Copy at relative value ......................................................................................................................................... 263
[Link] Copy at absolute value ........................................................................................................................................ 263
[Link] Rotate .................................................................................................................................................................. 263
[Link] Scale.................................................................................................................................................................... 263
[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to the axes................................................................................................................... 264
[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to a straight-line.......................................................................................................... 264
10.5.7 Modification of polyline segments.............................................................................................................. 264
[Link] Delete segments .................................................................................................................................................. 265
[Link] Move segments ................................................................................................................................................... 265
[Link] Division of a segment into equal parts ................................................................................................................ 265
[Link] Conversion of straight lines into arcs .................................................................................................................. 265
[Link] Change arc direction or reverse arc ..................................................................................................................... 266
10.5.8 Modification of polyline vertices ................................................................................................................ 266
[Link] Introduce new vertices ........................................................................................................................................ 267
[Link] Break a polyline on a given point ....................................................................................................................... 267
[Link] Weld/blend overlapping vertices......................................................................................................................... 267
[Link] Delete vertex with profile opening ...................................................................................................................... 267
[Link] Delete vertex with profile closing ....................................................................................................................... 267
[Link] Move vertex ........................................................................................................................................................ 267
[Link] Round vertex ....................................................................................................................................................... 268
[Link] Chamfer vertex ................................................................................................................................................... 268
10.5.9 Automatic Polyline Creation ...................................................................................................................... 268
[Link] Turning a circle into a circular polyline .............................................................................................................. 268
[Link] Automatic polyline construction ......................................................................................................................... 268
10.6 VIEW 269
10.6.1 Zoom in ...................................................................................................................................................... 269
10.6.2 Zoom out .................................................................................................................................................... 269
10.6.3 Reset zoom ................................................................................................................................................. 269
10.6.4 Zoom on window ........................................................................................................................................ 269
10.6.5 Optimized zoom .......................................................................................................................................... 270
10.6.6 Whole screen display ................................................................................................................................. 270
10.6.7 Display suction cups .................................................................................................................................. 270
10.6.8 Working faces visualization ....................................................................................................................... 271
10.6.9 Measure distances and angles ................................................................................................................... 273
[Link] Measure segments ............................................................................................................................................... 273
[Link] Measure angles ................................................................................................................................................... 273
10.7 ADVANCED MACHININGS........................................................................................................................................... 274
10.7.1 Flange holes ............................................................................................................................................... 274
10.7.2 Introduction of special figures (fitting grooves)......................................................................................... 276
10.7.3 Import ISO macros (subprograms) ............................................................................................................ 277
10.7.4 Creation of hollowed profiles..................................................................................................................... 278
10.7.5 ISO instructions.......................................................................................................................................... 279
10.8 GENERAL AND DEFAULT PARAMETER SETTING .......................................................................................................... 280
10.8.1 Project default-setting ................................................................................................................................ 280
10.8.2 General default-setting............................................................................................................................... 281
[Link] Boring default-setting ......................................................................................................................................... 281
10.8.3 DXF default-setting .................................................................................................................................... 282
10.8.4 TED default-setting .................................................................................................................................... 283
[Link] General default-setting ........................................................................................................................................ 283
[Link] Boring default-setting ......................................................................................................................................... 284
[Link] Cutting default-setting ........................................................................................................................................ 284
[Link] Routing default-setting........................................................................................................................................ 285

Pag.6
MW310 – Project Windows
[Link] Indexed boring default-setting ............................................................................................................................ 285
10.8.5 Defining tool names ................................................................................................................................... 286
10.9 DXF FORMAT ............................................................................................................................................................. 287
11 MACHINE CONFIGURATION (FOR TECHNICIANS ONLY) ................................................................... 292
11.1 PROGRAM FILE DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................................................... 292
11.2 GENERAL MW310 CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................... 294
11.3 FOLDER AND PATH DEFINITION ................................................................................................................................. 295
11.4 CORRECTIVE PROCEDURE FOR THE SCREW- PITCH ERROR .......................................................................................... 296
11.4.1 Linear Axes ................................................................................................................................................ 296
11.4.2 Rotating Axes ............................................................................................................................................. 297
11.5 CONFIGURATION OF SERIAL CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................ 298
11.5.1 Configuration of the connection between the Pc and the Syncro ............................................................... 298
11.5.2 Configuration of the connection between MW310 and the Line Manager................................................. 299
11.5.3 Format of the data being exchanged between the line PC and the machine NC ....................................... 300
[Link] Commands from the NC to the server ................................................................................................................. 300
[Link] Commands from the server to the NC ................................................................................................................. 300
[Link] Valid data fields: ................................................................................................................................................. 301
[Link] Typical cycle: ...................................................................................................................................................... 301
11.5.4 Barcode reader configuration .................................................................................................................... 304
[Link] Data format for “Standard” barcode labels ........................................................................................................ 304
[Link] [Link] file format ................................................................................................................................. 305
[Link] Data format for “Customized” barcode labels.................................................................................................... 306
[Link] Setting the Barcode serial port ............................................................................................................................ 309
11.5.5 Configuration of the Laser Projector ......................................................................................................... 310
11.5.6 Using the LT190 printer ............................................................................................................................. 311
[Link] Driver installation ............................................................................................................................................... 311
11.6 ANUBA-HINGE MANAGEMENT ENABLING ................................................................................................................... 312
11.7 SETTING MACHINE PARAMETERS............................................................................................................................... 312
11.7.1 Machine Parameters (SYNCRO)................................................................................................................ 313
11.7.2 General Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 313
11.7.3 Stop Offsets ................................................................................................................................................ 314
11.7.4 Head configuration .................................................................................................................................... 316
[Link] Machine Configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 317
[Link] Configuration of the Automatic Loader and Tools ............................................................................................. 340
[Link] Index Head Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 341
[Link] Multiple head configuration ................................................................................................................................ 348
[Link] Configuration of Tilting Tools (Tilting Spindles) ............................................................................................... 354
[Link] Automatic Loader Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 360
[Link] Configuration of Supporting plates e Vacuum-pad Supports .............................................................................. 361
11.8 DESCRIPTION OF ALL MACHINE PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................ 365
11.8.1 Meaning of “Machine Parameters” .......................................................................................................... 365
[Link] Machine Parameters of a Generic D.C. Axis ...................................................................................................... 365
[Link] Machine Parameters for a Generic A.C. Axis ..................................................................................................... 367
[Link] Machine Parameters for the interpolating –axis .................................................................................................. 368
[Link] Machine General Parameters “Interpolation parameters” ................................................................................... 369
[Link] Machine General Parameters2 ............................................................................................................................ 369
[Link] “Remote Inputs” ................................................................................................................................................. 369
[Link] “Remote Outputs” ............................................................................................................................................... 369
11.8.2 Meaning of “General Parameters” ([Link] file) ............................................................................... 370
[Link] “General Parameters 1" ....................................................................................................................................... 370
[Link] “General Parameters 2”....................................................................................................................................... 373
[Link] “General Parameters 3" ....................................................................................................................................... 377
[Link] “General Parameters 4" ....................................................................................................................................... 378
[Link] “General Parameters 5" ....................................................................................................................................... 378
[Link] “General Parameters 6" ....................................................................................................................................... 379
[Link] “General Parameters 7" ....................................................................................................................................... 380
[Link] PARAMETERS FOR 5 AXIS HEAD ................................................................................................................ 381
[Link] PARAMETERS ANUBA 2004 .......................................................................................................................... 381
11.8.3 Remote Axes' Parameters ( SH*.PRMFile)- .............................................................................................. 383
[Link] List of General Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 383
11.8.4 Saw Operation............................................................................................................................................ 384
11.8.5 Loader ........................................................................................................................................................ 385
11.9 PROFIBUS 386
11.9.1 First Remote I/O installation procedure: ................................................................................................... 386
[Link] Profi configuration program................................................................................................................................ 387

Pag.7
MW310 – Project Windows
11.9.2 Number allocation scheme for remote I/Os ............................................................................................... 390
11.9.3 Implemented Dp -Master on the Profibus Board ....................................................................................... 392
[Link] General Information ............................................................................................................................................ 392
[Link] Limitations .......................................................................................................................................................... 392
[Link] Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 392
[Link] Tecnos DP-Master + processor B ...................................................................................................................... 392
[Link] Meaning of LED indicators................................................................................................................................. 393
[Link] Converting a generic I/O definition file .............................................................................................................. 393
11.10 LOADING TXFLASH PROGRAM ............................................................................................................. 394
11.10.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................ 394
11.10.2 Application execution ............................................................................................................................. 394
11.10.3 Using the txflash utility .......................................................................................................................... 394
11.11 PLCEDI PROGRAM FOR WINDOWS .......................................................................................................... 396
11.11.1 introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 396
11.11.2 Application execution ............................................................................................................................. 396
11.11.3 Using the Plcedi utility ........................................................................................................................... 396
[Link] Main window elements ....................................................................................................................................... 397
11.11.4 Detailed description of operating modes ............................................................................................... 398
[Link] ON-LINE ............................................................................................................................................................ 398
[Link] OFF-LINE........................................................................................................................................................... 398
[Link] Example of OFF-LINE mode operation with remote I/Os .................................................................................. 398
11.11.5 Dropdown Menus ................................................................................................................................... 400
[Link] File Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 400
[Link] Functions Menu .................................................................................................................................................. 402
[Link] Connection Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 404
[Link] Help Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 404
[Link] PopUp Menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 404
11.11.6 Notes ...................................................................................................................................................... 405
[Link] EQU files ............................................................................................................................................................ 405
[Link] DEF Files ............................................................................................................................................................ 405
[Link] REM files ............................................................................................................................................................ 405
[Link] The [Link] file ............................................................................................................................................ 405
[Link] Remote I/Os ........................................................................................................................................................ 405
[Link] Inputs and outputs with particular meaning ........................................................................................................ 405
11.12 SYNCROVIEW32 USER'S GUIDE .............................................................................................................. 406
11.12.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................ 406
[Link] Minimum Hardware and Software Requirements ............................................................................................... 406
[Link] General Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 406
[Link] Introduction for SyncroView DOS users ............................................................................................................ 406
11.12.2 SyncroView Windows ............................................................................................................................. 407
[Link] Main Window ..................................................................................................................................................... 407
[Link] Information ......................................................................................................................................................... 407
[Link] PLC Points .......................................................................................................................................................... 408
[Link] Machine Status.................................................................................................................................................... 408
[Link] Remote Machine Status ...................................................................................................................................... 408
[Link] ................................................................................................................................................................................... 408
[Link] Analogical boards ............................................................................................................................................... 408
[Link] Variables ............................................................................................................................................................. 409
[Link] Parameter Management....................................................................................................................................... 410
[Link] PLC file management ......................................................................................................................................... 410
[Link] SBL file management ......................................................................................................................................... 410
[Link] Send immediate commands ................................................................................................................................ 411
[Link] PLC Pass Point ................................................................................................................................................... 411
[Link] Trace PLC Points ................................................................................................................................................ 413
[Link] Trace Axes .......................................................................................................................................................... 413
11.12.3 Project File ............................................................................................................................................ 414
[Link] What are project files? ........................................................................................................................................ 414
[Link] Project File Management .................................................................................................................................... 414
12 INPUT AND OUTPUT DIAGNOSIS (FOR TECHNICIANS ONLY) ......................................................... 415
12.1 CN12 INPUTS WITH [Link] ............................................................................................................................. 415
12.1.1 Fields.......................................................................................................................................................... 420
12.1.2 Automatic 0/90 saw .................................................................................................................................... 420
12.1.3 Shoulder tool changer without front clamp sensor .................................................................................... 420
12.1.4 Tool changer motor .................................................................................................................................... 421
12.1.5 Anuba-hinge face ....................................................................................................................................... 421
12.1.6 2 Fields....................................................................................................................................................... 421

Pag.8
MW310 – Project Windows
12.1.7 4 Fields....................................................................................................................................................... 421
13 NULL SPEED MODULE LEDS (FOR TECHNICIANS ONLY) ................................................................... 422

Pag.9
MW310 – Project Windows

1 MW310 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.1 MINIMUM HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

Minimum operating requirements for MW310 application

WINDOWS 95/98, WINDOWS NT (or above) software must be previously installed in the PC.
This software may be installed in PCs having the following minimum requirements:

• Intel CPU with a 486 DX4 100 Mhz Processor or above;

hard disk with a minimum 40 MB free space;
• VGA 800x600 video with 32000 colors;
• a two button mouse, the eventual third button would be unused;
• 32 MB RAM;
• 3.5 floppy drive for 1.44MB.

If the software is being run on an office PC, Mastersystem dongle should also be installed in
the LPT1 parallel port.
If instead is being run on our processing machine, no dongle is required.

Pag.10
MW310 – Project Windows

1.2 OPERATING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Before using the Personal computer to manage the machine, the operating system must be set as
described below.

1) Press “START”, “Settings”, “Control Panel” to display the window shown in the figure below.

2) Double click on “Energy Savings Options” to set all of the options as shown in the following
figure.

Pag.11
MW310 – Project Windows
3) Return to the desktop by pressing the righ mouse button, click the option “Properties” and then
click the “Screen Saver” item; disable the screen saver by selecting the option “None” from the
list of available screen savers.

4) It is extremely important that no resident memory programs are installed on the control,
especially antivirus programs.

1.3 SOFTWARE AVAILABILITY ON THE INTERNET SERVER

A constantly upgraded version of this software is available on the internet at the following address:
[Link]
Fig. 1

Description of the files available in the Web Server:

disk1 self-extracting file that will automatically create a “Disk1” folder containing
the software found in the first installation disk.

N.B. The authorization password, provided each time by Masterwood customer care
service, is to be entered in order to start the extracting procedure.

disk2 – Disk…n Self-extracting files generating the other MW310 software installation disks.

[Link] This document file features information concerning MW310 software.

[Link]
[Link]
[Link]

[Link] This self-extracting file, whenever provided, allows creating the patches for
MW310 software version installation disks, found on the internet. Par.[Link].

Pag.12
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] self-extracting file that allows creating a folder containing the support, utility
and set-up software, Par.[Link].

Languages This directory features the following files:

MW310_XX.exe Programs to be used to add languages that are not included in MW310 standard
installation. “XX” stand for the specific language each individual file refers to.
PT = Portuguese, ES = Spanish.

[Link] This file contains all data to be used to update existing languages or add new
ones to MW310.

N.B. Before starting MW310 installation procedure, contact MASTERWOOD customer-care

service for “disk1” extracting password.

After downloading and extracting all “Disk…[Link]” files, you will find “n” new folders, copy them
to a floppy disk. Execute the "Setup" program within the main directory in the first installation
floppy disk, MW310 installation procedure will thus be started and you will only need following the
instructions on the screen, see Par1.4.

Pag.13
MW310 – Project Windows

1.4 INSTALLING MW310 ON A PC OR NC

1.4.1 Installation Part One

Use the installation floppy disks to start the loading procedure by typing [Link] within disk1. In
case you are supplied an installation CD ROM, type [Link] within the “disk1” folder, located
inside the main directory, to start the installation procedure.
Fig. 2

Select the desired language for the installation procedure

Fig. 3

Now select the kind of installation procedure you wish to follow.

<Complete> to install MW310 on a PC with no previous version of this software.

<Update> to update a previous MW310 version

Fig. 4

Pag.14
MW310 – Project Windows

At the end of the loading process, answer to the questions by confirming the default options.

Fig. 5

The picture here below shows the “Configuration Setup” program screen, if you run the complete
installation procedure press “OK (Save)”, if instead you only updated the software press “Cancel”.

Fig. 6

Then, press "OK" in case of complete installation, and "Cancel" if just updating.

Pag.15
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 7

The message below will thus appear on the screen:

Fig. 8

If you confirmed by pressing "OK", answer “NO” to the following question:

Fig. 9

Answer “NO” to the following question:

Fig. 10

Pag.16
MW310 – Project Windows

Once you've installed MW310, it will be automatically run every time the NC is started, but at the
end of the installation procedure you still need to run it by clicking on its desktop icon. Load
machine parameters by means of the “Update” option (see fig.8), this function is enabled by
pressing “ ” (File Manager).
Fig. 11

Turn the PC power off, wait for 10 seconds and turn it on again.
The first part of MW310 installation is completed upon PC restarting and consequent software
running.

Pag.17
MW310 – Project Windows

1.4.2 Installation Part Two

[Link] Installing the patches (if supplied)

The below procedures are absolutely to be followed in case the directory

[Link]/pub/mw310 (see Fig. 1), includes the “[Link]” file.

Download “[Link]” file from the Internet and execute it.

Fig. 12

Click on “Unzip” to create the below directories on the desktop:

- A “Masterwood” directory, featuring another sub-directory.

- The name of the directory created inside the first one identifies the MW310 version the Patch
refers to.
- This second directory features a further sub-directory named “Diskpatch”, this one contains the
“[Link]” file that is to be copied on a floppy disk.
Fig. 13

Confirm by pressing “OK” and exit the program by pressing “Close”.

Now you only need copying the "[Link]" file from the “Diskpatch” directory to a disk you
will label “patch disk”.
To finish this procedure, insert the "patch disk" into the NC disk drive, execute the “[Link]”
file and your MW310 version will be automatically updated.

N.B. If you have several patch disks, class them as “[Link]”.Follow the instructions
contained in Par.[Link]. and be careful to load the disks in their numerical order.

Pag.18
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Support utility installation

The following procedures are necessarily to be carried out at the end of the previously described
installation steps.

The [Link]/pub/mw310 directory (see Fig. 1), features the “[Link]” self-
extracting file, this is to be used to create the support disk for the installation of the support software
for YASKAWA and PANASONIC drivers' parametring.

Download “[Link]” file from the Internet and execute it.

Fig. 14

Click on “Unzip” to create the below directories on the desktop:

- A “Masterwood” directory, featuring another sub-directory.

- The name of the directory created inside the first one identifies the MW310 the Patch refers to.
- This second directory features a further sub-directory named “support disk”, this one contains
the files to be copied on a floppy disk.

Fig. 15

Confirm by pressing “OK” and exit the program by pressing “Close”.

Now you only need copying the all files contained within the “support disk” directory to a disk you
will label “support disk”.
To finish this procedure, insert the "support disc" into the NC disc drive, run the “[Link]” file and
the support software will be automatically installed.

Pag.19
MW310 – Project Windows

1.4.3 Finishing the installation

[Link] Syncro initialization procedure

The following procedure is required only in the below-listed cases:

1. After a TXFLASH, syncro software installation procedure, in flash eproms, see Par. 11.10. This
procedure is required only if a Syncro is being installed for the first time.

2. If a quite old version is being upgraded - software version V 2.13 and previous ones. In the above-
mentioned cases, please contact Masterwood customer-care service.

Type-in the password to enter the "machine parameters" setting window.

Fig. 16

Click on the “ ” - SYNCRO Initialization- button and confirm at every question. In so doing,
processor B will also be updated with the same parameters.

Pag.20
MW310 – Project Windows

2 DESCRIPTION OF INCLUDED APPLICATIONS

The user interface consists of several Windows applications (WIN32) controlling the different
machine functions. The main application is [Link] and it is automatically started whenever
the machine is powered on.
Additional applications relating to the user interface are:

[Link] Program sequence editor, it is started by clicking on the (Modify Sequence

File), “ ” button within the main window.

[Link] Tool set-up editor, it is started by clicking on the (Tool Files), “ ” button
within the main window

[Link] Tool-magazine editor, it is started by double-clicking on a tool within the tool

files window

[Link] Head configuration editor, it is started by clicking on the “Head

Configuration” button within the parameter setting menu (Machine
Parameters), “ ”.

[Link] Interactive Program (Masterwork), it is started by clicking on the “ ”

button within the main window, see par 10.

[Link] Editor for the machine inputs and outputs setting file, ([Link]), see par.
11.11.

Contrary to the above-described applications, the following ones may not be started within the main
program; you therefore need exiting MW310 and executing the applications according to the
instructions provided here below.

[Link] Editor for MW310 program initialization file ([Link]), click on the

“ ” (Configuration Setup) button, located on windows desktop, to start it.

[Link] Data transfer program, it is used to write the syncro software on the Flash
eproms, (*.SC0), See Par.11.10.

[Link] Program used to transfer data concerning remote inputs to the PROFIBUS
board Flash Eprom, See par. [Link]

Pag.21
MW310 – Project Windows

3 MAIN TOOLBAR
The screen upper part is the same for all screen pages of the MW310 application program and
specifically it contains a “general tool bar” made up of various buttons selectable by means of a
simple mouse click so to activate the relevant function, and a “status bar” providing information on
machine status.

3.1 GENERAL TOOL BAR

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

MACHINE STATUS

TOOL CONFIGURATION

ISO EDITOR

MASTERSYSTEM CAD

DATA SAVING

WINDOWS SHUTDOWN

MACHINE PARAMETERS

Pag.22
MW310 – Project Windows

3.2 STATUS BAR

On the right side of the screen the “status bar” gives information on machine general conditions:

LED, IF BLINKING, INDICATES A

COMMUNICATION IN COURSE
WITH THE SYNCRO SYSTEM

NAME OF THE CURRENTLY ACTIVE

PART-PROGRAM

CURRENT PHASE

CURRENT STATUS

The CURRENT PHASE indicates the current stage of the program compilation:

• CMP stands for: program compilation in course (active)

• ERR indicates an error in program compilation (the specific type of error is read in the
error status bar)
• OK stands for: program compilation completed and no error surveyed
• BLn stands for: stand-by before workpiece clamping in field n

The CURRENT STATUS indicates the present stage of the program execution by the tooling
machine or the present error arisen in execution phase:

• EXE stands for: execution in course (active)

• RES stands for: reset not performed
• BLK stands for: undefined workpiece clamping in execution course
• PRG stands for: no program selected for execution
• PCS stands for: number of workpieces to machine = 0
• P2C stands for: on machine with 2 working areas, a program is selected for
contemporaneous execution on fields A and B or on fields C and D
• PPL stands for: selection for execution of a long piece machining program is not
correct
• LIN stands for: start of program execution in line was given when line is not ready
yet

Pag.23
MW310 – Project Windows

4 AUTOMATIC MENU
The Automatic menu is MW310 start-up window. By recalling "Single Sequence Editor" or
"Sequence Editor” , " within the automatic menu, you may set the machining program to be
executed, the working areas and the number of machining repetitions; you may also set a sequence

of such programs by means of the specific editor; you may finally enter the “barcode” (Par.

4.8), or the laser projector functions -if enabled (Par.4.7).

Fig. 17
BOX ALLOWING TO
DEDICATED ENABLE THE
TOOLBAR AUTOMATIC LOADER

NAME OF THE SEQUEN-CE

FILE IN EXECUTION BOX ALLOWING
TO ENABLE
AUTOMATIC
REPETITIONS VACUUM-PAD
POSITIONING

PROGRAM STEP
CURRENTLY
EXECUTED
SYSTEM ERRORS
SIGNALISATION BOX

SIGNALISATION BOX FOR

COMPILATION ERRORS OR
MESSAGES TO THE USER

As you can see the upper part of the Automatic page contains the dedicated toolbar with the
following icons:

IN LINE MODE

BARCODE
LASER PROJECTOR
CONTROLS MEASUREMENT
PROGRAM CHECK-UP MEASUREMENT
UNIT
CYCLE END

ACTIVATE THE EXECUTION OF THE SELECTED SEQUENCE

RECALL THE SEQUENCE EDITOR IN SINGLE STEP MODE

RECALL THE SEQUENCE EDITOR ON THE FILE CURRENTLY OPEN

CREATE NEW SEQUENCE FILE BY RECALLING THE SPECIFIC EDITOR

SELECT A FILE (WITH EXTENSION SEQ) FROM THE PRESET PROGRAM SEQUENCE

Pag.24
MW310 – Project Windows

4.1 WORKING STEP SETTING

In the middle of the page you can see a box in which to enter the number of the current sequence
step and the number of repetitions of said step, i.e. the number of pieces to machine. This
information is automatically changed when selecting a new sequence and is updated while the
program is being executed. User can change this data only when machine is not working.

Step selection is enabled only with "Multiple Sequence". One only step is available with the single
sequence

The machining pitch window displays both the properties of the current program and the properties
of the following machinings. (Fig. 18).

Fig. 18

The first column contains the number of the working field used (up to 4 areas if machine is enabled
to).

The second column contains the name of the program to execute on the above-mentioned area.

The third column indicates against which stop workpiece must be placed (depends on the working
area).

Columns 4, 5 and 6 respectively contain the workpiece dimensions along axis X, axis Y and axis Z.

The last column contains the workpiece clamping means used, refer to Par. 4.3 “Clamping Means
Patterns”.

Arrangement of machine stops

Pag.25
MW310 – Project Windows

4.2 SEQUENCE EDITOR

The information contained in the current step chart defines one single working step. It is possible to
create a sequence of more such working steps using the sequence editor ([Link]) that can

be recalled upon the following key found on the toolbar:

The sequence editor looks like a chart made up of n 1……..99 single steps that can be imported
(pasted), deleted or appended one after the other.

Fig. 19

CREATE NEW SEQUENCE FILE

CREATE NEW SEQUENCE APPEND A STEP
OPEN SEQUENCE FILE
APRI SEQUENZA IMPORT A STEP
SAVE SEQUENCE FILE
SALVA SEQUENZA DELETE A STEP

It is possible to set up to 99 pitch sequences, each pitch having its own repetition; the name of the
PART-PROGRAM to be executed on a given area is to be set within the PROGRAM column (i.e.,
[Link]); The workpiece original dimensions, recorded in the program, are then automatically
retrieved in the following columns. The dimensions to be taken into account when executing the
program may also be modified by editing the displayed values. Programs may be selected both
within the directory defined at set-up and within another location. Programs may also be selected
from a remote drive (LAN); the complete path for the selected file, in this case, will be displayed in
the PROGRAM box.

Pag.26
MW310 – Project Windows

4.3 CLAMPING MEANS PATTERNS

Before executing a program, the type of workpiece clamping to be used during machining should
also be identified. The clamping type may be selected within the “clamping”, BLK, column, which
may be edited by double-clicking on the corresponding box.
If the box is empty, you may create new clamping schemes; upon double-clicking, the “ ” key will
appear on the right of the screen, click on it and the window shown in Fig. 20 will appear, here you
may select the name of the file containing the clamping settings. If the list is empty or it does not
include the filename you entered, a new file will be created. After typing the name and confirming, a
new window will open, Fig. 21, where you may select the clamping type you prefer.
Fig. 20

Fig. 21

Pag.27
MW310 – Project Windows

Here follows a detailed explanation of the different clamping options.

It allows selecting the clamping type:

NORMAL “with vacuum pads”
PLATE “ with plates installed on stop pistons”
INTERNAL “special execution”
MECHANIC “manual clamping brackets”
ROTARY STOP “special execution”
NARROW PIECES “ with special sinking stop”
TEMPLATE CLAMPING “special vacuum with templates”
BRACKETS "with piston-driven brackets"

It allows vacuum control enabling or disabling during machining and

clamping (ON = control enabled)

When “AUTO” is selected, the machine automatically lowers the stops upon
pressing “START”, before actually running the machining. If “FOOT-
PEDAL” is selected, the machine lowers or raises the stops each time the
foot-pedal is pushed, before pressing “START”.

It allows workpiece-lift (if installed) enabling or disabling. If it is enabled

(ON), the workpiece-lifts will rise at first foot-pedal pushing and they will
come down, thus locking the workpiece, at second pushing.

It allows enabling or disabling the translating motion for the Anuba-hinge

Face (if there is one) during hinge inserting. (ON = enabled)

It allows enabling or disabling the FULL AREA EXECUTION mode for

workpiece machining management.

Pag.28
MW310 – Project Windows

4.4 SINGLE STEP EXECUTION

If you don’t want to execute a complete sequence of various programs you may perform one single
step thereof upon recall of the sequence editor in single step mode, obtained clicking on the specific

icon of the toolbar:

In this case the file shall automatically be named [Link]. Is the program already set on
single step editor mode, what means that the current sequence file was already bearing the name
[Link] you may modify the data of the concerned step by a simple double mouse click on
the chart (Fig. 18). In this way it is possible to modify at once the machining information referred to
the step in execution.

4.5 PROGRAM CHECK-UP

The MW310 application program is a powerful instrument able to execute ISO programs of
unlimited dimensions with the only restriction of the current capacity of the storage hard disk, and
such program execution is contemporaneous with its compilation insofar as the application does no
require any pre-compilation. But in case a very long program should contain one or more errors the
NC would automatically stop the execution in the moment when the error is surveyed, no matter if a
long part of the program had been executed yet. In order to avoid time and material waste it is
possible to provide for a check-up of the program prior to running it, simply clicking on the toolbar

key:

4.6 AUTOMATIC LOADER

After enabling the automatic loader management as described in Par. [Link], a checkmark will
appear inside the “Loader” checkbox, within the automatic menu. Check it on or off to enable and
disable automatic loader operation. After enabling automatic loader operation, you need setting the
parameters contained in the ISO program auxiliary features page (Value U1, Value U2, Value V),

With the loader disabled, the workpiece may be fed manually.

Fig. 22

Pag.29
MW310 – Project Windows

4.7 ENABLING AUTOMATIC VACUUM-PAD MANAGEMENT

If MW310 program is configured, it will provide the vacuum-pad positioning values. Check on the

“ ” box in the automatic menu to enable vacuum pads management function.

Automatic Vacuum Pads:

With machine models equipped with motorized vacuum pads, the NC will display, during the
program editing process, the positioning values for the supporting plates and for the vacuum pads; it
will also position them through a completely automatic procedure.

Manual Vacuum Pads:

With machines not equipped with automatic vacuum pads, the NC, during the program editing
process, will display the values identifying the locations where the supporting plates and the
corresponding vacuum pads should be positioned.

Vacuum pads positioning:

The positioning value identifies the distance between the support plate center and the zero stop
on the Y-axis. For a correct positioning, the stop will therefore have to be moved until one of the
support plates front corners, working as indicator, points to the required value along the
millimetric rulers.

Supporting plate positioning:

The positioning value identifies the distance between the support plate center and the zero stop
along the X-axis. To properly position the vacuum pad, you should move the supporting plate
until the arrow, located near the front right bearing of the supporting plate, points to the required
value along the millimeter ruler.

Pag.30
MW310 – Project Windows

4.8 BARCODE EXECUTION

Before using the barcode reader, you need setting up the NC by enabling barcode reading. In order
to do so, follow the configuration procedure described in par. 11.5.4.

- To enable Barcode operation, simply press the “Barcode” button, , after assigning to all
fields the selected clamping means.
-

N.B. AT LEAST ONE TYPE OF CLAMPING MEANS SHOULD BE ASSIGNED TO EACH

FIELD OR A CLAMPING ERROR MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED

- Press the “Menu” button, on the left of the "barcode" button, to exit barcode mode; the
machine will thus automatically go back to automatic mode.

- The “Program Directory" button, on the right of the “Barcode” button, allows selecting the
directory containing the programs to load by means of the barcode. The selected barcode directory
will be active until the program is quit.

Upon pressing the “Barcode” button, a new system operating mode is enabled.
The new window, similar to the traditional automatic menu, features a new box, named “Barcode”,
where the string being read by the barcode reader, named Barcode, will be displayed.

Every label being read will be shown in the “Barcode” field, the name of the program will instead be
displayed in the appropriate field within the automatic menu. The program just read will
immediately be executed and the machine will start machining upon START button pressure.

If other labels are read during Barcode mode machining, the corresponding programs will possibly
be immediately executed, thus allowing workpiece clamping.

If the machine is engaged in a machining over that specific area or is carrying out a full-area
machining, the program being read will not be immediately executed, but reservation will be made
for the corresponding machining, which will be executed as soon as possible. If a program has been
reserved and a new label is read, the pending machining will be replaced with the new one, which
will be either immediately carried out or executed as soon as possible.

N.B. Possible label formats (barcode strings) are described in Par [Link]. (EN_BARCODE=1)
and Par. [Link]. (EN_BARCODE=2).

Pag.31
MW310 – Project Windows

4.9 MANUAL DATA INPUT EXECUTION

If the machine has been equipped for use with a bar code reader, it will also be possible to work in
the “Manual Input” mode.
This particular operating mode makes it possible to machine a piece by simply indicating the name
of the program, the stop against which the piece is to rest and the dimensions of the finished piece.
Then, by simply clicking on the “Execute” key with the mouse, the machining operation indicated in
the loaded program will be started.
Fig. 23

this operating mode allows highly dynamic selection of the program to be executed and allows the
machining of the next piece to be reserved in the same way as when using a bar code reader for
machining operations.

Pag.32
MW310 – Project Windows

4.10 FILE CSV EXECUTION

If the machine has been equipped for use with a bar code reader, it will also be possible to work in
the “File CSV” mode.
This particular operating mode makes it possible to execute the production cycle as specified in a
preconfigured file.
Fig. 24

This File may be created with excel and saved as “*.csv” file. An example is given below:

RIP100;;;;
[Link];A;2000;800;50
[Link];D;1500;800;50
ENDRIP;;;;
[Link];A;2000;800;50

In the first line, the RIP100 instruction indicates how many times the block of instructions between
the RIPn and the ENDRIP commands must be repeated (in this example, 100 times).

The “ENDRIP” command is used to mark the end of the block of instructions to be repeated for
“RIPn” (in this example, 100 times).

All of the lines inserted outside of the RIPn and ENDRIP block will be executed one time only.

Therefore, all of the necessary “RIPn” “ENDRIP” blocks can be inserted consecutively, as long as
nested blocks are not created.

Pag.33
MW310 – Project Windows

To execute the machining operations contained in the loaded CSV file, just press the “Execute” key.
If you want to start the execution from a line other than the first, just insert the number of the line
into the box at the upper right of the “Manual Barcode” window and click on the “Execute” key.

Once the execution has been started, the selected record will be highlighted in yellow, while the next
record will be highlighted in green.

When the machining operation is started, a copy of the CSV file is created. Two new fields will be
added to this file: the first indicates the number of pieces produced, while the second gives the
number of programmed pieces. The information relative to these two pieces of information will be
shown as updated and saved in the copy of the “*.csv” file.

N.B.
By loading the created file, the machine will remember the number of pieces already produced.

Pag.34
MW310 – Project Windows

4.11 USING THE LASER PROJECTOR

The laser projector should be enabled, as described in par. 11.5.5., before it may be operated..

After enabling laser projector control, the programmed machinings may be projected over the
working face.
Fig. 25

Some modifications are to be carried out to ISO programs in order to project them. The NC is in fact
to receive specifications about exactly what information is to be sent from the ISO program to the
laser projector. See par.8.12.

Once the program containing the information for the laser projector is loaded, the

“ ” icons located at the top of automatic menu, will allow the program
projection, respectively in:

• Area 1
• Area 4
• In Area 1 and 4 at the same time
• Projecting the program on the workpiece - workpiece thickness is taken into account in projection
• The fifth icon stops the projection.

Pag.35
MW310 – Project Windows

4.12 MANUAL TOOL CHANGER

If the machine is properly set-up, tools may be assembled, disassembled and replaced on the
spindle.

In order to do so, manual tool assembly is to be enabled by setting a parameter and defining at least
one "manual tool magazine". "Manual magazine defining" and “manual tool-changing
configuration” procedures are described in Par.[Link].9, Par. 11.7.4

There are two different manual tool-changing operation modes, the first one is designed for “EC
machines” (See par. 4.12.1.), the second one for “non-EC machines" (See par.4.12.2.).

N.B. The flange angle identifies the position of the indexed head rotate-lock pin on the spindle
flange. Angles are defined according to the following convention:

Fig. 26

Their width increases with

counterclockwise rotation, looking at
the pantograph from the tool clamping
(front) side.

Bottom View

Pag.36
MW310 – Project Windows

4.12.1 Manual tool-changer operation (EC machine)

If machine configuration allows for manual tool change complying with EC regulations, only
programs providing for the pantograph to be used with the same routing bit, all the working cycle
long, shall be executed. Such a constraint is required by EC regulation compliance.

The procedure to set the tool number in the ISO program is the same as for setting the tools using
automatic tool changer magazines (i.e., T25/27).

Fix the tool on the spindle before starting the program. As soon as the tool is clamped inside the
spindle, the message shown in Fig. 25, requesting for the reference number of the mounted tool, and
the flange angle in case of multiple heads, appears on the NC display. Click on the icon located on
the right of the tool number to display the list of the routing bits available on the machine.

Fig. 27

After confirming the data, the NC checks, upon program execution, if they match the set ones
(with multiple heads the NC controls not only the tool number but also the set flange angle). If
they don’t, an error message will be displayed, see Fig. 26 here below.
Fig. 28

Pag.37
MW310 – Project Windows

4.12.2 Manual Tool-Changer Operation (Non-EC Machine)

If machine configuration allows for manual tool change non complying with EC regulations,
programs containing machinings to be carried out by means of different routing bits, with both
manual and automatic change, may be executed.

The corresponding ISO program does not feature any programming peculiarity and it will have the
same format as programs using automatic tool-change routing bits.

Machining starts upon program execution and it follows the set sequence until a tool change is
required. In case of manual tool-change, the machine will automatically disassemble the T.C.
routing bit, if any, and will lay it in the tool magazine. It will therefore move to the "manual T.C."
positions defined within "general parameters 7" (Par. [Link]) and display the "Insert tool" message
(Fig. 29).

N.B. If an indexed head is being inserted, the machining and flange angles will be displayed after
its assembly.

Fig. 29

The manual tool-change routing bit may now be fixed on the spindle; consequently enter the tool
reference number and confirm by pressing "ENTER".

If no tool-discrepancy errors occur, (Fig. 30) or (Fig. 31), program execution will continue upon
"START CYCLE" button pressure.

Fig. 30

Pag.38
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 31

In order to prevent tool-discrepancy errors, pay great attention to the messages displayed on the
screen during manual tool-change; the machine, in facts, checks, to the possible extent, if the
operations being carried out comply with the ISO set ones. Any error will stop program execution.
At the end of a manual tool machining, and only if more than one machining are to be executed, the
axes will be moved to the “manual T.C.” positions defined within “general parameters 7”, Par.
[Link]). If then an automatic tool is needed, the "Disassemble tool" message will be displayed on
the NC (Fig. 32).
Disassemble the manual tool and press "START" to continue machining from the following program
line.

Fig. 32

CAUTION
TOOL-CHANGE OPERATIONS MAY ONLY BE CARRIED OUT
AFTER THE TOOL HAS COME TO A COMPLETE STOP

Pag.39
MW310 – Project Windows

4.13 IN LINE MODE

After the machine is configured for in-line operation mode, as described in

Par. 11.5.2, a new "In-line mode" button , will be added to the automatic menu. Such key
allows, upon pressure, to send information concerning the machinings to be executed to the remote
line manager, see Fig. 33
Fig. 33

The format of data being exchanged between the line PC and the NC is described in Par. 11.5.3.

Pag.40
MW310 – Project Windows

5 MANUAL MENU
The Manual menu allows you to achieve the manual activation of such machine functions as axes
motions and tool enabling, and to perform the machine general reset or that of a single axis. It is also
possible to monitor all axes values, positioning errors and DAC values as well as the current status
of machine in- and outputs and the NC status that could be in execution or stopped for a fault.
Fig. 34
DEDICATED
TOOLBAR

INPUTS (GREEN)
OUTPUTS (RED)

AXES VALUES, POSITIONING

ERRORS AND DAC VALUES
AXES VALUES, POSITION
ING ERRORS AC ASSI

CURRENTLY INSTAL-
POSSIBLE LED PLC VERSION
PROBLEMS

SYSTEM ERROR CODES EXECUTORS’ STATUS

5.1 AXIS JOG MOTION

Axes jog motion is obtained selecting the concerned axis with a mouse click on its initial, therefore
so the background turns red (see axis U in the above figure), then act on the relevant JOG inputs.

5.2 TOOL ENABLING

When clicking on the “Tool enabling” key , the following sub-tool bar is displayed:
Fig. 35

Pag.41
MW310 – Project Windows

To set a drill or tool projection, simply click on the drawing with the number of the selected tool.

To project all vertical drills at the same time click on the corresponding button.

To project all horizontal drills at the same time click on the corresponding
button.

Press the yellow arrow button to quit this menu.

5.2.1 Tool-Holding Clamps Enabling

Within the manual menu (Fig. 34), Click on the T.C.3 Tool-Holding Clamps enabling button, within
the manual operation menu, “ ”, to enter the following menu:

BACK TO THE PREVIOUS MENU TOOL-HOLDING CLAMP OFF

TOOL-HODING CLAMP ON

Press ON and OFF buttons to enable/disable pressers. Press the yellow arrow button to quit this
menu.

5.3 ANUBA-HINGE CYCLES

Within the manual menu (Fig. 34), press the “Anuba-hinge Cycles” button “ ” to enter to enter
the screen shown in Fig. 36.
Fig. 36

In order to start the selected machining cycle, simply click on the "Start Cycle" button . Click on
to exit “Anuba-hinge Cycles” mode.

Pag.42
MW310 – Project Windows

5.4 ROUTING BIT CYCLES

Within the manual menu (Fig. 34), click on “Routing Bit Cycles” to enter the screen shown in
Fig. 37.
Fig. 37

In order to start the rotation cycle for the routing bit selected from the list, simply click on the “Start
Cycles” button . Click on to quit “Routing-Bit Cycles” mode.

5.5 MACHINE RESET

On the manual menu tool bar (Fig. 34), there are two buttons that allow setting Machine Reset:

START TOOLS GLOBAL RESET

SINGLE-AXIS RESET
START PRESSERS

The GLOBAL RESET button automatically resets all the axes and tools in the NC. If you press this
button (with “START AUXILIARY SWITCHES” enabled), the NC will ask you to press “START
CYCLE” in order to set the “RESET” procedure on. The procedure to be followed at machine start
is described here below:. The RESET SINGLE AXIS button resets one axis. Enable the box
corresponding with the axis to be reset, by clicking on it (the background will thus turn red), then
press” START CYCLE” and the “RESET SINGLE AXIS” procedure will start.

Pag.43
MW310 – Project Windows

5.6 MANUAL DRUM-TYPE MAGAZINE ROTATION

The rotation of the drum-type tool-changer, proceeding by one-tool pitches, is set, within the manual
menu (Fig. 34), by clicking on “ ”.

5.7 MANUAL WORKPIECE UNLOADING

If the machine is equipped with an automatic loader, the manual menu will also feature the “Unload
workpiece” button , starting manual workpiece unloading when pressed for the first time and
stopping it when pressed again.

5.8 TOOLS ASSEMBLED WITH THE MAN. T.C.

Click on the "Tools mounted on the T.C. spindles" button, within the manual operation menu,
to enter the screen shown in Fig. 38.

Fig. 38

The “ T.C. Spindles” box provides the list of the tools currently assembled on the machine
spindles.

Pag.44
MW310 – Project Windows

6 MACHINE STATUS
This menu, contrary to the “Manual” menu, may also be accessed during the machine automatic
operation and is only used to view the machine activities. This mode does not provide for manual
function enabling.
Fig. 39

7 MACHINE TOOLING-UP
Press the “Tooling-up” button within the Automatic menu, to enter the Tool
configuration menu, this activates the specific machine tooling-up application program
([Link]). In doing this, each time a new file is created with the name: [Link],
where xx is the number of the new tool table created, which can be entered from now on in the
relevant ISO machining program header.

Fig. 40

SYNCRO VERSION
(PROCESSOR B)
HEAD
CONFIGURATION
BUTTON

VACUUM-PAD
TOOLING-UP
TOOL-MAGAZINES BUTTON
CONFIGURATION
BUTTON

A machine normally consists of a head and one or more default tool-magazines that are set at
machine configuration ([Link]), which is carried out during machine installation.
The main window (Fig. 40) features several boxes, each representing one of the above-mentioned
machine components; click on one of these boxes to enter “Tooling-up” mode for the corresponding
component, see par. 7.1. “Tooling-up the head”, 7.2. “Tooling Up the Tool Changer Magazines, the
Indexed Heads and the Routers” or 7.5 “Tooling up the vacuum- pads”.

Pag.45
MW310 – Project Windows

7.1 TOOLING-UP THE HEAD

To tool up machine head, select and drag with the mouse a tool from the list displayed on the right
side of the screen (Fig. 41) and drop it in one of the boxes on the left side that correspond to the
various spindles available on machine head.
Use the tool editor to add new tools to the list in the right-side box (Fig. 41), See par. 7.1.1.
Fig. 41

ANUBA-HINGE
HEAD BOX

FIXED SPINDLE BOX

SAW BOX

TOOL-CHANGER
SPINDLE BOX

SHOW TOOLS WITH NUMBERS ONLY

START THE TOOL EDITOR

BACK TO THE MAIN MENU

SAVE TABLE

OPEN TABLE

CREATE NEW TABLE

Pag.46
MW310 – Project Windows

7.1.1 Tool Definition

Tools configuration may be modified within this menu by double-clicking on the tool list, or by
clicking on the key, which allows entering the tool editor ([Link]) by opening the
window shown in Fig. 42.
Fig. 42

The maximum length allowed is 70 mm, for vertical drills, and 57.5 mm for horizontal drill, except
for special applications.

Appropriate boring speed should moreover be set, according to the number of drills being used and
to their diameter. For this purpose, please refer to the following table, which provides the
recommended values.

Drill Speed
diameter
5 2-3 meters
8 1-2 meters
10 1 meter
12 1 meter
35 0.5 meter

N.B. When defining a boring drill, make sure "DRILL", and not "ROUTING BIT", is the selected
item within the tool-defining field.

Pag.47
MW310 – Project Windows

The window displayed in Fig. 42 allows modifying existing tools and setting new ones.
The NC will ask for confirmation before saving new values for the "Max rot. speed" and "Undercut"
fields (see Fig. 43 and Fig. 44), which prevents any accidental and even dangerous modification to
these parameters.
Fig. 43

WARNING DANGER WARNING

PAY CLOSE ATTENTION WHEN INSERTING THE MAXIMUM TOOL ROTATION SPEED BEARING IN
MIND THAT THE NUMBER OF REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE IS X1000.

THEREFORE, IN ORDER TO DEFINE A TOOL WITH A MAXIMUM ROTATION SPEED OF 8000 RPM, 8
MUST BE ENTERED. IN ANY CASE, EACH TIME THE ROTATION SPEED FIELD IS MODIFIED, THE
SYSTEM REQUIRES THAT THE ENTERED VALUE BE CONFIRMED.

ENTERING AN INCORRECT VALUE MAY CREATE SITUATIONS WHICH ARE VERY DANGEROUS FOR
THE MACHINE MECHANICS AND FOR PERSONAL SAFETY.

8000 RPM = 8
12000 RPM = 12
18000 RPM = 18
24000 RPM = 24

WARNING DANGER WARNING

Pag.48
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 44

WARNING DANGER WARNING

PAY CLOSE ATTENTION WHEN DEFINING THE TOOL ROTATION DIRECTION, BEARING IN MIND
THAT WHEN THE TOOL OBSERVATION POINT IS FROM THE MOUTH OF THE SPINDLE, AND THE
TOOL CUTTING ROTATION IS CLOCKWISE, THE TOOL IS DEFINED WITH RIGHTHAND
ROTATION.

WARNING DANGER WARNING

Pag.49
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 45

WARNING DANGER WARNING

IT IS FUNDAMENTALLY IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN UNDERCUT AND
NON UNDERCUT ROUTING BITS.

NON UNDERCUT
FOR ROUTING BITS DEFINED AS NON UNDERCUT, WHEN THE MACHINE IS PLACED INTO AN
EMERGENCY CONDITION OR ON HOLD, OR FOLLOWING AN ERROR, THE NC AUTOMATICALLY
WITHDRAWS THE PANTOGRAPH PROJECTIONS.
FOR EXAMPLE, IN THE CASE OF A PROFILING TOOL, THE IMMEDIATE WITHDRAWAL OF THE
PROJECTIONS FOLLOWING A MACHINE ERROR, HOLD OR EMERGENCY, WOULD CAUSE THE TOOL
TO COLLIDE WITH THE WORKPIECE WHEN THE ROUTING BIT IS SLOWED DOWN, GIVING RISE TO
PARTICULARLY DANGEROUS SITUATIONS. THEREFORE, ALL OF THE ROUTING BITS WITH THIS
TYPE OF MECHANICAL LIMIT, AND ALL TYPES OF INDEXED HEADS MUST BE DECLARED AS
UNDERCUT.

UNDERCUT
FOR ROUTING BITS DEFINED AS UNDERCUT, WHEN THE MACHINE IS PLACED INTO AN EMERGENCY
CONDITION OR ON HOLD, OR FOLLOWING AN ERROR, THE NC DOES NOT WITHDRAW THE
PANTOGRAPH PROJECTIONS AND IT IS NECESSARY TO GO INTO MANUAL MODE AND MANUALLY
MOVE THE ROUTING BIT TO A COLLISION FREE POSITION; THEN, WHEN EXITING FROM THE
MANUAL MODE, THE PANTOGRAPH PROJECTIONS WILL BE AUTOMATICALLY WITHDRAWN.
WARNING DANGER WARNING

Pag.50
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Determining tool length

[Link].1 Tool length with ISO 30 and HSK cone attachment

Pag.51
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].2 Length of tools mounted on NO TC spindles

[Link].3 Length of vertical and horizontal boring bits

Pag.52
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].4 Length of anuba-hinge bits

[Link].5 Length of tools for indexing heads

Pag.53
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Determining the tool rotating direction

In order to define whether a given tool has a rightward or leftward rotation, follow the instructions
below.

The general rule on routing-bit and spindle rotating direction conventionally defines a rightward
rotation spindle (R) as a spindle that moves clockwise when being turned in the working direction
and when being looked at from the opposite side of the tool.

Therefore, if you look at the tool from the front side (as shown in the figures below) and turn it
in its working direction,

if it moves counterclockwise, it is defined as having leftward rotation (L);

if instead it moves clockwise, it is defined as having rightward rotation (R).

If tooth orientation in the saw requires it to If tooth orientation in the saw requires it to turn
turn in the direction shown by the arrow in in the direction shown by the arrow in the
the picture below, the saw itself shall be picture below, the saw itself shall be
considered as having rightward rotation (R). considered as having leftward rotation (L).

Pag.54
MW310 – Project Windows
Based on the information given in the figure, a RH rotation
ttool is shown here to the side

Based on the information given in figure, a LH

rotation tool is shown here to the side

Page55
MW310 – Project Windows

7.1.2 Definition of the chip deflector

In order to couple a chip deflector to a tool, this function must be enabled by checking the «chip
deflector » box in the routing bit data window.

Then proceed by entering the deflector dimension data in the “Deflector” tab, as shown in the
following figure.

Page 56
MW310 – Project Windows

Tangency angle The angle described by the axis of the deflector and the machining
direction, considering that the value of the angle increases, rotating
clockwise.

Page57
MW310 – Project Windows

Min Angle This parameter establishes the minimum machining angle, if a machining
operation is programmed which requires an acute angle with a width which is less
than this parameter, the control will display a message indicating the possibility of
a collision between the deflector and the wood profile. The minimum angle
depends on the sum of several factors.
a. Deflector radius
b. Width angle of the deflector
c. Profiler tool machining depth or max routing depth of the tool.

Page 58
MW310 – Project Windows

T.C. Parking Angle Minimum angle which can be machined along the machining profile.
(This value is used by the Masterwork).

Head Parking Angle Angle at which the C axis is rotated before withdrawing the tool
projection.

Page59
MW310 – Project Windows

Pin Offset Difference between the deflector work angle and the angle of tangency
(pin angle).

Deflector width angle Angular dimensions of the deflector.

Deflector radius The maximum radius of the chip deflector.

Page 60
MW310 – Project Windows

Max Z clearance Maximum clearance in Z of the deflector, used for calculating the air
value.

Page61
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Specifications and configuration

The C axis rotates the chip deflector, therefore a deflector cannot be associated with an Indexed
head or any other accessory that used the C axis.

When executing figures (G211), if a machining operation with deflector is commanded, the
tangency angle remains unchanged during machining.

[Link].1 Additional tool parameters

T.C. ID (HEX) Hexadecimal string representing the 32 bit value that identifies the tool-
holder.

Cutting-edge length Length of the cutting-edge alone (L).

Cutting-edge ref. Offset from the lower cutting-edge (R).

Cutting-edge ref. diam. Diameter on cutting-edge reference (Ø).

Tool profile ref. Tool profile reference (P).

All of these parameters are used by the masterwork in the programming phase.

Page 62
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].2 .utn file Format

The tool file (.utn) with the new data entered, should be formed as follows:

Current parameters :

Parameter description Unit of measure and settable values Example values

0=Drill 1=Router 1
TOOL 2=Blade 3=Sensor

0=Standard 1=Countersinking 0
TYPE 2=V-point 3=flat drill

DIAMETER Height cmm. 10

LENGTH Height cmm. 10645
MAX ROTATION SPEED Rpm 24000
ROTATION DIRECTION 0=Rh 1=Lh 2=Rh/Lh 0

DESCRIPTION Door3
BMP FILE NAME (ICON) [Link]
ENTRY SPEED M/min. 5
MACHINING SPEED M/min. 5
DEPTH OF PASSAGE Height cmm. 0
FLAG TOOL BIT0=Undercut 0
BIT1=Slow acc.
ENABLE CHIP DEFLECTOR. 0=not present 1
1=present
DEFAULT TANGENCY ANGLE Angle in hundredths of a degree 0
MINIMUM MACHINING ANGLE Angle in hundredths of a degree 0
T.C. PARKING ANGLE Angle in hundredths of a degree 0
HEAD PARKING ANGLE Angle in hundredths of a degree 0
PIN OFFSET Angle in hundredths of a degree 0
DEFLECTOR WIDTH ANGLE Angle in hundredths of a degree 0
DEFLECTOR RADIUS Height cmm. 0
MAX CLEARANCE IN Z Height cmm. 0
Future expansions
Future expansions
TOOL-HOLDER ID 8 digits in HEX format (0 – F). 0
32 bit value.
FORWARD FLAGS Bit mapped variable
CUTTING-EDGE LENGTH Height cmm. 0
CUTTING-EDGE REFERENCE Height cmm. 0
CUTTING-EDGE REFERENCE Height cmm. 0
DIAMETER TOOL REFERENCE

7.1.3 Tool-holder properties

Right-click on a tool or aggregated-tool holding clamp (Fig. 39 or Fig. 45) to display its properties
or removing the associated tool (Fig. 46).

Fig. 46

Page63
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 47
The Projection box allows setting the
pantograph projection for tool-change. The
following projections are possible:

No Projection
Single Projection
Double Projection

“Single Projection” is the default suggested

option, great attention therefore needs being paid
at tool allocation, in order to make sure that the
selected projection matches the pantograph
configuration. In other words, to avoid operating
problems, you should check if the pantograph
features the projection set in this box.

The "Tool type" box (Fig. 47) shows the type of

tool allocated to the clamp and is automatically
updated at every new allocation.
Click on the Tool tab (Fig. 47) to display the specific tool parameters, which may not be edited
within this window.

Page 64
MW310 – Project Windows

7.2 TOOLING UP THE TOOL CHANGER MAGAZINES, THE INDEXED

HEADS AND THE ROUTERS

7.2.1 Tooling up the tool changer magazines

To configure the tool-changer magazines, drag the tools from the tool list (at the bottom right of Fig.
48) and drop them on the tool-holders (at the center in Fig. 45).

It is moreover possible to tool up a tool-holder either with a standard indexed head or with a
multiple head as described here following.

1) With standard heads, featuring one single tool-holding inlet, the tool holder needs being
allocated the head type first and then the tool. To allocate a standard head to the tool-
holder, drag it from the list of the heads (at the top right in Fig. 45) to the tool-holder box;
when the tool-holder contains a standard head, it will be painted in a different color,
varying upon the selected type of head.

2) Within the screen shown in Fig. 45 click on “ ” to enter a new screen (see Fig. 46) where
the magazine clamps may be tooled-up with multiple heads, those featuring more than one
tool-holding inlet. To allocate a multiple head to a clamp, drag the corresponding icon from
the list in the right-hand part of the screen onto the destination clamp.

After tooling up a manual tool magazine, it is possible to use the EC manual tool magazine, as
described in Par.4.10.1.

After tooling up a manual tool magazine, it is possible to use the non-EC manual tool magazine, as
described in Par. 4.10.2.

N.B. Remember that if the “EN_CU_MAN” parameter, within the tool configuration menu,
"Magazine Tooling up" ( Par. 7.1.1.) is disabled, the manual magazine “Magazine 24” will
not be active. Tool loading from manual tool changer should also be enabled for the
concerned spindles, as described in [Link]. L'origine riferimento non è stata trovata.

Page65
MW310 – Project Windows

7.2.2 Tooling up standard indexed heads

The same drag-and-drop procedure is to be followed to allocate a routing bit, contained in the list at
the bottom right of the screen, to a standard head (Fig. 45). A congruity control will be carried out
by the NC at routing bit allocation to the standard head, in order to check if they're compatible.

Fig. 48

BOX OF A TOOL-
CHANGER MAGAZINE

SHOW TOOLS OR ONLY NUMBERS

CREATE NEW TABLE
MULTIPLE HEAD EDITOR
OPEN TABLE
TOOL EDITOR
SAVE TABLE
BACK TO THE MAIN MENU

Page 66
MW310 – Project Windows

7.2.3 Tooling up a multiple indexed head

Within the screen shown in Fig. 48 click on “ ” to enter the screen (see Fig. 49) where new
multiple heads may be created.

Fig. 49

In order to create a new indexed head you simply need to double click on the box at the right-hand
side of the screen shown in Fig. 49, an edit box will thus open (see

Fig. 50) where you may define all features of the multiple head.

In order to modify the tooling-up of an existing head, you merely need to double click on the
corresponding icon, which will open the editor showing the selected head parameters (see

Fig. 50).

In order to allocate a routing bit to one of the head inlets, drag the selected tool onto the inlet to be
tooled-up.

When being programmed, multiple heads will be numbered as shown in the example here below:

Example of 4-inlet head.

41/7-1 Pantograph “41” / T.C. magazine clamp “7” – Number of inlet to be used “1”
41/7-2 Pantograph “41” / T.C. magazine clamp “7” – Number of inlet to be used “2”
41/7-3 Pantograph “41” / T.C. magazine clamp “7” – Number of inlet to be used “3”
41/7-4 Pantograph “41” / T.C. magazine clamp “7” – Number of inlet to be used “4”

42/9-1 Pantograph “42” / T.C. magazine clamp “9” – Number of inlet to be used “1”
42/9-2 Pantograph “42” / T.C. magazine clamp “9” – Number of inlet to be used “2”
42/9-3 Pantograph “42” / T.C. magazine clamp “9” – Number of inlet to be used “3”
42/9-4 Pantograph “42” / T.C. magazine clamp “9” – Number of inlet to be used “4”

Page67
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 50

Reference number for the

head that has been set
durino configuration

Head inlets

Where:

Desc. Describes the multiple head

Radius projection It defines the maximum projection between the central and the farthest points
of rotation on the head, with the tools set on, plus a 10mm minimum offset.
The value is given in hundredths of a millimeter.

N.B. If this value is set to zero, the NC will use the radius projection
value set in the multiple head configuration page.

Max Z Proj. It defines the maximum projection measured (along the -axis) between the
hooking and the farthest points on the multiple head with the tools set on.
The value is given in hundredths of a millimeter.

N.B. If this value is set to zero, the NC will use the projection value along
the Z-axis set in the multiple head configuration page.

Icon Click on the "Icon" box to associate the multiple head with a reference icon.

Page 68
MW310 – Project Windows

7.3 ANUBA-HINGE EDITOR FOR INTERPOLATING “2004” HEAD

Following is a description of the characteristics of the anuba-hinges on machines equipped with a
“2004” head for inserting anuba-hinges through interpolation of the axes (EN_ANUBA=21).

Click on the key from the tooling-up page to start the anuba-hinge editor which is used to create
and modify the user anuba characteristics.

The parameters of the anuba model are selected from the “Type” field.

The configurable types are:

N.B. All the positions and parameters relative to the anuba-hinges must be determined by
considering the measurements obtained by positioning the anuba-hinges to be translated
in parameters with the same position as shown in the stylised image on the video.

After having selected the Type, the parameters characteristic of the selected anuba-hinge will be
shown on the screen.

Page69
MW310 – Project Windows

7.3.1 Single Anuba-hinge on 2004 head

Fig. 51

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

In the case of a double anuba-hinge, there will be a Screwing position field used to specify the
position of the threaded hinge shank.
The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [4], [L] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[P] Represents the pitch of the threading on the hinge shank.

[R] Represents the screwing spindle rotation speed given in revolutions per minute.

[A] In the case of a single anuba-hinge, this parameter indicates how many millimeters the shank
will be inserted into the hole before starting the screwing process [Default 5].

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

Page 70
MW310 – Project Windows
Click on the advanced tab to access the following parameters:

[KLA] This parameter acts as an offset on the anuba spindle zero value during single anuba-hinge
machining. By increasing the value of this parameter, the anuba-hinge will be screwed in
closer to the wood.

N.B. IT IS IMPORTANT to remember that the drilling depth is not modified by this
parameter, therefore, it must be first verified that the depth of the hole is sufficient
for mounting the anuba-hinge with the inserted offset value.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page71
MW310 – Project Windows

7.3.2 Double anuba-hinge on 2004 head

Fig. 52

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

In the case of a double anuba-hinge, there will be a Screwing position field used to specify the
position of the threaded hinge shank.

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [2] [4], [L] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[P] Represents the pitch of the threading on the hinge shank.

[R] Represents the screwing spindle rotation speed given in revolutions per minute.

[A] In the case of a double anuba-hinge, this parameter indicates the pressing depth that precedes
the screwing cycle [Default 5].

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

Click on the advanced tab to access the following parameters:

Page 72
MW310 – Project Windows
[L. Foro filet.] [L. of threaded hole] If different from zero, it indicates the length of the hole for the
threaded shank of the double anuba-hinge.

[KLA] This parameter acts as an offset on the anuba spindle zero value during double anuba-hinge
machining. By increasing the value of this parameter, the double anuba-hinge pressing
level approaches the wood.

[K2G] By increasing the value of this parameter, the double anuba-hinge will be screwed in closer to
the wood.

N.B. IT IS IMPORTANT to remember that the drilling depth is not modified by this
parameter, therefore, it must be first verified that the depth of the hole is sufficient
for mounting the anuba-hinge with the inserted offset value.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

In the case of a double anuba-hinge, there will be a Screwing position field used to specify the
position of the threaded hinge shank.
The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [4], [L] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[P] Represents the pitch of the threading on the hinge shank.

[R] Represents the screwing spindle rotation speed given in revolutions per minute.

[A] In the case of a single anuba-hinge, this parameter indicates how many millimeters the shank
will be inserted into the hole before starting the screwing process [Default 5].

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

Click on the advanced tab to access the following parameters:

[KLA] This parameter acts as an offset on the anuba spindle zero value during single anuba-hinge
machining. By increasing the value of this parameter, the anuba-hinge will be screwed in
closer to the wood.

N.B. IT IS IMPORTANT to remember that the drilling depth is not modified by this
parameter, therefore, it must be first verified that the depth of the hole is sufficient
for mounting the anuba-hinge with the inserted offset value.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page73
MW310 – Project Windows

7.3.3 Triple Anuba-hinge on 2004 Head

Fig. 53

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered ; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

In the case of a double anuba-hinge, there will be a Screwing position field used to specify the
position of the threaded hinge shank.

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [4], [L] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[P] Represents the pitch of the threading on the hinge shank.

[R] Represents the screwing spindle rotation speed given in revolutions per minute.

[A] In the case of a single anuba-hinge, this parameter indicates how many millimeters the shank
will be inserted into the hole before starting the screwing process [Default 5].

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

Click on the advanced tab to access the following parameters:

Page 74
MW310 – Project Windows

[KLA] This parameter acts as an offset on the anuba spindle zero position during double anuba-
hinge machining. By increasing the value of this parameter, the anuba-hinge will be
screwed closer to the wood.

[K2G] By increasing the value of this parameter, the double anuba-hinge will be screwed in
closer to the wood.

N.B. IT IS IMPORTANT to remember that the drilling depth is not modified by this
parameter, therefore, it must be first verified that the depth of the hole is sufficeint
for mounting the anuba-hinge with the inserted offset value.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page75
MW310 – Project Windows

7.3.4 Plate on 2004 Head

Fig. 54

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [2], [3], [4], [L] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[P] Represents the pitch of the threading on the hinge shank.

[R] Represents the screwing spindle rotation speed given in revolutions per minute.

[A] In the case of a single anuba-hinge, this parameter indicates how many millimeters the shank
will be inserted into the hole before starting the screwing process [Default 5].

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

Click on the advanced tab to access the following parameters:

Page 76
MW310 – Project Windows
[KLA] This parameter acts as an offset on the anuba spindle zero value during single anuba-hinge
machining. By increasing the value of this parameter, the anuba-hinge will be screwed
closer to the wood.

N.B. IT IS IMPORTANT to remember that the drilling depth is not modified by this
parameter, therefore, it must be first verified that the depth of the hole is sufficient
for mounting the anuba-hinge with the inserted offset value.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all of the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page77
MW310 – Project Windows

7.4 ANUBA-HINGE EDITOR FOR PNEUMATIC HEAD

Following is a description of the characteristics of the anuba-hinges on a machine equipped with a
head for inserting anuba-hinges with pneumatic functioning (EN_ANUBA=11-12-13).

Click on the icon from the tooling up page to start the anuba-hinge editor which is used to
create and modify the user anuba characteristics.

The anuba model to be parameterised is selected from the “Type” field.

The configurable types are:

N.B. All the positions and parameters relative to the anuba-hinges must be determined by
considering the measurements obtained by positioning the anuba-hinges to be parameterised with
the same arranement as shown in the diagram on the video.

After having selected the Type, the parameters characteristic of the selected anuba-hinge will be
shown on the screen.

Page 78
MW310 – Project Windows

7.4.1 Single Anuba-hinge on Pneumatic Head

Fig. 553

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [4] represent the dimension data characteristic of
the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page79
MW310 – Project Windows

7.4.2 Double Anuba-hinges on Pneumatic Head

Fig. 56

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

In the case of a double anuba-hinge, there will be a Screwing position field used to specify the
position of the threaded hinge shank

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [2], [4] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page 80
MW310 – Project Windows

7.4.3 Triple Anuba-hinge on pneumatic head

Fig. 57

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [4] represent the dimension data characteristic of
the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page81
MW310 – Project Windows

7.4.4 Plate on Pneumatic Head

Fig. 58

In the description box a personalised descriptive note can be entered; double click on the box to the
right to insert an icon representing the defined type.

The area indicated with « Position in loader » is used to specify how the programmed anuba will
be inserted into the automatic anuba-hinge loader.

The values in the fields marked with the values [1], [2], [3], [4] represent the dimension data
characteristic of the anuba-hinge as shown in the figure.

[C] This box can be used to assign a colour to the anuba-hinge, in order to be able to manage the
loaders with different coloured anuba-hinges.

N.B. To ensure correct functioning, it is very important to make sure that all the parameters
have been entered correctly.

Page 82
MW310 – Project Windows

7.5 TOOLING UP THE VACUUM- PADS

The physical features of the vacuum pads should be specified before using automatic vacuum-pads
positioning. These parameters may be set within the head configuration menu, as described in Par. 7,
hence press “Vacuum pads” to enter the window shown in Fig. 46.

Fig. 57

Click on the “Vacuum pads editor ” icon, within the above window, to display the screen
shown in Fig. 47.
Fig. 58

Page83
MW310 – Project Windows

After defining, in "Vacuum pad file no.", the number to be associated with the vacuum pad being
set, the "Vacuum pad type" box, still in Fig. 47, allows defining the type of vacuum pad required:
“Square vacuum pad”, “Rectangular vacuum pad”, “L-shaped vacuum pad”.

You now simply need defining the dimensions and offsets of the vacuum pads, by observing the
information provided in the layout of the selected vacuum pad. The "Description" box allows
entering a name or text to be associated with the above-mentioned "Vacuum pad file no." Follow the
same procedure to define the other two available types of vacuum pads, shown in Fig. 48 and Fig.
49.

N.B. Vacuum pads dimensions are in millimeters.

Fig. 59

Fig. 60

Page 84
MW310 – Project Windows

After the required types of vacuum pads are created, they should be associated with the
corresponding supports. This procedure may be carried out within the window shown in Fig. 50,
where, after right-clicking on the support to be defined and selecting a vacuum pad from the
displayed list, operators are asked whether the selected vacuum pad should only be associated with
the selected support or it should be applied to all supporting plates.

Fig. 61

To end the procedure, save the vacuum-pad configuration and go back to the main menu.

N.B. After vacuum pads are tooled up, the vacuum-pad positioning function will be available, as
described in Par.4.7.

Page85
MW310 – Project Windows

8 ISO EDITOR
Press the “Programming” button within the Automatic menu (Fig. 17) to enter the ISO editor,
an independent menu in the MW310 basic application program. With this editor you can create and
modify part-programs by means of a guided line editor, but also display in specific windows the
machinings programmed, with the ISO command lines entered, on the various workpiece faces.
Fig. 62

ISO LINE
EDITOR
WINDOW

DRAWING
WINDOW FOR
MACHININGS
ON SELECTED
FACE

The editor window features a drop-down menu containing all available editor functions and a tool
bar with the main functions:

COPY CURRENT SELECTION ON CLIPBOARD

PASTE CLIPBOARD CONTENTS TO CURRENT POSITION

COMMENT ON CURRENT SELECTION

CUT CURRENT EDIT PROGRAM HEADER (PROPERTIES)

SELECTION FROM
CLIPBOARD REDRAW PROGRAMMED MACHINING

MODIFY THE PROGRAM MEASUREMENT UNIT

SELECTED LINE
ERROR BOX: CLICK WITH THE
OPEN A NEW LINE
MOUSE TO OPEN A BOX
DISPLAYING ERROR
SAVE CURRENT WORK EXPLANATION

OPEN FILE

CREATE A NEW FILE

Page 86
MW310 – Project Windows

8.1 PROGRAM PROPERTIES

Click on the “Properties” button on the toolbar, within the “Programming” menu (Fig. 51), to
open the program properties input window (Fig. 52) where you can enter a short description of the
program you are creating, the dimensions of workpiece, the number of the tool table to refer to, the
kind of workpiece face, 6 and 7, for machinings on tilting layers (for machinings on slanting faces
see Par. Errore. L'origine riferimento non è stata trovata.).

Fig. 63

To set the parking function at the end of the cycle, just type in the parking values for axes U within
the window shown in Fig. 52.
Parking value U1 defines the end-cycle position for axis U in area 1
Parking value U2 defines the end-cycle position for axis U in area 2

Clicking on the “Auxiliary switches” tab will instead open the window shown in Fig. 53.

Fig. 64

Value U1 Defines axis U position for workpiece pressing, in area 1

Value U2 Defines axis U position for workpiece pressing, in area 2
Value V defines the moving bar position; if “DY” value is entered, the bar position will change
with relation to the workpiece width.

After configuring the automatic loader and defining the above values, the automatic loader may be
operated as described in Par. 4.6..

Page87
MW310 – Project Windows

To define the absolute position of the vacuum pads, just click on the “Vacuum pads” tabs, within the
window shown in Fig. 52. This will open the screen shown in Fig. 54, where you may enter the
position values for the supporting plates and the vacuum pads, as well as the value for the angle of
rotation.

Fig. 65

“Full” It sets vacuum-pad control for a full area execution, employing all supporting plates.

“Symmetrical” It sets vacuum-pad control for a symmetrical-field execution, employing half of the
supporting plates.

“4Fields” It sets vacuum-pad control for a four-field execution, employing only one fourth of
the supporting plates.

Page 88
MW310 – Project Windows

8.1.1 Face programming

The working face is the graphic representation of the workpiece face where the programmed
machining is going to be made.
This machine allows to work on seven different working faces, each one having peculiar features as
detailed further on in this book.

In order to display the workpiece graphic representation, you need to enter all data concerning its
dimensions, as explained in Par. 8.1 in Fig. 62.

In the example used to explain the faces, the piece dimensions are:

Length : 1000 The values for tilted faces six and seven are:
1000Width : 500
Height: 100 H: 50
Face 6: 1 P: 0
Face 7: 1 A: 30

Face 1: Working face one is represented as if the viewer were looking at it from above, the zero
points of the X and Y axes correspond to the upper left vertex of the drawing.
As shown in Fig. 66, the scale of X, which is in this case associated with the machine U-axis
and defines the workpiece length, increases to the right while the Y scale, which in this case
is associated with the machine V-axis and defines the workpiece width, increases to the
bottom in Fig. 66.
Machining depth is defined along the Z-axis, which in this case is associated with the
machine W-axis and defines the workpiece thickness.

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values determine
deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece, a negative Z value
should be set.
Fig. 66

Page89
MW310 – Project Windows

Face 2: Working face 2 is represented as if the viewer were looking at the piece, taken from the
machine and rotated towards the viewer, the zero points of the X and Y axes correspond
to the lower left-hand corner.

As shown in Fig. 67, the X value, which is in this case associated with the machine U-
axis and defines the workpiece length, increases to the right while the Y value, which is
in this case associated with the machine W-axis and defines the workpiece thickness,
increases to the top in Fig. 67. Machining depth is defined along the Z-axis, which in
this case is associated with the machine V-axis and defines the workpiece width.

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values
determine deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece,
a negative Z value should be set.
Fig. 67

Where :
A= Machine bearing point B= Machine zero-point for Face 3
Fig. A

Page 90
MW310 – Project Windows

Face 3: Working face 3 is represented as the viewer were looking at the workpiece while
standing in front of the machine, the zero points of the X and Y axes correspond to the
upper left corner of the drawing.

As shown in Fig. , the X value, which is in this case associated with the machine U-axis
and defines the workpiece length, increases to the right while the Y value, which in this
case is associated with the machine W-axis and defines the workpiece thickness,
increases to the bottom in Fig. 68. Machining depth is defined along the Z-axis, which
in this case is associated with the machine V-axis and defines the workpiece width.

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values
determine deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece,
a negative Z value should be set.

Fig. 68

Where :
A= Machine bearing point B= Machine zero-point for Face 2

Fig. B

Page91
MW310 – Project Windows
Face 4: Working face 4 is represented as if the viewer were looking at the workpiece from the left side
of the machine, the zero points of the X and Y axes correspond to the upper left corner in the
picture.

As shown in Fig. 69, the X value, which is in this case associated with the machine V-axis and
defines the workpiece width, increases to the right, while the Y value, which in this case is
associated with the machine W-axis and defines the workpiece thickness, increases to the
bottom in Fig. 69. Machining depth is defined along the Z-axis, being here associated with the
machine U-axis and defining the workpiece length.

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values
determine deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece, a
negative Z value should be set.

Fig. 69

Where :
A= Machine bearing point B= Machine zero-point for Face 3

Fig. C

Page 92
MW310 – Project Windows
Face 5: Working face five is represented as if the viewer were looking at the workpiece from
the right-hand side of the machine, the zero points of the X and Y axes correspond to
the upper right corner in the picture.

As shown in Fig. 70, the X value, which is in this case associated with the machine V-
axis and defines the workpiece width, increases to the left, while the Y value, which in
this case is associated with the machine W-axis and defines the workpiece thickness,
increases to the bottom in Fig. 70. Machining depth is defined along the Z-axis, being
here associated with the machine U-axis and defining the workpiece length.

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values
determine deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece, a
negative Z value should be set.

Fig. 70

Where :
A= Machine bearing point B= Machine zero-point for Face 3

Fig. D

Page93
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Tilting face definition

Face 6: Supposing there is a piece with a tilted face, and that it faces the back of the machine,
face six is graphically represented as if the viewer were looking at the tilting face of the
piece from behind the machine, and as if the face were perpendicular to the viewer. The
origins of the X and Y axes correspond to the upper left-hand corner in the picture.

As shown in Fig. 71, the X value, which is in this case associated with the machine U-
axis and defines the workpiece length, increases to the right, while the Y value, being
here associated with width of the tilting face, which varies with the tilt of the face,
increases to the top in Fig. . Machining depth is defined along the Z axis (associated and
varying with the tilt of the face).

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values
determine deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece,
a negative Z value should be set.
Fig. 71

Where :
A= Machine bearing point B= Machine zero-point for Face 3

Fig. E

Page 94
MW310 – Project Windows
Face 7: Supposing there is a piece with a tilted face, and that it faces the front of the machine,
face seven is graphically represented as if the viewer were looking at the tilting face of
the piece from in front of the machine, and as if the face were perpendicular to the
viewer. The origins of the X and Y axes correspond to the lower left-hand corner in the
picture

As shown in Fig. , the X value, which is in this case associated with the machine U-axis
and defines the workpiece length, increases to the right, while the Y value, being here
associated with the width of the tilting face, which varies with the tilt of the face,
increases to the bottom in Fig. . Machining depth is defined along the Z-axis (associated
and varying with the face sloping tilt).

A wood edge machining is defined by writing Z0 at program setting up; higher Z values
determine deeper machinings. To move the routing cutter farther from the wood piece,
a negative Z value should be set.

Fig. 72

Where :
A= Machine bearing point B = Machine zero-point for Face 3

Fig. F

Page95
MW310 – Project Windows

Here below is shown a 800mm long, 500mm wide and 100mm thick workpiece, having faces 6 and
7 tilting with the following offset: h=50 P=110 A=30.

In the drawing, top face is 800x662.26, instead of being 800x500, since workpieces are always
processed by lower end machinings, the graphic representation of face 1 is to be increased by twice
the value of parameter “P”.

As it has already been mentioned in this book,

reference points are in any case still associated with the
bearing point, therefore in this case, even though the
visible part is ~662mm, a 500mm distance may still be
measured in the bottom part of the profile. If you wish
to check this, you may do so through the ISO
visualization of an x100, y100 hole on a workpiece
having the same features:

Page 96
MW310 – Project Windows

As can be seen, since a tilting face 6 and 7 has been set, such that the
surface of face 1 is enlarged, the resulting shall be positioned at
100mm in Y from the supporting stops, at 181.13mm from the panel
corner and at 210mm from the farthest edge of the panel (see drawing
of piece). With this type of panel, it is therefore correct to always
graphically represent the visible part of the panel, then the ruler in Y
with the 0 at the point where the physical supporting stop is. This is
what brings about the problem concerning the reference points, which,
in Masterwork are actually turned over in Y. In this case, the Y
reference point will be in the bottom part of the screen, as previously
mentioned, that is to say at the point in which the panel would touch
the supporting stops, both in case of a tilting face as well as that of a standard panel edge. When the
references of the upper part of the screen are selected, as in the case of the lower face, the end of the
panel will be where it has been set for the slanting face, while, in any case, the upper reference is
the point where the support stops can be located. Below is a complete series of profiles that should
comprise all possible kinds of tilting faces, with the related reference points used for the ruler as
well; it is to be emphasised that, the graphic representation of the upper face, and not the lower face,
is the real representation of the panel, marked if possible, with a coloured or dotted line to indicate
the reference point which, as already stated, corresponds to the point where the piece is supported by
the stops. Obviously, the tilting face, if visible, should also be indicated, as has already been done in
part, when the upper face is displayed.

A= Workpiece bearing point to stops, corresponding to the ruler zero and to the reference point, if
any.
B= Point where the workpiece graphic representation starts.

Page97
MW310 – Project Windows

8.1.2 CUSTOM TILTING FACES

To define any face tilted in space, we must start with the definition of the tilting angles referring to
the upper face (1).

The instruction ISO which defines the tilting face is G121:

G121 K U V W A B L
K: Face number (>10), indicates the face reference number
U: face zero co-ordinate on the U axis
V: face zero co-ordinate on the V axis
W: (optional) face zero co-ordinate on the W axis, starting from the base of the panel.
If W is absent, the face origin is found at the same height as the upper face (1) of the
panel.

A: This parameter represents the displacement angle around the U axis, between face (1)
and the face to be defined. It is possible to set any value in the range which goes from a
minimum of –360° up to a maximum of 360°, with the exception of zero. For A > 0 the
upper face rotates around the U axis clockwise with respect to its direction (or better,
the rotation direction is that had if the positive semi-axis W is brought over the positive
semi-axis V).

B: This parameter represents the displacement angle around the axis W, between face (1)
and the face to be defined. It is possible to set any value in the range which goes from a
minimum of –360° up to a maximum of 360°. For B > 0 the upper face rotates around
the W axis clockwise with respect to its direction (or better, the rotation direction is that
had if the positive semi-axis U is brought over the positive semi-axis V).

L: (optional) Face Length.

U U

A>0 B>0

V
W
W

To always maintain the zero of the tilting face at the top, when the face is rotated around the U axis
with A>0, the Y axis of the rotated face is inverted.
The direction of the axes of the upper face rotated around the U axis with value A < 0 does not
change.]

NB. While defining the origin of the tilting faces within the ISO code, remember that the face origin is
always the highest point of the tilting face. (see drawing).

Page 98
MW310 – Project Windows

The dimensions of the panel in the following example are 800 mm X 800 mm.

Page99
MW310 – Project Windows
G121 K11 U600 V28.87 A-60 B-180 G121 K12 U200 V771.13 A-60 B0

G121 K13 U771.13 V600 A-60 B-90 G121 K14 U20.41 V579.59 A-60 B-315

G121 K15 U220.41 V20.41 A-60 B-225 G121 K16 U779.59 V220.41 A-60 B-135

G121 K17 U579.59 V779.59 A-60 B-45 G121 K18 U28.87 V200 A-60 B-270

[Link].1 ISO G173 Code

G173 INTERPOLATION ZERO NOT BOUND TO THE FACE

X point co-ordinates
Y "
Z "
S Router speed
T Tool number
E Entry speed
A Tilting angle in the face X-Z (5 AXES)
C Rotation angle in the face X-Y (AXIS C)
K Tilting angle in the face X-Z
D Approach mode

Parameter D can only assume a value of 0 and 1.

D=0, the positioning level is calculated by the NC and it is not possible to program the movement of
A and C
D=1, the approach position is NOT calculated by the NC, the system returns to the program
specified positions, in this mode A and C can be programmed

Page 100
MW310 – Project Windows

8.2 ISO WINDOW

8.2.1 Inserting a program line

Within the programming menu (Fig. 51), click on "New Line" to add a new line at the current
cursor position, a dropdown menu will also appear allowing to select the type of line.

Click on the desired type and confirm by pressing ENTER, or type in the character corresponding to
the selected item, to edit one of the types of lines:

G Iso code type-G Iso code

M Iso code type-M Iso code
# parametric parametric line
( comment comment line
Louver doors Louver-blind programming and machining editor

If a G or M Iso code is being inserted, a list of all available commands will be displayed on the right
box. You may enter the number of the ISO function manually or click on it within the drop-down
list. All set data are to be confirmed by pressing ENTER.

Fig.73

If a new line is being added, all parameters associated with the selected code are to be individually
set. Press ENTER when an optional parameter that you don't wish to set is highlighted. If the
ESCAPE key is struck while editing a new line, it will be completely removed.
When an existing line is being edited, the box on the right will display the list of the parameters that
may be set. To modify one of them, click on the corresponding item, scroll the list by means of the
cursor keys and press ENTER, or type in the letter corresponding to the parameter to be set. The
newly entered data will only be applied after selecting “OK
ACCEPT”.

Fig. 74

If the ESCAPE key is struck, all modifications are canceled.

A detailed explanation of Iso syntax and commands is contained in Par. 8.4.

Page101
MW310 – Project Windows

8.2.2 Selection of Program Lines

To select one or more program lines you may position the cursor on the first line of the block to
select, click on the mouse left key and keep it pressed while dragging the mouse to extend the
selection box to the whole block and finally release it, or you can operate with the keyboard moving
the cursor up and down with the arrow keys while keeping the shift key pressed. The selected lines
are highlighted in another color.

To perform then any operation on the selected line block you may use the pull-down menu
commands, the tool bar icons or the keyboard functions.

8.2.3 Keyboard Functions Available with the Editor

DELETE to delete the selected block and saves it in the clipboard

CTRL-INSERT to copy the selected block in the clipboard
SHIFT-INSERT to paste the clipboard contents in the current cursor position
ENTER to modify the selected line
SHIFT-ENTER to open a new program line in the current cursor position
ENTER to open a new program line in the current cursor position

8.2.4 Measurement Unit

The machine works referring to the measurement unit (inch or mm) set in configuration phase and
displayed on the Automatic page dedicated tool bar. On the other hand each program written with
the ISO editor has the proper measurement unit, selected in creation phase, an information displayed
on the specific box found on the right side of the ISO editor dedicated tool bar. It may therefore
happen that the machine reference measurement unit and that of the program are different. In this
case the background of the measurement unit box on the ISO editor tool bar turns yellow to advise
user of this discrepancy.

8.2.5 Workpiece-Face Selection Board

The "View faces" buttons, within the main ISO Editor window (Fig. 51), provide the graphic
representation of the machinings programmed on each workpiece face.

Fig. 75
SELECTION KEYS
TO DISPLAY THE
RELEVANT
WORKPIECE FACE

Page 102 GENERAL

GENERAL DRAWIN
DRAWING WINDOW RESET
MW310 – Project Windows

8.3 DRAWING WINDOWS

Each face of the workpiece can be displayed in a dedicated window. To display the drawing of the
machinings programmed on a given face you must click on the corresponding icon on the workpiece
face selection board, and precisely:

(1) stands for the upper face (surface)

(2) stands for the rear face
(3) stands for the front face
(4) stands for the left side face
(5) stands for the right side face
(6) Rear tilting face
(7) Front tilting face

The face display windows may be magnified, reduced and shifted so to be visible all at once. Press
the GENERAL DRAWING WINDOW RESET key to restore the original arrangement and
dimensions.

Press “CTRL” and move the mouse on the drawing to display the current cursor co-ordinates.

The face display windows has a dedicated toolbar made up of 4 keys:

ZOOM IN (BOX)

ZOOM
ZOOMOUT
OUT(INTERO)
(WHOLE DRAWING)

DRAW TOOL ROUTE

STEP-BY-STEP

DISPLAY VACUUM PADS

DISPLAY VACUUM PADS

8.3.1 Zoom Function

Clicking on the “ZOOM IN (BOX)" icon, within the main ISO editor window (Fig. 51), allows
to select with the mouse a rectangular area and zoom in on it. The “ZOOM OUT (FULL)” icon,
instead, draws back and shows as much of the full face as it is made possible by the current
window dimensions.

8.3.2 Tool Path Drawing Function

Machinings are normally drawn with the dimensions of the tool being used. Clicking on the "Tool
path" icon, within the main ISO editor window” (Fig. 51), only allows displaying the tool path.

Page103
MW310 – Project Windows

8.3.3 Step-by-step Function

When clicking on the “STEP-BY-STEP” icon , within the ISO editor main menu, you activate
another drawing mode of the machinings programmed. It is not the complete figure that is drawn at
once but each single machining is traced one after the other, i.e. the is recomposed step-by-step. The
current machining is drawn in yellow on the drawing window while the corresponding ISO program
line is highlighted:

Fig. 76

ONE STEP BACKWARD STOP

ONE STEP FORWARD

The Step-by-step box displays 3 commands: the previous step, to highlight the next one or to stop
the step-by-step displaying mode. In alternative to the icon selection you can select the step to
display clicking with the mouse on the ISO program line the corresponding machining you wish to
highlight on the drawing.

8.3.4 Vacuum-pad Management

[Link] Display Vacuum pads
Clicking on the "Display Vacuum Pads" icon, within the main ISO editor window (Fig. 51),
displays the scale drawing of the vacuum pads. When this function is enabled, a button also appears
allowing modification of vacuum pads' position, as described in Par. [Link].

[Link] Move Vacuum Pads

Click on “Move Vacuum Pads” to enter vacuum-pads positioning mode, which enables
positioning of both the vacuum pads and the supporting plates. This function allows only graphic
positioning, which entails obvious limitations; parameter positioning according to workpiece
dimensions may instead be set by means of the vacuum-pad programming feature inside
Mastersystem. At the end of vacuum-pad positioning, click again on “Move Vacuum Pads” to
use the other ISO Editor functions. -

Page 104
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4 PROGRAMMING

8.4.1 Introduction
NC programming bases upon ISO command codes, a program may feature three types of lines:

a) Lines with G and M codes.

b) Parametric lines.
c) Comment lines.

8.4.2 Lines with G and M codes

They are standard program lines that may contain only the G and M codes listed below. Press F1
“NEW” key to open a new line where the various codes may be entered. Alternatively, press [F1]
Parameters, [F2] Comment, [F3] Anuba-hinges function keys to insert either special lines, for
anuba-hinge or parameter programming, or simple comment lines.

8.4.3 Parametric Lines

Parametric lines are special program lines starting with the '#' character. Press the function key with
the "Parametric". label to open an empty line featuring ‘#’ as first character. Parametric lines
allow writing flexible programs, depending on the workpiece dimensions and/or program variables

8.4.4 Comment Lines

Comment lines are program lines allowing to add notes inside the program. Press F1 “NEW” and
then F2 “COMMENT” function keys to open an empty line featuring “(“ as first character.

Page105
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.5 Parameter programming

The use of parameter lines in a machining program makes the program more flexible. Indeed it is
possible to associate each parameter with G codes (except the tool code T). These values can be
constant or the result of a mathematical formula where trigonometric functions can be used. The
variables used in the parameter lines are overall values, this means that they can also be changed in a
sub-program inside the main program.

Parameter programming consists of three stages:

Calculating mathematical functions or expressions, Par. [Link].

Executing skips or cycles, Par. [Link].
Assigning parameters to programming codes, Par. [Link].

[Link] Calculating mathematical functions or expressions

The lines set for working out mathematical functions or expressions, and for assigning a value to a
GLOBAL VARIABLE, are identified by ‘#’, followed by a number ranging from 1 to 99. The
following expressions or functions may be calculated:

“|” = or
<Parameter> = <constant> |
<parameter> |
<expression> + < expression > |
< expression > - < expression > |
< expression > * < expression > |
< expression > / < expression > |
SIN ( < expression > ) |
COS ( < expression > ) |
TAN ( < expression > ) |
ASIN ( < expression > ) |
ACOS ( < expression > ) |
ATAN ( < expression > ) |
SQRT ( < expression > ) |
LOG ( < expression > ) |
ESP ( < expression > ) |
POW ( < expression > ) |
INT ( < expression > ) |

[Link].1 Mathematical functions “SIN, COS, TAN, ARCSINE, ARCCOSINE,

ARCTANGENT”

They are respectively used to find the Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Arcsine, Arccosine and Arctangent in
degrees.

SQRT:Gives the square root.

LOG: Gives the decimal logarithm.
ESP: Calculates the exponential function, that is to say it raises the given value to the e (e =
2,718281828) power.
POW: Gives the square of the given value.
INT: Finds the integral of a decimal number.

The value, for which the above functions are to be worked out, may be:
_ a constant
_ a parametric variable
_ an expression

Page 106
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Executing skips or cycles

[Link].1 "IF - ELSE – ENDIF ” SKIP functions

If the expression following the IF command is fulfilled (true), all instructions included between IF
and ELSE, or between IF and ENDIF if there's no ELSE command, will be executed.
In case the expression following the IF command is not fulfilled (false), all instructions included
between IF and ELSE will be skipped and the instructions included between ELSE and ENDIF will
be executed; if there's no ELSE command, the program will pass over to the instructions following
ENDIF.

IF instruction allows satisfying the following conditions:

= Equals
! Different than
> Greater than
>= Not smaller than
< Smaller than
<= Not greater than

The machining area may now be checked, as described in the following example:

IF BAT=B

ENDIF

In the above example, the execution of the instruction sequence, contained between IF and ENDIF,
is bound to working area B. Consequently, area B program execution will also include the ISO
instructions contained in the IF sequence, which will be ignored in any other case.
“BAT” condition is accepted only if it is written in capitals.

Example:

#1=10 I give #1 value 10

#IF #1 > 5 I check if #1 is greater than 5. (true)
Gxxx ... \
Gxxx ... > Instructions executed up to ELSE
Gxxx ... /
#ELSE
Gxxx ... \
Gxxx ... > Instructions skipped, go to ENDIF
Gxxx ... /
#ENDIF

or

#2=5 I give #2 value 5

#3=5 I give #3 value 5
#IF #2 ! #3 I check if #2 is different than #3 (false)
Gxxx ... \
Gxxx ... > Instructions skipped, go to ENDIF
Gxxx ... /
#ENDIF

Page107
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].2 WHILE - WEND” conditioned cycle functions”

All instructions included between WHILE and WEND are executed until the condition written beside
WHILE is fulfilled; the program therefore proceeds on to the first instruction following the WEND
command. The operators used with these functions are the same as with IF-ELSE-ENDIF.

Example:
#1=10 I give #1 value 10
#WHILE #1 > 5 I check if #1 is greater than 5
Gxxx ... \ Instructions executed
Gxxx .. > program by 5 times
#1=#1-1/ I subtract 1 from #1
#WEND End of cycle ( back to WHILE )
Gxxx

[Link] Assigning parameters to programming variables

Parametric values may be assigned to programming variables ( X, Y, Z etc...), ). during ISO line
editing, by pressing the '=' key when setting the value for a programming variable.

Example:
Gxxx X100 Y100; standard instruction
Gxxx X=#1 Y=#2;parametric instruction

There are, moreover, three default variables that are automatically set at workpiece dimension
definition, within the program main window.

These variables are DX, DY and DZ , corresponding respectively to workpiece dimensions along
the X, Y and Z axes.

Example:
#1=DX/2 entails that parameter #1 equals the maximum workpiece dimension along the X axis,
divided by 2

NOTE : Parameters are strings featuring “#” as first character followed by a number included between
1 and 99.

Page 108
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.6 ISO Programming

When face functions are used (i.e. G172), machinings are graphically represented on the workpiece
face set within the program (G120). Only the functions bound to face 1, such as G173, G188, G178,
G189, etc. are represented on face “1”. When entering programming mode, the face being displayed
by default is no. “1”, which may be changed by following the procedure described in Par.8.2.5..

[Link] Code G120

Standard face selection. This is normally the first command contained in any program and is used to
select the working face:

• 1 (upper face) (standard)

• 2 (rear face)
• 3 (front face)
• 4 and 5 identify respectively the right-side and left-side face.
• 6 and 7 are used for tilting face machinings

This command may be used several times within the same program, if face shifts are required
during a machining.

G120 Kn
n Face Number

[Link] Codes G90 - G91

M codes don't need programming variables:
M Codes G90 and G91, which may be included more than once within the same program, select the
programming by ABSOLUTE values (code G90) or RELATIVE values (code G91).

[Link] Code G92

Code G92 modifies the original workpiece position, that is to say that it modifies the machine origin
values. All values contained in the program lines entered after this command will be determined with
reference to the new origin on U, V and W. Since the translating motion of the axes' origin is
ABSOLUTE, due to the motion being referred to the real machine axes, each face shift follows the
new co-ordinates as well.

G92 directly provides the new origin co-ordinates.

G92 Unnn Vnnn Wnnn Hnnn Pnnn
Unnn, Vnnn, Wnnn Hnnn Pnnn New workpiece origin co-ordinates

[Link] Code G192

Code G192 modifies the machining origin position on the workpiece. All values contained in the
program lines entered after this command will be determined with reference to the new origins (i.e., X
and Y). The machining origin shifting motion is RELATIVE to the machine zero-points for the face
where G192 command is entered; such shift will therefore have no effects on other workpiece faces.
To restore the original program settings when this function is no longer needed, assign null value to
the previously modified variables (i.e., X and Y).
G192 automatically produces the increments for the set values.
G192 X Y
X,Y Co-ordinates of the new working face origin

Page109
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code G170

Code G170 allows shifting the axes to the position defined within the command parameters. This
code is normally followed by an M00 pause command producing temporary parking during program
execution.
G170 X Y Z X, Y, Z Absolute co-ordinates of the axes

[Link] Code G110

Code G110 sets measurement unit management in inches, within the ISO program.

[Link] Code G111

Code G111 disables measurement unit management in inches, within the ISO program.

[Link] Code G112

Code G112 enables sharp-edge machining management, within the ISO program.

[Link] Code G113

Code G113 disables sharp-edge machining management, within the ISO program.

[Link] Code G194

MODIFIES WORKPIECE DIVISION OFFSET
D New workpiece division offset (Side Face)

[Link] Codes G150 G151 G152 G153

M codes don't need programming variables:
Code G151sets mirroring with reference to the X-axis.
Code G G152sets mirroring with reference to the Y-axis.
Code G G153sets mirroring with reference to both the X and the Y-axis:
Code G G150 cancels the mirroring function previously set by means of G151, G152 and G153
codes..
When the mirroring function is enabled, the axes' origin is moved and the progressing direction
along the concerned axes is changed.

[Link] Code G172

Since this function may be enabled for any of the machine working faces, it is necessary to select the
face this command will apply to. Code G172 defines the origin of the machining that will be
controlled by the following command. An example might be the start point of either a linear or a
circular interpolation. Function G172 alone DOES NOT modify the axes' position, unless it is
followed by a machining command such as G101, G100, ……, but it does allow defining the tool to
be used in that machining.

G172 X Y Z F X,Y,Z Point co-ordinates

T Tool code (i.e., T1/1)
S Routing-bit rotation speed (i.e., 5 stands for 5000 rpm rightward rotation)
E Entry speed
J Electro-spindle tilting angles

Application fields for the Index Heads

Head
Description Working faces
type
1 Fixed head at 90° 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
2 Index saw 1
3 Tilting head 6 and 7 only

Page 110
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.7 Codes to Execute Routing Bit Machinings

[Link] Code G40

Code G40 disables the tool radius compensation. The instruction G40 has to be followed by a linear
interpolation line G101, which is necessary for the machine to exit the tool radius compensation
mode.
G40

[Link] Code G41

Code G41 activates the tool radius compensation on the left of the profile with respect to the routing
direction. The instruction G41 has to be followed by a linear interpolation line G101 which is
necessary for the machine to enter the tool radius compensation mode.
G41 Q nnn Q nnn Compensation radius
Kn Compensation type
0= Arcs (default)
1= A sharp edge should be left in order to produce an intersection
of straight lines, with external compensation

N.B. If no value is entered for the compensation radius, it will take on the radius set in the tool
tables for the tool being used.

[Link] Code G42

Code G42 activates the tool radius compensation on the right of the profile with respect to the
feeding direction. The instruction G42 has to be followed by a linear interpolation line G101 that is
necessary for the machine to enter the tool radius compensation mode.

G42 Q nnn
Q nnn Compensation radius
Kn Compensation type
0= Arcs (default)
1= A sharp edge should be left in order to produce an intersection of straight
lines, with external compensation

N.B. If no value is entered for the compensation radius, it will take on the radius set in the tool
tables for the tool being used.

[Link] Code G101

Code G101 sets the execution of a routing work in linear interpolation. Code T may not be used in
interpolation, the tool must therefore be declared by a G172 command before it enters interpolation
with G101.

N.B. Junction routes and tool radius compensation functions produce machining blocks that may
consist in several program lines. Routing speed "F" may not be changed within such blocks.
If different 'F' values are set on lines belonging to the same block, the while block will be
executed at the same speed, that is to say the last one set.

Page111
MW310 – Project Windows

Example

G120 K1
G172 X100 Y100 T1/7 Z10
G101 X200 Y200 Q10 F5
G101 X100 Y200 F10
G101 X100 Y250

Lines 2 and 3 make up a single machining sequence consisting in two linear segments, blended by a
circle arc. The whole machining will be executed at speed F10, while speed F5 (for the first G101)
will not be effective.

G101 X Y Z F Q
X,Y, Z Co-ordinates for the routing end-point
F Interpolation speed
Q Corner rounding radius

N.B. The Z variable allows executing interpolations on three axes.

[Link] Codes G102 - G103

Codes G102 and G103 command the execution of a routing work with circular interpolation. The
arc of circle can be calculated in two different ways:

- Arc defined by the start point, the final point and the radius
- Arc defined by the start point, the final point and the center.

Arc based on the initial point, final point and radius:

Are the starting point (implicit), the end point the radius known, there are 4 possible trajectories: 2
of them run clockwise (code G102) and 2 anticlockwise (code G103). The difference between the
two trajectories running in the same sense is due to the subtended circumference arc that can be
minor than 180 degrees (radius > 0) or major than 180 degrees (radius < 0).

G102 X Y Z R Q F
G103 X Y Z R Q F
X,Y,Z Co-ordinates of the final point
R Radius of the arc
Q Corner rounding-off radius (see above)
F Interpolation speed

Arc based on the initial point, final point and center:

Are the starting point, the end point and the center known, there are 2 possible trajectories: one
clockwise (code G102) and one anticlockwise (code G103). If the co-ordinates of the starting point
and of the end point coincide, then the whole circumference will be routed. If the command contains
the code Q (with a value r > 0) then the following segment is joined to the current one by means of
an arc having a radius ‘r’.

G102 X Y Z I J Q F
G103 X Y Z I J Q F X,Y,Z Co-ordinates of the final point
I,J Co-ordinates of the center
Q Corner rounding-off radius (see above)
F Interpolation speed

N.B. The Z variable may be used to execute helicoidal routing works by interpolating the
X and Y axes with a circular motion and the Z-axis with a linear motion.

Page 112
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Codes G105 - G106

Codes G105 and G106 command the execution of a circular routing based upon 3 points, or upon
the final point plus a tangent. G105 commands a clockwise interpolation, G106 an anticlockwise
interpolation

Arc through 3 points:

If command G105 or G106 is given specifying the initial point (implicit), the final point (X Y) and
one intermediate point (I J), the arc drawn will touch the three given points. Rounding-off code Q
cannot be specified.

G105 X Y Z I J F
G106 X Y Z I J F X,Y, Z Co-ordinates of the final point
I,J Co-ordinates of the intermediate point
F Interpolation speed

Arc tangent to the last segment routed:

If command G105 or G106 is given specifying the initial point (implicit), the final point, the arc of
circle routed will be tangent to the previous machining. Rounding-off code Q cannot be specified.

G105 X Y Z F
G106 X Y Z F X,Y, Z Co-ordinates of the final point
F Interpolation speed

[Link] Code G205

Code G205 corresponds to a linear routing work, defined by its length and slant. This command
allows executing repetitions with repetition increments on X and/or Y for the drawn straight line.
The angle is given by:

G205 A L Z F R I J -90

A Routing work slant (see figure)

L Routing work length 0
Z Depth
180 X
R Number of repetitions
I, J Increments along axes X and Y for each
repetition Y 90

[Link] Code G204

Code G204 commands the execution on the spot defined by the current co-ordinates of a hollowed
circle or hole with diameter D and depth Z. If the diameter has not been set or if it is minor or equal
to the routing bit diameter, machine performs a simple hole.

G204 D Z F R I J
D Circle diameter
Z Depth
F Interpolation speed
R Number of repetitions
I,J Increments along axes X and Y by each repetition

Page113
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code G108

This command produces an elliptical curve that is executed in a clockwise direction, starting either
from the previous machining point or from the machining start point (Code G172).
The ellipse features are defined by the following parameters:
• Center co-ordinates “I, J”
• Arc radius “R” (the ellipse execution angle in °).
• Eccentricity “Q” (the ratio of Rx to Ry is given by the dimension on X divided by the
dimension on Y).
• The machining start point being defined either by the last machining point or by the
machining start point (G172).

[Link] Code G109

This command produces an elliptical curve that is executed in an counterclockwise direction,
starting either from the previous machining point or from the machining start point (Code G172).
The ellipse features are defined by the following parameters:
• Center co-ordinates “I, J”
• Arc radius “R” (the ellipse execution angle in °).
• Eccentricity “Q” (the ratio of Rx to Ry is given by the dimension on X divided by the
dimension on Y).
• The machining start point being defined either by the last machining point or by the
machining start point (G172).

Page 114
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code G211

Code G211 allows to call up a standard figure from the figure files and reproduce it with local
origin. The figure can be reproduced as a mirror-image by means of the programming variable Q.
The possible symmetries are:

Q = 0 or not attributed, no mirroring

Q = 1 Mirroring along the X axis
Q = 2 Mirroring along the Y axis
Q = 3 Mirroring along the X and Y axis

G211 K N Q F R I J
K Figure number
N Figure subtype
Used only if the figure is an Arch since it identifies which part of the arc is to be
executed. The reference number is shown in the figure
Q Mirroring
F Interpolation speed
R Number of repetitions
I,J Increments along axes X and Y by each repetition

Q=0 Q=2

Q=1 Q=3

N.B. Please refer to Par. 8.5 for any information concerning draw elements programming and
features.

Page115
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.8 Codes for executing machinings with the thickness sensor

After setting the sensor up, as described in Par. [Link].7 you will be able to operate it through the
ISO codes described here below.

The thickness sensor is controlled by means of the following ISO commands. As described here
following, every sensing command features a related command allowing to cancel or reset the
detected value. The first two commands, G164 and G165, refer to a standard thickness sensor for
automatic workpiece thickness detection: the former controls thickness detections and the latter
assigns a new thickness value to the workpiece.

[Link] Code G164

SENSING EXECUTION ON THE Z AXIS
X,Y Sensing position co-ordinates
G164 sets thickness sensing on the Z-axis, by requesting only the X and Y axes values for
the position where workpiece thickness should be detected. The newly sensed thickness value
automatically replaces the previous one.

[Link] Code G165

Assigning new thickness to the workpiece
Z New workpiece thickness
G165 allows to manually assign new thickness to the workpiece. This function might be
useful if the workpiece thickness value, set before sensing, needs being restored.

The following four commands instead refer to the cell thickness sensor, which is also called
workpiece sensor. This thickness sensor is used to define the workpiece dimensions along the X and
Y axes. The co-ordinates being entered with the command define the position the thickness sensor
must move to in order to detect the workpiece; this is possible by means of a cell sending a signal to
the NC upon workpiece detection. After the workpiece is sensed, hence the name of this device, it is
moved along either the X or the Y-axis, depending upon the dimension to be taken. This motion
allows the sensor cell to even measure the overall workpiece dimensions. At the end of sensing
operations, a microswitch sensor provides accurate measurement of workpiece dimensions. Such a
complex sequence allows measuring various workpieces with remarkably different dimensions.
As described here following, every sensing command features a related command allowing to cancel
or reset the detected value.

[Link] Code G166

SENSING EXECUTION WITH CELL ON THE X AXIS
X, Y, Z Sensing position co-ordinates

[Link] Code G161

ASSIGNING NEW LENGTH TO THE WORKPIECE
X New workpiece length

Page 116
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code G167

SENSING EXECUTION WITH CELL ON THE Y AXIS
X, Y, Z Sensing position co-ordinates

[Link] Code G163

ASSIGNING NEW WIDTH TO THE WORKPIECE
Y New workpiece width

The co-ordinates being entered with the command define the position the thickness sensor must
move to in order to detect the workpiece; this is possible by means of a cell sending a signal to the
NC upon workpiece detection.
After the workpiece is sensed, hence the name of this device, it is moved along either the X or the
Y-axis, depending upon the dimension to be taken. This motion allows the sensor cell to even
measure the overall workpiece dimensions. The required dimension is taken as soon as the cell can
no longer detect the workpiece during axes motion. This will only provide rough workpiece
dimensions, a microswitch sensor, allowing accurate measurement, shall therefore be used to
complete sensing operations. Such a complex sequence allows measuring various workpieces with
remarkably different dimensions.

8.4.9 Codes for Saw Cuts

[Link] Code G180

Code G180 defines a blade cut along the X-axis with a non-indexed tool.

G180 X F T X Cut end point co-ordinate

F Cutting speed
T Tool number

This machining may be performed on workpiece face 1 only

[Link] Code G181

Code G181 defines a blade cut along the Y-axis with a non-indexed tool.
G181 Y F T
Y Cut end point co-ordinate
F Cutting speed
T Tool number

Page117
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.10 Codes for executing machinings with the indexed heads

[Link] Code G178

Face 1 should be selected before entering G178 command (G120 K1), since such function is bound
to that face. G178 command is used in tilted boring works, executed by either the indexed drill or
the indexed borer - type-3 indexed head-.

G178 X Y Z I K J Q F T X, Y, Z Hole origin co-ordinates

I Rotation angle on the X-Y face (C AXIS)
K Tilting angle on the X-Z face (Index head tilt)
J Hole length
Q Short motion height (if it is not entered 5mm will be taken as default
value)
F Boring speed
T Indexed tool number
S Routing bit rotation speed (i.e., -5 stands for 5000 rpm leftward
rotation)

Application fields for the Index Heads

Head type Description Working faces
3 Tilting head 1 (upper view)
13 Flanged tilting head 1 (upper view)

[Link] Code G189

Face 1 should be selected before entering G189 command (G120 K1), since such function is bound
to that face. This function is used to program groove-cutting to be executed by means of the indexed
saw (type 2). Groove-cutting may be defined in two ways: by setting either its end point or its length
and angle.

Groove-cutting defined by its end point: Groove-cutting defined by its length and angle:
G189 X Y Z F G189 I J Z F
X,Y Co-ordinates of groove-cutting
end-point IGroove-cutting tilt
Z Groove-cutting depth J Groove-cutting length
F Groove-cutting speed Z Groove-cutting depth
F Groove-cutting speed (meters per min.)
D Groove-cutting direction F Groove-cutting speed (meters per
minute)
K Cutting blade tilting D Indexed groove-cutting direction
(varying upon the vernier scale offset K Tilting angle of the multiple indexed
of the multiple head) head cutting blade (varying upon the
vernier scale offset of the multiple head)

Example Example
G120 K1 G120 K1
G172 X100 Y100 Z5 T41/5 S6 E1 J90 G172 X100 Y100 Z5 T41/5 S6 E1 J90
G189 X700 Y300 Z5 G189 Z5 J800 I24 F3

Application fields for the Index Heads

Head type Description Working face
2 Index saw head 1 (upper view)
12 Flanged index saw head 1 (upper view)
Multiple head with type-2 inlet 1 (upper view)

Page 118
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code G188

Face 188 should be selected before entering G1 command (G1 K120), since such function is bound
to that face. This command is used in horizontal boring by means of the indexed router or borer
(Type 1).

G188 X Y Z I J Q F T X, Y, Z Hole origin co-ordinates

I Rotation angle on the X-Y face
J Hole length
Q Air level (default value: 5 mm)
F Boring speed
T Indexed tool number
Application fields for the Index Heads
Head type Description Working faces
1 Fixed head 1 (upper view)
11 Flanged fixed head 1 (upper view)
3 Tilting head at 0° 1 (upper view)
13 Flanged tilting head 1 (upper view)
Multiple head with inlet type 1 or 3 1 (upper view)

[Link] Code G173

Face G173 should be selected before entering G1 command (G1 K120), since such function is
bound to that face.
This function is similar to G172, with the following differences:
- It allows defining the tilt angle for the routing bit assembled on a type-3 head, by means of
parameter K.
- It allows defining the head rotation angle (C Axis), by means of parameter I.

Code G173 defines the origin of the machining that will be controlled by the following command.
An example might be the start point of either a linear or a circular interpolation. Function G173
alone DOES NOT modify the axes position, unless it is followed by a machining command such as
G101, but it does allow defining the tool to be used in that machining.

G173 X Y Z T S E I K X,Y,Z Point co-ordinates

T Tool number
S Routing bit rotation speed (i.e., -5 stands for 5000 rpm leftward
rotation)
E Entry speed (meters per min.)
I Rotation angle on the X-Y face (C AXIS)
K Tilt angle on the X-Z face (Routing bit tilt)
D Enabling flag for head center interpolation (1=Head center)

Application fields for the Index Heads with Parameter D =0

Head type Description Working faces
1 Fixed head 1 (upper view)
11 Flanged fixed head 1 (upper view)
3 Tilting head at 0° 1 (upper view)
13 Flanged tilting head 1 (upper view)

Application fields for the Index Heads with Parameter D =1

Head type Description Working faces
1 Fixed head 1 (upper view)
3 Tilting head at 0° 1 (upper view)

All machinings programmed by means of this function are to be accurately checked at first program
execution; application flexibility and complex handling operations might in fact cause mechanical
collisions.

Page119
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].1 Operating and Programming Principle for the Interpolating C-Axis

MW310 version 2.16 r20 and above allow to interpolate polar C-axis.

Only after properly setting C-axis parameters, as described in Par. [Link].1.1 and in Par.[Link],
shall it be possible to execute machinings by interpolating.

The following syncro version is required for rotating axis interpolation: SY421001 R7-4.61.
MW310 version 2.16 may also be installed on the previous syncro version, but you should never
attempt to interpolate. The NC operates with C-axis in interpolation through the G173 X, Y, Z, …,
C, K, D command (where former I has become a C). In order for the NCs to be compatible with
previous syncro versions, they have been programmed in such a way that whenever they find the D
item to be set to 1, they will automatically interpolate within a program sequence. If this FLAG is
set to 1 the router length and head value 3 items will not be taken into account. During
programming, you will therefore need to consider that the head center will have to move along the
final profile offset. Such an offset will be given by the sum of “VALUE 3” and the tool length.
Considering you will be working with a type-1 head. If instead you want to use a tilting head, a side
and a vertical shift should also be considered. The following function should be used to work out the
side shift to be used as offset: (Value 3 + router L)*COSα. The following one should instead be
used to work out the vertical shift: (Value 3 +router L )*SENα. The angle is obviously α the tilting
angle with reference to the workpiece surface; such value is to be set on the head, while it should be
ignored with G173 since you will have to directly consider the side and vertical shifts. By
comparing two editing processes for the same program, varying only in the presence of tilting K,
you will realize that there's no difference in U, V and W axis positioning.

Programming
• In case of absolute programming (G90), this axis will be controlled by setting 360° modular
angles, that is by defining an angle included between 0° and 359.99°. If a sign is also
specified, it will indicate whether the given value should be reached through a clockwise or a
counterclockwise movement ( - sign). The syncro, anyway, cannot exceed the number of
revolutions defined by the value, in degrees, set for the software limit switches .

• In case of incremental programming, Code G91 should as usual be enabled and a positive or
negative number should then be set as C value, depending on whether you need to increase or
decrease the starting position. The displayed value will nonetheless be given as a 360°
module, with the limitation that the maximum possible number of revolutions should not
exceed the one set for the software limit switch.

• If the same value is given for C in two following command lines, the axis will not turn,
regardless of the sign. Moreover, there will be again no axis rotation in case a command line
features no C item at all.

• The codes that may be used for interpolating the C axis are: G173 with D set to 1, G101,
G102, G103.

• Programming of two matching points, varying only in the C value, is also not accepted. In
that case, in fact, the second matching line will not be transmitted.

• If two points are programmed very close to each other, with a wide movement of the C-axis,
the rotating axis speed will be worked out basing upon the routing speed defined for the U, V
and W axes. The maximum routing chasing exceeded error may therefore occur, since this
might produce speeds and accelerations that may not be reached by the C-axis. This problem
may not be solved by the NC, it is nonetheless very unusual. Tests have shown that if this
axis is late, a different solid than the programmed one will be generated in that spot, but no
mechanical tool or head failure will ever occur. Setting a very high MLAG_TNG chasing
error therefore appears as an acceptable solution.

• Corner-rounding Q flag or radius compensation may not be programmed within a G101

command.

Page 120
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.11 Codes for executing boring-works

[Link] Vertical-boring slowing down

Drill speed normally remains steady throughout boring; a variation may, nonetheless, sometimes be
required in critical machining points, due to finishing reasons.

[Link].1 Slowing down in drill boring speed at wood entry

M111 code is used to set drill slowing-down at wood entry.

M111 D F D Distance, from wood upper surface, to be covered at slow speed, as set by
parameter F
F Slow boring speed

M111 D10 F2
G100 X81.25 Y62.50 Z20 F5 T21
M111 D0 F0
M112 D0 F0

In the following example, slow speed SET WITH CODE m111 (Parameter “F” = 2 m/min) starts on
the wood surface and ends 10 mm down. If boring depth is greater than slow-speed distance, the
machine will execute the first 10 mm at slow speed and it will finish boring at the speed set with
codes G100, through parameter F. If boring depth is not greater than slow-speed distance, the
machine will execute the whole boring at the slow speed set with code M111, through parameter “F”
= 2 m/min.

After the last G100 boring code featuring machining slowdowns, M111 and M112 codes variables
are to be set to 0.

[Link].2 Slowing down in drill boring speed at hole-end

M112 code is used to set drill slowing-down at hole-end.

M112 D F D Distance, from boring end, to be covered at slow speed, as set by

parameter F
F Slow boring speed

M112 D9 F3
G100 X81.25 Y62.50 Z30 F5 T21
M111 D0 F0
M112 D0 F0

In the following example, a workpiece 30-mm thick is being processed and the machine will execute
the initial 21 mm at the speed set with code G100, through parameter F, and it will bore the last 9
mm at slow speed, as set with code M112, through parameter “F” = 3 m/min.

After the last G100 boring code featuring machining slowdowns, M111 and M112 codes variables
are to be set to 0.

Page121
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].3 Slowing down in drill boring speed at wood entry and at hole end

M111 D F D Distance, from wood upper surface, to be covered at slow speed, as set by
parameter F
F Slow boring speed

M112 D F D Distance, from boring end, to be covered at slow speed, as set by parameter F
F Slow boring speed

M111 D10 F2
M112 D9 F3
G100 X81.25 Y62.50 Z30 F5 T21
M111 D0 F0
M112 D0 F0

In the following example, a workpiece 30-mm thick is being processed and the slow speed set with
code M111 (Parameter “F” = 2 m/min) starts on the wood surface and ends 10 mm down. If boring
depth is greater than the slow-speed distance set with code M111 (Parameter “D” = 10mm), the
machine will execute the first 10 mm at slow speed, then it will start boring at the speed set with
code G100, through parameter F, and finally it will bore the last 9mm at the slow speed set with
code M112, through parameter F = 3 m/min.

After the last G100 boring code featuring machining slowdowns, M111 and M112 codes variables
are to be set to 0.

[Link] Code G100

Code G G100allows programming vertical boring works to be executed by one or more drills. This
command sets the execution of a hole at the values defined within the command itself, and by either
the specified drill or by all specified drills at the same time, with the first drill working as value
reference.

G100 X Y Z F T X, Y, Z Hole Co-ordinates

F Boring speed
T Tool

If you want to use more than one drill, you may either declare them, one after the other, separated by
commas, or define a tool family. Tool families are defined by parametric lines such as

i.e.,.
#T81=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 Fields (A, C)

The above example defines tool family T81, including all drills from number 1 to 10, with the first
one being the Master drill. Available tool families go from T81 to T99. In case of symmetric face
machining, symmetric tool families are to be defined. With reference to the above example, this may
be done as described here below:

#X81=10,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1 Fields (D, B)

#Y81=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 Fields (I, K)

#S81=10,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1 Fields (L, J)

Family X81 stands for mirror-copy on axis X, family Y81 stands for mirror-copy on axis Y, family
S81 stands for mirror-copy both on axis X and Y.

Page 122
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Codes G182 G183 G184 G185

Codes G182, G183, G184 and G185 are used to program horizontal boring for the left, right, rear
and front face, respectively.

X, Y, Z Hole co-ordinates
K Boring offset, allowing inward boring shift. This parameter is useful
when boring is to be executed further in from workpiece profile.
F Boring speed
T Tool number

These codes, similarly to G100, allow both single and

multiple boring, by setting more than one tool. This
may be done either by entering all tools to be used,
separated by commas, within the command, or by
defining a tool family Tool families are defined by
parametric lines such as the one in the example
below.

N.B. When executing horizontal boring, both within

a corner (see figure above) and on a workpiece side, the machine moves the axes to the short
motion height at fast speed, and then completes the positioning operations at slow speed.

Example: #T81=35.36

The above example defines tool family T81, including drills number 35 and 36, with the former
being the Master drill. Available tool families go from T81 to T99. In case of symmetric face
machining, symmetric tool families are to be defined. With reference to the above example, this may
be done as described here below:
#X81=37.38
#Y81=36.35
#S81=38.37

Family X81 stands for mirror-copy on the X-axis, family Y81 stands for mirror-copy on the Y-axis,
family S81 stands for mirror-copy both on the X and on the Y-axis.

[Link] Code G186

Code G186 allows executing fitting holes.

G186 X Y Z F T X, Y Fitting end-point co-ordinates

Z Hole depth
F Boring speed
T Tool number

[Link] Code G187

Code G187 allows executing both single and multiple holes at any angle.

G187 K I Z F T K Number of holes to be executed

I Line tilt
Z Hole depth
F Boring speed
T Tool number

Page123
MW310 – Project Windows

8.4.12 Series of M Codes

M codes don't need programming variables:

[Link] Code M00

PAUSE

[Link] Code M16

Tool change performance on tool changer 7 or 8, during machining
K Spindle no./ no. Tool to load

This code should be entered after a machining with a different tool than the one to be loaded
has already started.
i.e.,.
G120 K1
G172 X100 Y100 Z1 T41/1 S18 E1 J90
M16 K42/18
G101 X900 Y100 Z1 F1
G172 X100 Y200 Z1 T42/18 S18 E1 J90
G101 X900 Y200 Z1 F1

In the above example, during a machining with tool T41/1, Tool Change is executed on spindle
T42, where tool T42/18 will be assembled.

[Link] Code M26

Mating two pantographs in order to allow two routine bit to work at same time.
K It defines the spindle no. / tool no. (SLAVE pantograph) that will join the other
pantograph for machining
S Rotating speed of the mated tool.

[Link] Code M60

TOOL PARKING
M60 K
K Number of the electro-spindle to be parked

[Link] Code M98

Code G M98 allows calling-up a program, the which name corresponds to the string in inverted
commas passed on to variable K, without modifying the called-up program origin, which is still
defined by the point having the following co-ordinates: X=0 Y=0.

M98 K R
K “Name of the subprogram”
R Number of repetitions

[Link] Code M99

BACK FROM THE SUBPROGRAM

Code M99 allows exiting the subprogram or closes the main program.

[Link] Code M100

OUTLET ENABLING WITH TIMEOUT AND WAIT
N Number of outlet that may be enabled (1-10)
K Enabling time

Page 124
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code M101

OUTLET ENABLING WITH TIMEOUT AND NO WAIT
N Number of outlet that may be enabled (1-10)
K Optional enabling time

[Link] Code M102

OUTLET DISABLING
N Number of outlet that may be disabled (1-10)

[Link] Code M103

INLET UP/DOWN STATUS WAIT WITH TIMEOUT
N Number of inlet to wait for (1-10): up if positive, down if negative
K Wait timeout
(If no value is set for parameter K, the outlet remains active until code M102 is found)

[Link] Code M106

ANTI-COLLISION DISABLING

[Link] Code M107

HORIZONTAL DRILL ANTI-COLLISION ENABLING

G182,G183,G184,G185 HORIZONTAL HOLES ON THE LEFT, RIGHT, REAR

OR FRONT SIDE RESPECTIVELY
X, Y, Z Hole co-ordinates

[Link] Code M108

NORMAL OPERATION DISABLING FOR ROUTING BIT PROTECTION

[Link] Code M109

NORMAL OPERATION ENABLING FOR ROUTING BIT PROTECTION

[Link] Code M111

IT ENABLES ENTRY SLOWING-DOWN FOR VERTICAL BORING
D Distance from wood surface, inside the workpiece, to be covered at below mentioned
speed F.
F Slowing-down speed
Par. explains the syntax and operation of the slowing-down code for vertical boring.

[Link] Code M112

IT ENABLES OUTLET SLOWING-DOWN FOR THROUGH-PASSING HOLES
D Distance from wood bottom, inside the workpiece, to be covered at below mentioned
speed F.
F Slowing-down speed

8.4.13 Management of locking and positioning Support plates/Pressers

Un ipotesi e’ quella di avere due comandi ISO, uno per gestire il sistema di bloccaggi e uno per gestire la
movimentazione dei Pianetti/Pressori.

Page125
MW310 – Project Windows
One hypothesis is to have two ISO commands, one to manage the locking system and one to manage the
movement of the Support plates/Pressers

[Link] Code M200 - Managing the Releasing and Locking of the Pressers

This M code enables presser releasing and locking

Fig. 59

Zona 1 Zona 2

Page 126
MW310 – Project Windows

Syntax :
M200 Kx y z ; x y z;x y z; ……

x Identifies the number of the support plates referred to by the successive commands for the same
Support plate or for the support carriages, See Fig. 59:

1 = First support plate

2 = Second support plate, and so on.

y Identifies the element within the support plate unit the command refers to, specified in variable z, See
Fig. 59:

1 = Command referred to the same support plate

2-5 = Carriages

z Command to be executed. See Fig. 59:

Value 0 = Enables the Lock Vacuum + Lock Presser + Lock Piece

Bit 0 = Release Vacuum (Value 1)
Bit 1 = Release Presser (Value 2)
Bit 2 = Release Piece (Value 4)
Bit 3 = Positioning type
0 - Rough positioning (Suction pad)
1 - Fine positioning (Presser) (Value 8)

Example : M200 K1 5 3

Where :
1 Indicates support plate number (1)

5 Indicates presser (4), in fact, the numbering of the pressers starts with 2, since
the number 1 identifies the commands relative to the support plate itself, See Fig.
59 .

3 Indicates the command to be executed,

disabling of the vacuum for locking the presser to the support (1)
+
Release of presser (2), the part underneath the piece is lowered, See Fig. 59.

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

Example : M200 K 1 5 3 ; 1 4 3 ; 1 3 3 ; 1 2 3

In this example the release of the vacuum is commanded for all the pressers of the first
support plate.
As shown in Fig. 59, the number 2 after the “K” indicates that the command refers to the first
support plate. The numbers “5 = presser 4, 4 = presser 3, 3 = presser 2, 2 = presser 1”
indicate which support plate pressers the command refers to, and the number 3 at the bottom
indicates the command to be executed. The value which determines the command/s to be
executed is defined by calculating the sum of the values relative to all commands to be
executed simultaneously by the presser. By setting “3” as the value for the command, all the
pressers + the release of the vacuum will be released.

With multiple command strings, more than one command on the same line can be executed without
using too many parameters.

Page127
MW310 – Project Windows
Up to a maximum of 4 complete units can be specified on the same line (1 unit = 1 Support plate + 4
Pressers)

Parametric variables can be used instead of constants as values for the function. In this case specify
#np (where np=parameter number).

Example : M200 K1 2 3; 1 3 3
M200 K#1 2 3 ; 1 #11 3

In this example the locking vacuum of the presser to support (1) + the Release
of presser (2) on carriage 2 and 3 of Support plate 1 are disabled

[Link] Code M201 - Positioning Management

Positioning Management, with the following syntax

M201 K x y z

x Unit (Support plate/Carriages) to which the information is destined,

1 = first Support plate,
2 = second Support plate and so on.

y Identifies the element within the Support plate unit to which the command is referred,
specified in variable z.
1 = Support plate
2-5 = Carriages

z Positioning mode, example :

1 = Launches positioning of the values set with the M208 function without waiting for
positioning to end.
2 = Enables waiting for the end of positioning before continuing with the other commands.
3 = Launches positioning of the values set with the M208 function and waits for positioning
to end.

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

Example : M201 K 1 5 1 ; 1 4 1 ; 1 3 1 ; 1 2 1
M201 K 1 2 3
In this example, the positioning of all the pressers of the first Support plate (1 5, 1 4, 1 3, 1
2), is commanded without waiting for the end of positioning before passing on to the next
command.
In the second line, the positioning of the first Support plate (1 2) is commanded with waiting
for the end of positioning before continuing with the execution of any other commands.

N.B. Within the command string, the Code (x) which indicates the positioning mode (1-3) must be
the same for all the commands. To the contrary, a syntax error will be generated.

Example of incorrect string

M201 K1 1 3 ; 2 1 3 ; 3 1 1
Syntax error

Page 128
MW310 – Project Windows

Up to a maximum of 4 complete units can be specified on the same line (1 unit = 1 Support plate + 4
Pressers)

Parametric variables can be used instead of constants as values for the function. In this case specify
#np (where np=parameter number).

Example : M201 K 1 1 1 or, if parametric, M201 K #1 1 1

The first command launches the positioning to the values set without waiting for the
end.

M201 K 1 1 3 or, if parametric, M201 K 2 #11 3

The second command launches and waits for the end of positioning before
continuing.

N.B.: By executing the positioning command of just the Support plate or of just one carriage, all of
the Carriages of the involved Support plate will be repositioned to the values set in the M208
command.

Page129
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code M202 - Stops management

Stops management with the following syntax

M202 Kz xx yyy ;z1 xx1 yyy1

z Selects the zone to which the information is destined,

1 = zone 1 (A-B)
2 = zone 2 (C-D).

x Mapping of the 2 stops aligned in x

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
X = Previous status

y Mapping of the 3 stops aligned in y

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
X = Previous status

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

N.B.: Enabling bit mapping of the stops in Y means enabling all the references of that stop.

100 Enabling of all stops Y in A or D

010 Enabling of all stops Y in E or H
001 Enabling of all stops Y in I or L

Example : M202 K1 11 1X1

Page 130
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code M203 - Vacuum control

M203 Vacuum control, with the following syntax

M203 Kz xx

z Selects the zone to which the information is destined.

1 = zone 1 (A-B)
2 = zone 2 (C-D)

xx Vacuum mapping
0 = No vacuum
1 = vacuum

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

Example : M203 K1 11

[Link] Code M204 - Pedal input management

M204 Pedal input management, with the following syntax

The command waits for the change in status of the commanded pedal input.

M204 Ks

s Status of the pedal to be awaited,

-1 = IN pedal low in zone 1
1 = IN pedal high in zone 1
-2 = IN pedal low in zone 2
2 = IN pedal high in zone 2

Example : M204 K1

[Link] Code M205 - Start input management

M205 Start input management, with the following syntax :

The command waits until a change in status of the start or pedal input of the commanded zone is
detected. If the pedal is pressed, the program jumps to the label, if specified, otherwise it waits for
start to be pressed. If start is pressed, the program continues with the execution.
Other inputs are not considered.

M205 Ks Ln

s Status of Start to be awaited,

-1 = IN Start low in zone 1
1 = IN Start high in zone 1
-2 = IN Start low in zone 2
2 = IN Start high in zone 2

n Numeric label to which the program jumps if start has not been pressed.
If the label is not specified or is set to zero, the system only waits for the start input.
The label number must be between 1 and 99, inclusive.

Example : M205 K1 L1

Page131
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code M206 - Locking confirmation input management

M206 Locking confirmation input management, with the following syntax.

The command waits until a change in status of the lock confirmation or start input of the
commanded zone is detected. If start is pressed, the program jumps to the label, if specified,
otherwise it waits for the locking confirmation input to be pressed. If the locking confirmation input
is pressed, the program continues with the execution.
Other inputs are not considered.

M206 Ks Ln

s Status of the locking confirmation input to be awaited,

-1 = IN low in zone 1
1 = IN high in zone 1
-2 = IN low in zone 2
2 = IN high in zone 2

n Numeric label to which the program jumps if the locking confirmation input has not
been pressed.
If the label is not specified or is set to zero, the system only waits for the locking
confirmation input.
The label number must be between 1 and 99, inclusive.

Example : M206 K1 L1

[Link] Code M207 - Panel lifter management

M207 Kz x

z Selects the field to which the information is destined,

1 = Field A
2 = Field B
3 = Field C
4 = Field D

x Panel lifter status :

0 = Panel lifter OFF
1 = Panel lifter ON

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

Example : M207 K2 1

N.B.: B and C can also be set in the case of a 2 field machine, since no controls are executed. Every
status value other than 0 (zero) indicates panel lifter ON. The application does not set the
panel lifter information, therefore, if not modified, the previous status remains enabled..

Page 132
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code M208 - Setting Support plates/Pressers positioning values

M208 Setting positioning values, with the following syntax

M208 Kx y qqq

x Unit (Support plate/Carriages) to which the information is destined,

1 = first Support plate,
2 = second Support plate and so on

y Element within the unit,

1 = Support plate
2-5 = Carriages

qqq Positioning value

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

Up to a maximum of 4 complete units can be specified on the same line (1 unit = 1 Support plate + 4
Pressers); since the maximum length is 200 characters for commanding 4 complete units, the values
must be declared by using the parameter variables.

Parametric variables can be used instead of constants as values for the function. In this case specify
#np (where np=parameter number).

Example : M208 K1 1 12.10; 2 1 20.34

M208 K#1 1 12.10; 2 1 #10

The command sets a value of 12.10mm for the unit 1 Support plate and of 20.34mm for the unit 2
Support plate

This format for the ISO command is not very consistent with that of the other ISO commands and
surely requires a more complex parsing for the command. However, in this way not as many
parameters are needed in order to execute several commands on the same line.

Page133
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Code M209 - Vacuum management

M209 Vacuum management, with the following syntax

M209 Kz xx y;z1 xx1 y1

z Selects the zone to which the information is destined,

1 = zone 1 (A-B)
2 = zone 2 (C-D)

xx Vacuum mapping
0 = No vacuum
1 = Vacuum
X = Not commanded

y Pedal management 0=No/1=Pedal management

If it is necessary to execute several operations simultaneously, a multiple string may be created by

separating the various commands with a “;”.

Example : M209 K2 10 1

[Link] Mobile Support plate errors matched to the M codes

Error 2838, Error on mobile Support plates command.

Possible causes in function of the command:

M200 Incorrect parameter numbers (3).

Support plates number less than 1 or greater than Pressers num.
Pressers Number less than 1 or greater than Pressers num.

M201 Incorrect parameter numbers (3 o 4).

Support Plates number less than 1 or greater than Pressers num.
Pressers Number less than 1 or greater than Pressers num.
Command not constant on the line.

M202 Incorrect parameter numbers (3).

Incorrect bit map.

M203 Incorrect parameter numbers (2).

M204
M205 Incorrect “K” parameter value (-2..2).
M206

M207 Incorrect parameter numbers (2).

Incorrect field number (1..4).

M208 Incorrect parameter numbers (3).

Support plates number less than 1 or greater than Pressers num..
Pressers Number less than 1 or greater than Pressers num..

M209 Incorrect parameter numbers (3).

Error 2839 Command for Support plate not allowed, this error is generated with commands M205, M206 or
GOSBL if a label is specified and it is in the main program.

N.B: From version MW310 2.29R12 on, it is possible to perform tool changes during the execution of M
codes (with the exclusion of M00,M16 or M26).

Page 134
MW310 – Project Windows
When a Code M16 Ktt/uu D1 is commanded, at the next Mxx instruction the tool change execution starts.
The end of the tool change cycle is awaited before the execution of the next Gxx Code, this allows the
execution of several Mxx codes during tool change. When a tool change is executed with a D1, naturally
the pre-start up S Code is not accepted.

Machine-Status and Support Plate Errors

There are two LED-Bars in the system machine-status, to indicate the status of the Syncro towards the
Support plates and that of the Support plates towards the Syncro; the information is contained in Byte 0
and in Byte 2 of the VV330 variable.
In the LED-Bar of the Remote Support plate Status (S. Remote Support plate) each LED indicates which
unit is in error; it is the result of the logical sum of Bit 3 (error X) and Bit 7 (error Y) of Byte 0 of the unit
status; the first LED to the left represents the first unit, and all of the others follow.
The error of the Syncro towards the unit (Syncro Timeout command error or incorrect response) is
represented in the LED-Bar of the Syncro Support Plate Status ([Link] Support plate). The first LED to
the left represents the first unit, and all of the others follow.

Additionally, there is a machine-status for the remote devices; for each unit, the values of the Support plate,
the Pressers and the Bytes of the remote unit status (represented by 6 bytes visualised with 6 LED-Bars) are
displayed on the video.
The following information is contained in each individual Byte:

Byte 1
Bit 0 Homing X
Bit 1 Homing Y
Bit 2 Posit X
Bit 3 Error X
Bit 4 Abort X
Bit 5 Abort Y
Bit 6 Battery error
Bit 7 Error Y

Byte 2,3,4,5
Bit 0 Posit Y
Bit 1 Vacuum
Bit 2 Presser release
Bit 3 Piece release
Bit 4 Type pos 0=Norm/1=Precision

Byte 6
Bit 0 Extra-stroke X Error
Bit 1 Collision X Error
Bit 2 Extra-stroke Y Error
Bit 3 Collision Y Error
Bit 4 Drive X Error
Bit 5 Drive Y Error
Bit 6 Communication Error
Bit 7 Hardware Error

Page135
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] ISO EDITOR KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS

FUNCTION KEY

Shift-Up It allows upward selection of several lines

Shift-Down It allows downward selection of several lines

Shift-Insert It allows copying the selected block in the clipboard

Ctrl-Insert It pastes the blocks saved in the clipboard in the current clipboard
position

Delete It deletes the selected lines and saves them in the Clipboard (the last
deleted item may be restored by pressing Ctrl-Insert)

Shift-Enter It allows modifying the current line

Enter It enters a new line in the current cursor position

8.5 INTERPOLATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLE WITH INDEXED

HEADS ON AXIS C ROLL OVER
MW310 version 2.16 r20 and above allow to interpolate polar C-axis.

Only after properly setting C-axis parameters, as described in Par. [Link].1.1 and in Par.[Link],
shall it be possible to execute machinings by interpolating.

The following syncro version is required for rotating axis interpolation: SY421001 R7-4.61. MW310 version
2.16 may also be installed on the previous syncro version, but you should never attempt to interpolate. The NC
operates with C-axis in interpolation through the G173 X, Y, Z, …, C, K, D command (where former I has
become a C). In order for the NCs to be compatible with previous syncro versions, they have been programmed
in such a way that whenever they find the D item to be set to 1, they will automatically interpolate within a
program sequence. If this FLAG is set to 1 the router length and head value 3 items will not be taken into
account. During programming, you will therefore need to consider that the head center will have to move along
the final profile offset. Such an offset will be given by the sum of “VALUE 3” and the tool length. Considering
you will be working with a type-1 head. If instead you want to use a tilting head, a side and a vertical shift
should also be considered. The following function should be used to work out the side shift to be used as offset:
(Value 3 + router L)*SENα. The angle is obviously α the tilting angle with reference to the workpiece surface;
such value is to be set on the head, while it should be ignored with G173 since you will have to directly consider
the side and vertical shifts. By comparing two editing processes for the same program, varying only in the
presence of tilting K, you will realize that there is no difference in U, V and W axis positioning

Programming
• In case of absolute programming (G90), this axis will be controlled by setting 360° modular
angles, that is by defining an angle included between 0° and 359.99°. If a sign is also
specified, it will indicate whether the given value should be reached through a clockwise or a
counterclockwise movement ( - sign). The syncro, anyway, cannot exceed the number of
revolutions defined by the value, in degrees, set for the software limit switches.

• In case of incremental programming, Code G91 should as usual be enabled and a positive or
negative number should then be set as C value, depending on whether you need to increase or
decrease the starting position. The displayed value will nonetheless be given as a 360°
module, with the limitation that the maximum possible number of revolutions should not
exceed the one set for the software limit switch.

• If the same value is given for C in two following command lines, the axis will not turn,
regardless of the sign. Moreover, there will be again no axis rotation in case a command line
features no C item at all.

Page 136
MW310 – Project Windows

• The codes that may be used for interpolating the C axis are: G173 with D set to 1, G101,
G102, G103.

• Programming of two matching points, varying only in the C value, is also not accepted. In
that case, in fact, the second matching line will not be transmitted.

• If two points are programmed very close to each other, with a wide movement of the C-axis,
the rotating axis speed will be worked out basing upon the routing speed defined for the U, V
and W axes. The maximum routing chasing exceeded error may therefore occur, since this
might produce speeds and accelerations that may not be reached by the C-axis. This problem
may not be solved by the NC, it is nonetheless very unusual. Tests have shown that if this
axis is late, a different solid than the programmed one will be generated in that spot, but no
mechanical tool or head failure will ever occur. Setting a very high MLAG_TNG chasing
error therefore appears as an acceptable solution.

• Corner-rounding Q flag or radius compensation may not be programmed within a G101

command.

Page137
MW310 – Project Windows

8.6 INTERPOLATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLE WITH HEAD 5 AXES

COUNTER PIVOT EQUIPPED WITH AXIS C AND AXIS A

The axis C machining operations must be programmed by entering the positions of axes A and C with Absolute
values.
It must be kept in mind that the values X Y and Z for positioning the router must be considered to be in PIVOT
centre.

8.6.1 Specifications

Assuming that:
The axis C limit switches of the machine in question are FCMIN = -122.20 and FCMAX =301.50.
Axis C is considered to be a continuous axis.

It is possible to continuously execute routing with interpolation within the range of -122.20 and 301.50. Should it
be necessary to execute an interpolation which goes beyond these limits, it is necessary to exit from the
machining operation, then reposition axis C to re-enter on the profile and continue the machining operation.

If C=0 A from 89 to 0 the router is facing X1000

If C=180 A from 91 to 180 the router is facing X1000

If C=180 A from 89 to 0 the router is facing X-1000

If C=0 A from 91 to 180 the router is facing X-1000

Page 138
MW310 – Project Windows

8.6.2 Example of an ISO program with Axis C roll over

Page139
MW310 – Project Windows

Step1

Step 2

Page 140
MW310 – Project Windows

Step 3

Step 4

Page141
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Iso Code

%
|1
|2 0
|3 10
|4 200
|5 100
|6 200
|7 0 0 0 0
|8 0
|9
|10
|11 0
|12
|13
|14
:001
(*****************************************)
(******* MASTERWOOD s.p.a *******)
(*****************************************)
( 10 APR 06 - 14:36 )
( DX 200 DY 200 DZ -100 )
G92 U800 V0 W0
( Tip length 180 FLAT Type Tool )
G173 X91.4 Y99.24 Z-334.88 T41/1 S20 E10 D1 A91.52 C185.04
G101 X91.4 Y99.24 Z-324.89 F20
G101 X91.93 Y99.29 Z-304.89
G101 X112.96 Y100.01 Z-304.74 F16.92 C180.06 A87.93
G101 X118.16 Y100.02 Z-304.52 F20 C180.07 A87.32
G101 X123.75 Y100.02 Z-304.23 C180.08 A86.64
G101 X129.79 Y100.03 Z-303.83 A85.87
G101 X136.35 Y100.04 Z-303.31 C180.09 A85
G101 X143.52 Y100.05 Z-302.62 A84.01
G101 X151.36 Y100.06 Z-301.72 C180.1 A82.9
G101 X159.92 Y100.08 Z-300.56 A81.65
G101 X169.17 Y100.09 Z-299.09 A80.26
G101 X178.94 Y100.11 Z-297.28 C180.11 A78.76
G101 X188.76 Y100.13 Z-295.19 A77.25
G101 X197.73 Y100.14 Z-293.05 A75.9
G101 X204.68 Y100.16 Z-291.24 A74.93
G101 X211.32 Y100.16 Z-289.4 A74.01
G101 X218.52 Y100.17 Z-287.26 A72.98
G101 X226.24 Y100.18 Z-284.82 A71.85
G101 X234.34 Y100.19 Z-282.07 A70.63
G101 X242.61 Y100.2 Z-279.06 A69.36
G101 X250.77 Y100.21 Z-275.88 A68.11
G101 X258.54 Y100.22 Z-272.67 A66.93
G101 X266.26 Y100.23 Z-269.29 A65.75
G101 X274.02 Y100.25 Z-265.69 A64.54
G101 X281.83 Y100.26 Z-261.87 A63.32
G101 X289.69 Y100.28 Z-257.81 A62.07
G101 X297.6 Y100.29 Z-253.5 A60.8
G101 X305.56 Y100.3 Z-248.94 A59.49
G101 X313.51 Y100.31 Z-244.12 A58.18
G101 X321.45 Y100.33 Z-239.07 A56.84
G101 X329.38 Y100.34 Z-233.75 A55.49
G101 X337.3 Y100.35 Z-228.17 A54.12
G101 X345.22 Y100.36 Z-222.29 A52.72
G101 X353.14 Y100.38 Z-216.1 A51.3
G101 X361.05 Y100.4 Z-209.6 C180.12 A49.85

Page 142
MW310 – Project Windows
G101 X368.96 Y100.42 Z-202.75 A48.37
G101 X376.87 Y100.44 Z-195.54 A46.85
G101 X384.78 Y100.46 Z-187.92 A45.3
G101 X392.68 Y100.47 Z-179.87 A43.7
G101 X400.59 Y100.49 Z-171.36 A42.06
G101 X408.49 Y100.51 Z-162.34 C180.13 A40.36
G101 X416.4 Y100.53 Z-152.74 A38.61
(Tip A
C=180 A=37
G101 X424.31 Y100.55 Z-142.5 A36.77
(
(
G101 X424.2 Y92.59 Z-142.54 C178.73 A36.78
G101 X423.89 Y84.61 Z-142.58 C177.33 A36.79
G101 X423.38 Y76.63 Z-142.63 C175.92 A36.8
G101 X422.67 Y68.62 Z-142.69 C174.5 A36.81
G101 X421.75 Y60.61 Z-142.75 C173.07 A36.82
G101 X420.63 Y52.58 Z-142.81 C171.64 A36.83
G101 X419.3 Y44.54 Z-142.87 C170.2 A36.85
G101 X417.76 Y36.5 Z-142.93 C168.74 A36.86
G101 X416.01 Y28.44 Z-142.98 C167.27 A36.87
G101 X414.05 Y20.38 Z-143.01 C165.79
G101 X411.88 Y12.33 Z-143.04 C164.3 A36.88
G101 X409.53 Y4.37 Z-143.05 C162.82
G101 X406.99 Y-3.48 C161.35
G101 X404.27 Y-11.22 Z-143.04 C159.89
G101 X401.38 Y-18.86 Z-143.03 C158.44
G101 X398.31 Y-26.39 Z-143.01 C157
G101 X395.07 Y-33.81 Z-142.98 C155.57 A36.87
G101 X391.66 Y-41.11 Z-142.96 C154.15
G101 X388.08 Y-48.31 Z-142.94 C152.73 A36.86
G101 X384.34 Y-55.39 Z-142.92 C151.32
G101 X380.43 Y-62.36 Z-142.9 C149.91
G101 X376.35 Y-69.22 Z-142.89 C148.5
G101 X372.11 Y-75.97 Z-142.88 C147.1 A36.85
G101 X367.71 Y-82.6 Z-142.87 C145.7
G101 X363.15 Y-89.12 C144.3
G101 X358.42 Y-95.52 Z-142.88 C142.9
G101 X353.53 Y-101.81 Z-142.89 C141.5 A36.86
G101 X348.48 Y-107.98 Z-142.9 C140.09
G101 X343.27 Y-114.04 Z-142.92 C138.69
G101 X337.9 Y-119.97 Z-142.94 C137.27 A36.87
G101 X332.37 Y-125.79 Z-142.97 C135.86
G101 X326.67 Y-131.49 Z-142.99 C134.43
G101 X320.82 Y-137.07 Z-143.01 C133 A36.88
G101 X314.8 Y-142.52 Z-143.03 C131.56
G101 X308.62 Y-147.85 Z-143.05 C130.12
G101 X302.27 Y-153.05 Z-143.06 C128.66
G101 X295.77 Y-158.12 Z-143.05 C127.19
G101 X289.11 Y-163.05 Z-143.04 C125.71
G101 X282.29 Y-167.84 Z-143.02 C124.22 A36.87
G101 X275.4 Y-172.43 Z-142.98 C122.75
G101 X268.43 Y-176.83 Z-142.93 C121.28 A36.86
G101 X261.4 Y-181.03 Z-142.87 C119.83 A36.84
G101 X254.3 Y-185.03 Z-142.81 C118.38 A36.83
G101 X247.14 Y-188.84 Z-142.75 C116.95 A36.82
G101 X239.92 Y-192.45 Z-142.69 C115.52 A36.81
G101 X232.64 Y-195.86 Z-142.64 C114.1 A36.8
G101 X225.3 Y-199.08 Z-142.58 C112.69 A36.79
G101 X217.91 Y-202.1 Z-142.54 C111.28 A36.78
G101 X210.46 Y-204.93 Z-142.5 C109.88 A36.77
G101 X202.95 Y-207.57 Z-142.47 C108.49 A36.76
G101 X195.39 Y-210.01 Z-142.45 C107.09
G101 X187.78 Y-212.26 Z-142.44 C105.7

Page143
MW310 – Project Windows
G101 X180.11 Y-214.31 C104.3
G101 X172.4 Y-216.17 Z-142.45 C102.91
G101 X164.63 Y-217.84 Z-142.47 C101.51
G101 X156.8 Y-219.31 Z-142.5 C100.12 A36.77
G101 X148.93 Y-220.58 Z-142.54 C98.71 A36.78
G101 X141.01 Y-221.66 Z-142.58 C97.31 A36.79
G101 X133.04 Y-222.55 Z-142.63 C95.89 A36.8
G101 X125.02 Y-223.23 Z-142.69 C94.47 A36.81
G101 X116.96 Y-223.72 Z-142.75 C93.04 A36.82
G101 X108.84 Y-224.01 Z-142.8 C91.61 A36.83
(Tip B
C=90 A=37
G101 X100.69 Y-224.09 Z-142.86 C90.16 A36.84
(
(
G101 X100.66 Y-216.16 Z-153.1 A38.67
G101 X100.64 Y-208.25 Z-162.68 A40.43
G101 X100.64 Y-200.34 Z-171.69 A42.13
G101 X100.63 Y-192.43 Z-180.18 A43.77
G101 X100.62 Y-184.52 Z-188.21 A45.37
G101 X100.59 Y-176.62 Z-195.8 A46.92
G101 X100.57 Y-168.73 Z-202.99 A48.43
G101 X100.53 Y-160.84 Z-209.81 A49.9
G101 X100.5 Y-152.94 Z-216.29 C90.15 A51.35
G101 X100.48 Y-145.05 Z-222.44 A52.76
G101 X100.45 Y-137.15 Z-228.3 A54.15
G101 X100.43 Y-129.24 Z-233.87 C90.14 A55.52
G101 X100.42 Y-121.31 Z-239.18 A56.87
G101 X100.41 Y-113.37 Z-244.23 C90.15 A58.21
G101 X100.4 Y-105.4 Z-249.04 A59.53
G101 X100.39 Y-97.43 Z-253.61 A60.83
G101 X100.38 Y-89.51 Z-257.92 A62.11
G101 X100.37 Y-81.66 Z-261.96 C90.16 A63.35
G101 X100.36 Y-73.86 Z-265.77 A64.58
G101 X100.35 Y-66.12 Z-269.35 A65.77
G101 X100.34 Y-58.44 Z-272.72 A66.95
G101 X100.32 Y-50.69 Z-275.92 A68.13
G101 X100.3 Y-42.54 Z-279.09 A69.38
G101 X100.28 Y-34.28 Z-282.1 A70.64
G101 X100.26 Y-26.18 Z-284.84 A71.86
G101 X100.24 Y-18.46 Z-287.29 C90.15 A73
G101 X100.22 Y-11.26 Z-289.42 A74.03
G101 X100.21 Y-4.61 Z-291.26 A74.94
G101 X100.19 Y2.35 Z-293.08 A75.91
G101 X100.17 Y11.33 Z-295.22 A77.27
G101 X100.15 Y21.14 Z-297.3 A78.78
G101 X100.14 Y30.89 Z-299.1 A80.27
G101 X100.12 Y40.13 Z-300.57 A81.66
G101 X100.1 Y48.68 Z-301.73 A82.91
G101 X100.09 Y56.51 Z-302.62 C90.16 A84.02
G101 X100.07 Y63.67 Z-303.31 A85
G101 X100.06 Y70.23 Z-303.84 A85.87
G101 X100.05 Y76.26 Z-304.23 A86.64
G101 X100.04 Y81.85 Z-304.53 A87.32
G101 X100.03 Y87.04 Z-304.74 A87.93
G101 X100.02 Y91.9 Z-304.89 C90.17 A88.48
G101 X100.02 Y91.37 Z-324.89
( Tip Length 180 FLAT Type Tool )
G173 X91.4 Y99.24 Z-334.88 T41/1 S20 E10 D1 A91.52 C185.04
G101 X91.4 Y99.24 Z-324.89
G101 X91.93 Y99.29 Z-304.89
G101 X99.99 Y112.95 Z-304.74 F0.75 C270.06 A87.93
G101 X100 Y118.16 Z-304.53 F20 C270 A87.32
G101 X100.01 Y123.75 Z-304.23 C269.96 A86.64

Page 144
MW310 – Project Windows
G101 X100.02 Y129.79 Z-303.83 C269.94 A85.87
G101 X100.04 Y136.36 Z-303.31 C269.92 A85
G101 X100.05 Y143.53 Z-302.62 C269.91 A84.01
G101 X100.07 Y151.37 Z-301.72 C269.9 A82.9
G101 X100.08 Y159.92 Z-300.56 A81.65
G101 X100.09 Y169.17 Z-299.09 C269.89 A80.26
G101 X100.11 Y178.93 Z-297.28 C269.9 A78.77
G101 X100.12 Y188.74 Z-295.2 A77.26
G101 X100.13 Y197.71 Z-293.06 A75.9
G101 X100.14 Y204.67 Z-291.25 A74.93
G101 X100.15 Y211.31 Z-289.4 A74.01
G101 X100.16 Y218.52 Z-287.27 A72.98
G101 X100.17 Y226.24 Z-284.82 A71.85
G101 X100.18 Y234.35 Z-282.07 A70.63
G101 X100.19 Y242.63 Z-279.05 A69.36
G101 X100.21 Y250.78 Z-275.88 A68.11
G101 X100.22 Y258.54 Z-272.67 C269.89 A66.93
G101 X100.23 Y266.24 Z-269.29 A65.75
G101 X100.24 Y273.99 Z-265.7 A64.55
G101 X100.25 Y281.8 Z-261.88 A63.33
G101 X100.27 Y289.66 Z-257.83 A62.08
G101 X100.28 Y297.58 Z-253.51 A60.8
G101 X100.29 Y305.56 Z-248.94 A59.49
G101 X100.3 Y313.53 Z-244.12 A58.17
G101 X100.32 Y321.47 Z-239.05 A56.84
G101 X100.33 Y329.4 Z-233.74 A55.48
G101 X100.35 Y337.32 Z-228.15 A54.11
G101 X100.37 Y345.23 Z-222.28 A52.72
G101 X100.38 Y353.14 Z-216.1 C269.88 A51.3
G101 X100.4 Y361.05 Z-209.6 A49.85
G101 X100.42 Y368.96 Z-202.75 A48.37
G101 X100.43 Y376.87 Z-195.53 A46.85
G101 X100.45 Y384.79 Z-187.91 A45.3
G101 X100.47 Y392.7 Z-179.85 A43.7
G101 X100.49 Y400.6 Z-171.35 A42.06
G101 X100.5 Y408.49 Z-162.33 A40.36
G101 X100.53 Y416.39 Z-152.75 C269.87 A38.61
(Tip C
C=270 A=37
G101 X100.56 Y424.3 Z-142.51 A36.77
(
(
G101 X92.6 Y424.19 Z-142.55 C271.27 A36.78
G101 X84.63 Y423.88 Z-142.59 C272.67 A36.79
G101 X76.64 Y423.37 Z-142.65 C274.08 A36.8
G101 X68.64 Y422.66 Z-142.71 C275.5 A36.81
G101 X60.63 Y421.74 Z-142.77 C276.92 A36.83
G101 X52.6 Y420.62 Z-142.83 C278.36 A36.84
G101 X44.57 Y419.29 Z-142.89 C279.8 A36.85
G101 X36.52 Y417.75 Z-142.95 C281.25 A36.86
G101 X28.47 Y416 Z-143 C282.72 A36.87
G101 X20.42 Y414.05 Z-143.03 C284.2 A36.88
G101 X12.37 Y411.88 Z-143.06 C285.69
G101 X4.41 Y409.52 Z-143.07 C287.17 A36.89
G101 X-3.44 Y406.99 C288.64
G101 X-11.19 Y404.27 Z-143.06 C290.1
G101 X-18.82 Y401.38 Z-143.05 C291.55 A36.88
G101 X-26.35 Y398.31 Z-143.03 C292.99
G101 X-33.77 Y395.07 Z-143.01 C294.42
G101 X-41.08 Y391.66 Z-142.98 C295.85 A36.87
G101 X-48.28 Y388.08 Z-142.96 C297.27
G101 X-55.37 Y384.34 Z-142.94 C298.68 A36.86
G101 X-62.34 Y380.43 Z-142.92 C300.09

Page145
MW310 – Project Windows

(AXIS ROLL OVER)

G101 X-102.45 Y449.65 Z-202.91 F20

G101 C-59.91 F10

G101 X-62.34 Y380.43 Z-142.92 F20
G101 X-69.2 Y376.35 Z-142.9 F20 C-58.51 A36.86
G101 X-75.95 Y372.11 Z-142.89 C-57.1
G101 X-82.59 Y367.71 C-55.7
G101 X-89.11 Y363.14 C-54.3
G101 X-95.52 Y358.41 C-52.9
G101 X-101.81 Y353.52 Z-142.9 C-51.5
G101 X-107.99 Y348.47 Z-142.92 C-50.09
G101 X-114.05 Y343.25 Z-142.93 C-48.68
G101 X-119.99 Y337.88 Z-142.95 C-47.27 A36.87
G101 X-125.82 Y332.34 Z-142.98 C-45.85
G101 X-131.52 Y326.64 Z-143 C-44.42
G101 X-137.1 Y320.78 Z-143.02 C-42.99 A36.88
G101 X-142.56 Y314.75 Z-143.04 C-41.55
G101 X-147.89 Y308.57 Z-143.05 C-40.1
G101 X-153.09 Y302.22 Z-143.06 C-38.64
G101 X-158.15 Y295.71 C-37.17
G101 X-163.09 Y289.05 Z-143.05 C-35.7
G101 X-167.88 Y282.23 Z-143.02 C-34.21 A36.87
G101 X-172.47 Y275.33 Z-142.98 C-32.73
G101 X-176.87 Y268.37 Z-142.93 C-31.26 A36.86
G101 X-181.06 Y261.34 Z-142.88 C-29.81 A36.85
G101 X-185.06 Y254.24 Z-142.82 C-28.37 A36.83
G101 X-188.86 Y247.08 Z-142.76 C-26.93 A36.82
G101 X-192.47 Y239.86 Z-142.7 C-25.51 A36.81
G101 X-195.88 Y232.59 Z-142.64 C-24.09 A36.8
G101 X-199.09 Y225.26 Z-142.59 C-22.68 A36.79
G101 X-202.11 Y217.87 Z-142.54 C-21.28 A36.78
G101 X-204.93 Y210.42 Z-142.5 C-19.88 A36.77
G101 X-207.56 Y202.93 Z-142.48 C-18.48
G101 X-210 Y195.37 Z-142.46 C-17.09 A36.76
G101 X-212.25 Y187.77 Z-142.45 C-15.7
G101 X-214.3 Y180.11 C-14.3
G101 X-216.16 Y172.4 Z-142.46 C-12.91
G101 X-217.82 Y164.64 Z-142.48 C-11.52 A36.77
G101 X-219.29 Y156.83 Z-142.51 C-10.12
G101 X-220.57 Y148.97 Z-142.54 C-8.72 A36.78
G101 X-221.65 Y141.06 Z-142.59 C-7.32 A36.79
G101 X-222.53 Y133.09 Z-142.64 C-5.91 A36.8
G101 X-223.22 Y125.08 Z-142.69 C-4.49 A36.81
G101 X-223.71 Y117.02 Z-142.75 C-3.06 A36.82
G101 X-224 Y108.91 Z-142.8 C-1.62 A36.83
(Tip D
C=0 A=37
G101 X-224.09 Y100.76 Z-142.86 C-0.18 A36.84
(
(
G101 X-216.21 Y100.72 Z-153.04 C-0.17 A38.66
G101 X-208.31 Y100.66 Z-162.6 C-0.16 A40.42
G101 X-200.4 Y100.63 Z-171.62 A42.11
G101 X-192.47 Y100.57 Z-180.15 C-0.15 A43.76
G101 X-184.51 Y100.54 Z-188.22 A45.37
G101 X-176.58 Y100.54 Z-195.84 A46.93
G101 X-168.67 Y100.54 Z-203.04 A48.44
G101 X-160.79 Y100.54 Z-209.85 C-0.16 A49.91
G101 X-152.92 Y100.54 Z-216.31 A51.35
G101 X-145.06 Y100.53 Z-222.44 A52.76
G101 X-137.19 Y100.51 Z-228.27 A54.14
G101 X-129.29 Y100.48 Z-233.84 A55.51

Page 146
MW310 – Project Windows
G101 X-121.36 Y100.45 Z-239.14 A56.86
G101 X-113.41 Y100.42 Z-244.21 C-0.15 A58.2
G101 X-105.43 Y100.39 Z-249.03 C-0.14 A59.52
G101 X-97.44 Y100.36 Z-253.61 A60.83
G101 X-89.51 Y100.35 Z-257.92 A62.11
G101 X-81.64 Y100.33 Z-261.97 A63.36
G101 X-73.84 Y100.32 Z-265.78 A64.58
G101 X-66.11 Y100.31 Z-269.36 A65.78
G101 X-58.43 Y100.3 Z-272.72 A66.95
G101 X-50.68 Y100.29 Z-275.92 A68.13
G101 X-42.54 Y100.27 Z-279.09 A69.38
G101 X-34.28 Y100.26 Z-282.09 A70.64
G101 X-26.18 Y100.24 Z-284.84 A71.86
G101 X-18.47 Y100.22 Z-287.29 A73
G101 X-11.26 Y100.21 Z-289.42 A74.03
G101 X-4.61 Y100.2 Z-291.27 A74.94
G101 X2.36 Y100.18 Z-293.08 A75.91
G101 X11.33 Y100.16 Z-295.22 A77.27
G101 X21.14 Y100.14 Z-297.3 A78.78
G101 X30.9 Y100.12 Z-299.1 A80.27
G101 X40.13 Y100.11 Z-300.57 A81.66
G101 X48.68 Y100.09 Z-301.73 A82.91
G101 X56.51 Y100.08 Z-302.63 A84.02
G101 X63.67 Y100.06 Z-303.31 C-0.13 A85
G101 X70.23 Y100.05 Z-303.84 A85.87
G101 X76.26 Y100.04 Z-304.23 A86.64
G101 X81.85 Y100.03 Z-304.53 A87.32
G101 X87.04 Y100.03 Z-304.74 A87.93
G101 X91.9 Y100.02 Z-304.89 A88.48
G101 X91.37 Y100.02 Z-324.89
( PROGRAM END )
%

Page147
MW310 – Project Windows

8.6.3 Example of an ISO program without Axis C roll over

Page 148
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Iso Code

%
|1 5AXES_DEMI BOULE 22/03/2006
|2 0
|3 29
|4 100.00
|5 85.00
|6 100.00
|7 0 0 0 0
|8 0
|9
|10
|11 0
|12
|13
|14
|30 0 01
|31
|32
|33
|34
|35
|36
|37
|38
:C:\Mw310\Prog\Test post 5 [Link]
G92 U800 V-300 W-440
(
(QUADRANT 1 ENTERS WITH A90 AND C180
G120 K1
G173 X50 Y50 Z-10 E4 S16 T41/1 A90 C180 D1
G101 X50 Y50 Z0
G101 X76.873 Y50 Z1.039 A85.58
G101 X104.227 Y50 Z4.25 A81.04
G101 X131.463 Y50 Z9.668 A76.46
G101 X157.97 Y50 Z17.17 A71.92
G101 X183.197 Y50 Z26.494 A67.50
G101 X207.625 Y50 Z37.737 A63.08
G101 X231.669 Y50 Z51.172 A58.54
G101 X254.756 Y50 Z66.598 A53.96
G101 X276.376 Y50 Z83.675 A49.42
G101 X296.116 Y50 Z101.944 A45.00
G101 X314.38 Y50 Z121.677 A40.58
G101 X331.457 Y50 Z143.297 A36.04
G101 X346.883 Y50 Z166.384 A31.46
G101 X360.319 Y50 Z190.428 A26.92
G101 X371.566 Y501 Z214.863 A22.50
G101 X380.888 Y50 Z240.084 A18.08
G101 X388.391 Y50 Z266.59 A13.54
G101 X393.809 Y50 Z293.826 A8.96
G101 X397.02 Y50 Z321.1. A4.42
(Tip A
C=180 A=0
G101 X398.06 Y50 Z348.06 A0
(
(
(X=100+163.6+134.6 HORIZONTAL TOOL
G101 X398.06 Y50 Z358.06
G101 X397.02 Y23.12 Z358.06 C175.58
G101 X393.809 Y-4.234 Z358.06 C171.04
G101 X388.482 Y-31.093 Z358.06 C166.53
G101 X380.926 Y-57.859 Z358.06 C161.94
G101 X371.373 Y-83.661 Z358.06 C157.40

Page149
MW310 – Project Windows
G101 X360.17 Y-107.926 Z358.06 C153.02
G101 X346.856 Y-131.72 Z358.06 C148.53
G101 X331.546 Y-154.64 Z358.06 C143.99
G101 X314.878 Y-175.8 Z358.06 C139.56
G101 X296.113 Y-196.119 Z358.06 C135.00
G101 X275.793 Y-214.883 Z358.06 C130.44
G101 X254.633 Y-231.551 Z358.06 C126.01
G101 X231.713 Y-246.86 Z358.06 C121.47
G101 X207.918 Y-260.174 Z358.06 C116.98
G101 X183.654 Y-271.376 Z358.06 C112.60
G101 X157.852 Y-280.929 Z358.06 C108.06
G101 X131.085 Y-288.483 Z358.06 C103.47
G101 X104.227 Y-293.81 Z358.06 C98.96
G101 X76.873 Y-297.021 Z358.06 C94.42
(Tip B
C=90 A=0
G101 X50 Y-298.06 Z358.06 C90.00
(
(
G101 X50 Y-298.06 Z348.06
G101 X50 Y-297.021 Z321.181 A4.42
G101 X50 Y-293.809 Z293.828 A8.96
G101 X50 Y-288.391 Z266.591 A13.54
G101 X50 Y-280.888 Z240.085 A18.08
G101 X50 Y-271.564 Z214.859 A22.5
G101 X50 Y-260.32 Z190.43 A26.92
G101 X50 Y-246.885 Z166.387 A31.46
G101 X50 Y-231.459 Z143.3 A36.04
G101 X50 Y-214.382 Z121.68 A40.58
G101 X50 Y-196.116 Z101.944 A45
G101 X50 Y-176.38 Z83.678 A49.42
G101 X50 Y-154.76 Z66.601 A53.96
G101 X50 Y-131.673 Z51.175 A58.54
G101 X50 Y-107.63 Z37.74 A63.08
G101 X50 Y-83.197 Z26.494 A67.5
G101 X50 Y-57.975 Z17.172 A71.92
G101 X50 Y-31.469 Z9.669 A76.46
G101 X50 Y-4.232 Z4.251 A81.04
G101 X50 Y23.121 Z1.039 A85.58
G101 X50 Y50 Z0 A90
(QUADRANT 3 ENTERS WITH A90 AND C180
G120 K1
G173 X50 Y50 Z-60 E4 S16 T41/1 A90 C180 D1
G101 X50 Y50 Z-50 C180
G101 X19.882 Y50 Z-48.859 A94.32
G101 X-11.213 Y50 Z-45.265 A98.82
G101 X-42.616 Y50 Z-39.076 A103.45
G101 X-73.594 Y50 Z-30.326 A108.1
G101 X-103.429 Y50 Z-19.243 A112.7
G101 X-131.515 Y50 Z-6.205 A117.15
G101 X-157.537 Y50 Z8.383 A121.41
G101 X-182.991 Y50 Z25.311 A125.8
G101 X-207.854 Y50 Z44.806 A130.36
G101 X-231.471 Y50 Z66.589 A135
G101 X-253.254 Y50 Z90.206 A139.64
G101 X-272.749 Y50 Z115.069 A144.2
G101 X-289.677 Y50 Z140.523 A148.59 C-0
G101 X-304.265 Y50 Z166.545 A152.85 C0
G101 X-317.303 Y50 Z194.631 A157.3
G101 X-328.386 Y50 Z224.466 A161.9
G101 X-337.136 Y50 Z255.444 A166.55
G101 X-343.325 Y50 Z286.847 A171.18
G101 X-346.919 Y50 Z317.942 A175.68

Page 150
MW310 – Project Windows
(Tip C
C=180 A=180
G101 X-348.06 Y50 Z348.06 A180
(
(
G101 X-348.06 Y50 Z358.06
G101 X-346.919 Y80.112 Z358.06 C175.58
G101 X-343.326 Y111.207 Z358.06 C171.04
G101 X-337.137 Y142.61 Z358.06 C166.53
G101 X-328.912 Y171.972 Z358.06 C161.94
G101 X-317.761 Y202.326 Z358.06 C157.40
G101 X-304.182 Y231.677 Z358.06 C153.02
G101 X-288.545 Y259.376 Z358.06 C148.53
G101 X-271.347 Y284.921 Z358.06 C143.99
G101 X-252.82 Y308.364 Z358.06 C139.56
G101 X-231.474 Y331.467 Z358.06 C135.00
G101 X-208.371 Y352.814 Z358.06 C130.44
G101 X-184.928 Y371.342 Z358.06 C126.01
G101 X-159.384 Y388.541 Z358.06 C121.47
G101 X-131.685 Y404.178 Z358.06 C116.98
G101 X-102.335 Y417.758 Z358.06 C112.60
G101 X-71.981 Y428.909 Z358.06 C108.06
G101 X-42.618 Y437.135 Z358.06 C103.47
G101 X-11.215 Y443.325 Z358.06 C98.96
G101 X19.88 Y446.919 Z358.06 C94.42
(Tip D
C=90 A=180
G101 X50 Y448.06 Z358.06 C90.00
(
(
G101 X50 Y448.06 Z348.06
G101 X50 Y446.919 Z317.94 A175.68
G101 X50 Y443.325 Z286.845 A171.18
G101 X50 Y437.135 Z255.442 A166.55
G101 X50 Y428.386 Z224.464 A161.9
G101 X50 Y417.302 Z194.63 A157.3
G101 X50 Y404.265 Z166.543 A152.85
G101 X50 Y389.674 Z140.519 A148.59
G101 X50 Y372.746 Z115.065 A144.2
G101 X50 Y353.251 Z90.202 A139.64
G101 X50 Y331.467 Z66.586 A135
G101 X50 Y307.85 Z44.803 A130.36
G101 X50 Y282.987 Z25.308 A125.8
G101 X50 Y257.532 Z8.381 A121.41
G101 X50 Y231.509 Z-6.208 A117.15
G101 X50 Y203.422 Z-19.245 A112.69
G101 X50 Y173.588 Z-30.328 A108.1
G101 X50 Y142.61 Z-39.077 A103.45
G101 X50 Y111.207 Z-45.266 A98.82
G101 X50 Y80.112 Z-48.859 A94.32
G101 X50 Y50 Z-50 A90
%

Page151
MW310 – Project Windows

8.7 PROGRAMMING MACHININGS WITH SHARP EDGES

MW310 software allows creating “square” edges not leaving any router radius mark on the
workpiece. The operating principle consists in passing with several routers, progressively
decreasing the radius, and following the bisecting line along the edges, until reaching the surface
in the preset point. Such machinings, with their final part being executed by means of a lance-type
routing bit, actually produce an edge without the routing bit radius. This technique has nonetheless
some limitations: it may be used only with linear profiles and not with curved ones; it is very
complicated to work out the routing bit path in the correct position. Within MW310 ISO Editor,
codes G112 and G113 (See par. 8.5) allow enabling and disabling the automatic function that
moves the routing bit to its working position, by taking into account the set radius, down to 0
depth and along the bisecting line, thus decreasing the compensated radius down to zero, and that
afterwards brings the routing bit back into compensation and goes on with the set machining.
Obviously, when compensation is applied to any profile whatsoever, the machine will execute
such outputs only for edges included "within” the compensation. Due to the peculiar operating
principle of these codes, you need specifying the routing bit radius in the compensation codes and,
again, you need finding the routing bit path allowing the routing bit side to skim machinings along
their straight line portions, “fretting” wood by executing the edges as explained above. All this is
to be considered because the machine creates a straight line joining two points, according to the
following principle: the first point is defined by the position where the routing bit radius or the
vertex, in case of the last pass, go through the machining lower edge at depth P and radius Q; the
second point is the intended end point of the machining at 0 depth and after recovering the whole
routing bit radius (see figure).

A = Path to create
B = Routing bit radius in the point
Q = Compensation radius
P = Machining depth

Page 152
MW310 – Project Windows

Just as it happens with the ISO Editor, with Masterwork you need enabling the
“sharp edges” function and creating the intended radius. An example of such
machining is when you want to use the following routing bits given by BUP.

Page153
MW310 – Project Windows
The first thing to do is defining the working depth, 8mm for instance. Secondly, you draw on paper
the approximate profile you want to create, which therefore varies according to the set profiler
depth. Therefore, starting from the lower edge, you draw the straight line the first routing bit radius
is supposed to “lie” along; that is to say that, looking at routing bit 5 drawings, you draw a vertical
straight line at 13mm distance from the lower edge. The hard part is now over since finishing passes
with routing bits 7 and 8 correspond with the point where the routing bit is supposed to be at wood
edge. In order to gain a better understanding of what has been said here above, please refer to the
figure below.

As you may see in the drawing, the two edges corresponding with the lower and upper machinings
are respectively at 5 and 2.5mm from machining 0 point, which is actually the path of routing bit 5.
The two paths refer to the last pass being performed by routing bit 8; in order to define the
intermediate pass of routing bit 7, a simple 2mm offset is required (routing bit 7 radius). Even
though it might seem complicated, Masterwork allows easily creating this machining, you only need
to draw the appropriate profile corresponding to the dotted straight line, then you proceed with the
four offsets for the finishing paths, eventually they may be associated with deformation in order to
create a parametric program, and finally you relate routing bits in their correct order.

A = Path No. 1 Routing bit 5: r=20 P=8 (Profiling)

B = Path No. 5 Routing bit 8: r=1,5 P=1,5 (Top)
C = Path No. 4 Routing bit 7: r=1,5 P=1,5 (Top)
D = Path No. 3 Routing bit 8: r=8 P=8 (Bottom)
E = Path No. 2 Routing bit 7: r=8 P=8 (Bottom)

Page 154
MW310 – Project Windows

8.8 FIGURE PROGRAMMING AND EDITOR

Figures allow easier programming for several types of machinings. In fact, in order to execute
available figure machinings, operators simply need entering the specific dimensions.

ISO function G211 (Par. [Link]) allows entering the figures in the program. As previously explained
with reference to the machine's ISO functions, this code is assigned a parameter that is used to define
the type of mirroring, that is to say the position the figure shall assume. A figure may be mirror-copied
along the X-axis, the Y-axis or both, always with reference to its center; it may not be rotated by 90°.

On the drop-down "Edit" menu, within the main programming window (Fig. 62), click on “Figure
File” (Fig. 77) to open the window shown in Fig. 80.
Fig. 77

Fig. 78

At the right side of the screen, right underneath the drawing, scroll the list and select the figure to be
used in the program.

Page155
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 79

P1 P2 P2 P1

Left-hand workpiece Right-hand workpiece

As shown in Fig. 61, accurate selection of the first machining segment - i.e., the segment shown
in red in the figure editor and in bold here above - allows figure machining to be executed in the
same direction, thus preventing possible chipping.

The red section, which may be defined as “non-reversal segment”, should be selected on one of
the figure segments that are perpendicular to the axis of symmetry; otherwise it would not
produce the required results. In other words, in order to avoid chipping when the machining is
being executed in the mirroring area with reference to the Y-axis, the non-reversal segment
should be selected along the X-axis.

The figure editor features Cartesian axes representing the orthogonal axes X and Y, which
provide the programmer with a necessary reference for the figure insertion on the workpiece.
They are, in fact, particularly useful when machinings are to be executed on other faces than
horizontal face 1.

Here follows a description and illustration of all figures available.

8.8.1 Programming the “Meeting” figure

Fig. 80

Page 156
MW310 – Project Windows

8.8.2 Programming the “Knob" figure

Fig. 81

8.8.3 Programming the “Bottom plates” figure

Fig. 82

Page157
MW310 – Project Windows

8.8.4 Programming the “Stanley" figure

Fig. 83

8.8.5 Programming the "Locks” figure

Fig. 84

Page 158
MW310 – Project Windows

8.8.6 Programming the "Arches” figure

“Arches” are programmed by means of a shield, named "Figure", that may be recalled within the
ISO program through code G211.

To define “ARCH” machinings, follow the below listed steps:

1) Enter ISO programming, “Program editor” (See par. 8, Fig. 62)

2) Define the workpiece and program features (See Fig. 63)
3) Enter “figure editor” (See par.8.6, Fig. 77)
4) Select the figure corresponding to arch machinings from the scroll list, Fig. 78.
5) Edit the arch drawing, Fig. 85.
6) Record modifications by clicking on save, Fig. 85.
7) Recall the figure within the program, by means of Code G211.

[Link] Frame Dimensions

Fig. 85

1 External frame dimensions

2 Jamb width

3 Bending radius for the arch start segment. If a value is entered, the lower segment is
blended to the base at 90° and, automatically, to the upper segment, which produces
correct bending with relation to the other set values.
To have the same bending on the whole arch, go back to value 3 upon data fill-in
completion and click on “CALCULATE” (Fig. 86), the radius value will thus be
automatically entered.
If value 3 is set to zero, the arch bending will have the same radius and value 6,
defining the angle of tangency with the base, will thus be enabled. When the cursor is
on variable “6” box, click on “calculate” (automatically CALCULATES the angle of
tangency), “0°” (angle of tangency at 0°) and “90°” (angle of tangency at 90°) to
automatically work out all values relating to the selected option.

Page159
MW310 – Project Windows

With a 0° angle of tangency, the arch bending ends with a horizontal blending
between the external and the internal bending.

With a 90° angle of tangency, the arch bending ends with a vertical blending between
the external and the internal bending.
Fig. 86

Fig. 87

If the angle of tangency is automatically calculated, the arch bending is completed by

tracing a perpendicular to the tangent at the external bending end-point; such
perpendicular line will thus close the internal bending. If there's also a base (value 7),
it may be programmed by following one of the procedures described here below:

Page 160
MW310 – Project Windows
1) A segment is drawn, having “7” as length value and being tangent to the arch
external bending. A second segment will then be drawn, parallel to the first one
and with the same length, horizontally shifted to intersect the internal bending and
finally horizontally bended.
Fig. 88

Z = Tangent point

2) A segment is drawn, having “7” as length value and being tangent to the arch
external bending. Hence, a new segment with length "7” will be drawn, parallel to
the first one, and vertically blended.
Fig. 89

Z = Tangent point

3) A vertical segment (with length equaling "7”) is drawn on the arch external
bending. At the point of intersection between such segment and the tangent to
the arch, a new line, perpendicular to the tangent, is drawn to intersect the
internal bending. Hence a second segment “7” is drawn, being parallel to the first
one and blended with it by means of a segment that is parallel to the previously
drawn perpendicular to the tangent.
Fig. 90

Z = Tangent point

4 Jamb height
5 Arch external height
7 Base height
6 Tangent radium to the arch bending (see value 3)

Page161
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Sash dimensions

Fig. 91

8 It defines the required distance between the fixed frame and the window, when
the arch is closed.
9 It defines the dimension of the overlap between either the sash and the fixed
frame, or two sashes.
10 It defines the number of sashes in the arch, either one or two
11 It defines the sash section.

Fig. 92

A = Left-hand sash B = Right-hand sash

Page 162
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Glass-stop dimensions

Fig. 93

Fig. 94

12 It defines the recess depth inside the sash that is required for the glass stop
13 It defines the routing depth required for the glass stop

Page163
MW310 – Project Windows

8.9 ANUBA-HINGE PROGRAMMING

If anuba-hinge management is enabled by setting the “EN-ANUBA=(11……21)” parameter (as
described in Par. 11.6), this function can be used as follows:

Hinge sections are programmed by means of a special ISO command line, which is created by
setting the parameters contained in the form of Fig. 97. To access such window, open a new
program line and select “Anuba-hinges” (Fig. 95), then confirm by pressing “ENTER”.

Fig. 95

Page 164
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 96

There are several types of anuba-hinge machinings, each providing for a different hinge inserting
management procedure.

The possible types are described in the following paragraphs:

• Free anuba-hinges
• Automatic calculation A – B
• Automatic calculation A – C – D – B
• Automatic calculation A – B at range

Page165
MW310 – Project Windows

8.9.1 “Free anuba-hinges”

This option allows inserting up to 9 anuba-hinges and setting the distances of each anuba-hinge in
relation to the others.
Fig. 97

Page 166
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Number of items

In this example, insertion of three anuba-hinges is programmed.

To correctly enter the positions of the anuba-hinges, refer to the drawing of

the piece to be worked, in which the door has been drawn in a vertical
position, and consider the positions as described below:

The first anuba-hinge insertion (A1) will be executed

150mm from the bottom.
The second (A2) will be executed 500mm from the
first (A1).
The third (A3) will be executed 500mm from the
second (A2).

In positioning the anuba-hinges, the reference of the piece (LH-RH-Up-Down) is irrelevant, since
(as shown in the figure), anuba-hinge A1 will always be referred to the lower part of the piece and
anuba-hinge A2 shall always be referred to anuba-hinge A1. The MW310 program will provide the
proper considerations for the correct execution of the piece.

8.9.2 “A-B Automatic Calculation”

This type of hinge insertion allows managing up to 9 aube-hinges, by setting the distances for each
anuba-hinge in relation to the others.
Fig. 98

Page167
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Number of items

In this example, the insertion of three anuba-hinges is programmed. To correctly enter the positions
A, B, always refer to the drawing of the piece to be worked.

To correctly enter the positions of the anuba-hinges, refer to the drawing of

the piece to be worked, in which the door has been drawn in a vertical
position, and consider the positions as described below:

The first anuba-hinge insertion (A) will be executed

200mm from the bottom.
The second (B) will be executed 2500mm from the
first (A1).
The third will be automatically inserted halfway
between the first and the second anuba-hinge.

In positioning the anuba-hinges, the reference of the piece (LH-RH-Up-Down) is irrelevant, since
(as shown in the figure), anuba-hinge A1 will always be referred to the lower part of the piece and
anuba-hinge B shall always be referred to the top of the piece. The MW310 program will provide
the proper considerations for the correct execution of the piece.

8.9.3 «Automatic Calculation A – C – D - B»

This type of hinge section allows inserting up to 9 aube-hinges, by setting the distances for each
anuba-hinge in relation to the others.
Fig. 99

Page 168
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Number of items

In this example, the insertion of 5 anuba-hinges is programmed. To correctly enter the positions A,
B, C, D, always refer to the drawing of the piece to be worked.

As shown in the drawing, the door is drawn in a vertical position, therefore to

program the woking of the five anuba-hinges in the example, proceed as
follows:

The first anuba-hinge insertion (A) will be executed

200mm from the bottom.
The second (B) will be executed 250mm from the top.
The third (C) will be executed 270mm from (A)
The fourth (D) will be executed 220mm from (B).
The fifth will be entered automatically halfway between
(C) and (D).

In positioning the anuba-hinges, the reference of the piece (LH-RH-Up-Down) is irrelevant, since
(as shown in the figure), anuba-hinge (A) will always be referred to the lower part of the piece and
anuba-hinge (C) will always be referred to anuba-hinge (A). In the same way, anuba-hinge (B) will
always be referred to the top of the piece and anuba-hinge (D) will always be referred to anuba-
hinge (B). The MW310 program shall provide the proper considerations for the correct machining of
the piece.

Page169
MW310 – Project Windows

8.9.4 “Range A-B Automatic Calculation”

This type of hinge machining allows inserting up to 9 aube-hinges, by setting the distances for each
anuba-hinge in relation to the others.
Fig. 100

[Link] Number of items

In this example, programming the machining of the anuba-hinges depends on the length of the piece.
To correctly insert the positions of A and B, always refer to the drawing of the piece to be worked.

The first anuba-hinge insertion (A) will be executed 200mm from the bottom.
The second (B) will be executed 180mm from the top.
The other three anuba-hinge insertions will be executed in function of the piece
length:
Up to L1, only anuba-hinges (A) and (B) will be mounted.
From L1 to L2, three anuba-hinges will be mounted, (A), (B) and the third halfway
between the first two.
From L3 to L4 four anuba-hinges will be mounted, (A), (B) and the remaining two
will be spaced evenly by dividing the center-to-center distance between (A) and
(B) in three equal parts.
From L3 to L4 five anuba-hinges will be mounted, (A), (B) and the remaining
three will be spaced evenly by dividing the center-to-center distance between (A)
and (B) in four equal parts.

In positioning the anuba-hinges, the reference of the piece (LH-RH-Up-Down)

is irrelevant, since as in the aforementioned cases, the positions of the anuba-
hinges will always be referred as shown in the figure. The MW310 program
will provide the proper considerations for the correct execution of the piece.

Page 170
MW310 – Project Windows

8.9.5 Anuba-hinge profile programming

The above figure shows the part which correspond to the work faces and to the profiles of the pice
for the Female and Male anuba-hinges.
In order to execute the anuba-hinge sections several parameters regarding the piece profile to be
worked must be defined:

(J) Represents the angle at which the anuba-hinge must be mounted on the piece, considering
that at 0° the anuba-hinge will be worked at a right angle with face 2 (axis J at 0°). While at
90°, the anuba-hinge will be worked at a right angle with face 1 (axis J at 90°).

(H) Represents the distance from the zero of the selected work face on which the programmed
operation will be executed.

(N) Indicates the number of the selected profile. Click on the “ ” key to open the profile
definition form for the pieces for anuba-hinge sectioning.
Programming the profiles is exclusively used during anuba-hinge programming. We can use
the profile editor to create, delete or modify a profile. A profile is characterised by an
identification number and by several physical dimensions of the lock, clearly indicated on the
screen. Unlike the faces, the profiles also require the piece thickness: the thickness
considered by the machine in executing the anuba-hinge program as opposed to the thickness
entered in the program definition.

Once all of the fields referred to the profile to be defined have been completed, the colour relative to
the face to be worked must be noted and saved.

(Face to be worked)

After comparing the colours of the workpiece profiles with those shown in the
figure to the side, to conclude this part of the anuba-hinge programming, check
the box relative to the face to be machined.

Page171
MW310 – Project Windows

8.9.6 Parameters
The data relative to the box of parameters may or may not be associated with the ISO program.

If these data are not to be linked to the program, DO NOT CHECK the box, in this way
these machining data can be directly specified in the automatic screen.

If this data is to be specified within the program, CHECK the box and associate this
information with the program; each time the program is loaded, the information entered in the
program will update those shown automatically.

• The model of the anuba-hinge to be worked, the anuba-hinge model to be mounted can be
entered in the text box (amongst those defined using the anuba tooling up editor), (Ex. 14
mm Double, 14mm Single, 16mm Double, 16mm Single, etc.).

• The type of anuba-hinge to be worked, female anuba-hinge (generally placed on the sash) or
male Anuba-hinge (generally placed on the frame).

• The displacement with respect to the X reference, in the fields L1, L2, L3 the dimension of
the clear span between the sash and the frame (L1), the frame traverse (L2), the sash traverse
(L3) can be respectively entered.

• Indicates the side of the piece which will rest against the zero stops of the machine. If the top
of the sash or frame is to rest against the stops, check the box over the figure of the window. If
the bottom of the sash or frame is to rest against the stops, check the box under the figure of the
window.

Example of the placement of the doors or windows on the various machine stops

Page 172
MW310 – Project Windows

The code:

“DOWN – DX” Indicates the bottom part of a door that opens to the Right

“UP – DX” Indicates the top part of door that opens to the Right

“DOWN – SX” Indicates the bottom of a door that opens to the Left

“UP – SX” Indicates the top of a door that opens to the Left

• To run the anuba-hinge section program and solely execute the boring, Check the “Boring
Only” box, at the programmed positions, the anuba-hinge section program will only execute the
boring.

[Link] Anuba-hinge

Double click on the “Anuba-hinge” field or on the icon associated with the anuba-hinge to start the
anuba-hinge editor, which will be used to create or modify the anuba-hinge tooling up. (see par.
7.3).

Click on the “ ” key to open the list of previously created,

available anuba-hinges.

To select one, click with the mouse on the name associated with
the anuba-hinge to be worked.

To exit from the list, press the “ESC” key.

.

Page173
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Piece on stop (top/bottom part of frame/sash)

This part of the anuba-hinge programming window,

selection boxes are used to determine which part of the
sash or frame will rest against the stop, i.e. if the top or
bottom part of the piece to be worked touches the stop.

[Link] Stop point (Inside/outside of frame/sash)

In any case, if the top or the bottom of the piece is to rest against the stop, the point on the stop is
also important.

L1 Clear span between sash and frame (it will be executed on the side of the chosen stop)
L2 Frame traverse (frame beam width).
L3 Sash traverse section (sash beam width).

In other words, if the piece is to rest on the outside of the sash or on the inside of the frame (Green
Arrows), positions L2 and L3 must be set to 0.

While if the piece is to rest on the outside of the sash or on the inside of the frame (Red Arrows),
positions L2 and L3 must be set by entering the traverse sections.

[Link] Type of anuba-hinge to be worked (Male/female)

This selection box is used to determine whether a male anuba-hinge

(associated with the frame) or a female anuba-hinge (associated with the
sash) is to be worked.

[Link] Disable bit protection

Check this box to disable the option to control interference between the boring bit and the bracket
pressers while the anuba-hinge is being worked.

This function allows the execution of work particularly close to the mechanical parts of the machine,
increasing work flexibility; however care must be taken during the work phases to prevent
mechanical collisions between the boring bit and the clamping brackets.

THIS BOX SHOULD BE CHECKED ONLY IN THE CASE OF SPECIAL WORK

OPERATIONS.

Page 174
MW310 – Project Windows

8.9.7

8.10 LOUVER-BLIND PROGRAMMING

Louver-blinds are programmed within and at any point of the ISO Editor, by means of a special
program line.
To define a louver-blind machining, enter the programming menu, define a program, press "ENTER"
and then select "LOUVER BLINDS" from the ISO instruction scroll-list shown in Fig. 100.

Fig. 101

The louver-blind programming window will thus appear on the screen (Fig. 102); click on the arrow
key on the right of the "Type" box to display the drop-down menu shown in Fig. 101.

Fig. 102

Select an item and a window will open, containing the values and data concerning the selected louver-
blind.

The programming procedure is the same for all louver-blinds, differences are only found in the
values, on the right of the louver-blind programming window.

N.B. For the above reason, thorough programming explanations are provided only for "Simple"-
type louver-blinds, while only specific features are described for the other types.

Click on "ROUTING BIT”, within the main louver-blind programming menu, to enter mirroring
board programming. Data to be entered are: routing bit number, tilt (to be set to 0, in this case),
working face, electro-spindle rpm, and louver-blind type to execute.

The parameter editing procedures, for all the available louver-blind types, are described here-
following.

Page175
MW310 – Project Windows

8.10.1 “Simple” Type Louver Blinds

Fig. 102

The left side of the screen shown in Fig. , allows defining all the machinings required to create the
desired louver blind. It is also possible to enter the data concerning "Pocket" slat routings (Fig. 103),
“Clearance” (Fig. 104) and the routing bit used in “Router” machining (Fig. 105).

Here follow the dimension values for “SIMPLE” type louver-blinds:

L = Pocket length.
A = Pocket tilt angle
H = Distance between pocket start-point and workpiece edge.
P = Pitch
Z = Pocket depth.
Linear routing height = It defines at what distance from the workpiece edge the linear routing
is to be executed, if any.

The top center of the screen shown in Fig.103, features a graphical explanation of the values described
here above.

Page 176
MW310 – Project Windows

Fig. 103

Here follows, again, a list of parameters concerning the tool and the machining direction.

Router No. = Number of the tool to be used

Tilt = Pocket tilting angle.
Face = It defines the face where machining has to be executed
Rpm. = It defines the number of revolutions of the router during machining
Diameter = It defines the tool diameter

Vertical Alignment = Check this box to reverse the slats.

Fig. 104

Here follows, again, a list of parameters concerning the tool and the machining direction.

Bottom clearance = clearance dimension at mirroring bottom.

Top clearance = clearance dimension at mirroring top.
Linear clearance = Linear routing clearance dimension.

Page177
MW310 – Project Windows

8.10.2 “Double” Type Louver Blinds

Fig. 105

The screen shown in Fig. 106, displays data concerning double-type louver blinds, which are similar
to simple-type ones. Data in the first group are in fact identical and assume the same meaning.

Here follow the dimension values for “DOUBLE” type louver-blinds”:

L = Pocket length.
A = Pocket tilt angle
H = Distance between pocket start-point and workpiece edge.
P = Pitch
Z = Pocket depth.
Linear routing height = It defines at what distance from the workpiece edge the linear routing
is to be executed, if any.

Disabling = It disables or enables routing at slat center.

Offset 1 = It defines routing start-point displacement.
Offset 2 = It defines routing end-point displacement.
Speed = It defines the routing speed.

The top center of the screen shown in Fig. 106, features a graphical explanation of the values
described here above.

Page 178
MW310 – Project Windows

8.10.3 “Through-Passing” Louver Blinds

Fig. 106

The screen shown in Fig. 106, displays data concerning through-passing type louver blinds, which are
similar to simple-type ones. Data in the first group are in fact identical and assume the same meaning.

Here follow the dimension values for “THROUGH-PASSING” type louver-blinds:

A = Pocket tilt angle

H = Distance between pocket start-point and workpiece edge.
P = Pitch
Z = Pocket depth.
Linear routing height = It defines at what distance from the workpiece edge the linear routing
is to be executed, if any.

ZF = Internal routing depth

LF = Internal routing width

The top center of the screen shown in Fig. 107, features a graphical explanation of the values
described here above.

Page179
MW310 – Project Windows

8.10.4 “Half-Passing” Louver Blinds

Fig. 108

The screen shown in Fig. 108, displays data concerning half-passing louver blinds, which are similar
to simple-type ones. Data in the first group are in fact identical and assume the same meaning.

Here follow the dimension values for “HALF-PASSING” type louver-blinds:

A = Pocket tilt angle

H = Distance between pocket start-point and workpiece edge.
P = Pitch
Z = Pocket depth.
Linear routing height = It defines at what distance from the workpiece edge the linear routing
is to be executed, if any.

H1 = It identifies the jamb part not being machined.

HF = Height for executing the internal routing.
ZF = Internal routing depth.
LF = Internal routing width.

The top center of the screen shown in Fig. 108, features a graphical explanation of the values
described here above.

Page 180
MW310 – Project Windows

8.10.5 “Antique” Type Louver Blinds

Fig. 109

The screen shown in Fig. 109, displays data concerning antique-type louver blinds, which are similar
to simple-type ones. Data in the first group are in fact identical and assume the same meaning.

Here follow the dimension values for “ANTIQUE” type louver-blinds “antique”:

L = Pocket length.
A = Pocket tilt angle
H = Distance between pocket start-point and workpiece edge.
P = Pitch
Z = Pocket depth.
Linear routing height = It defines at what distance from the workpiece edge the linear routing
is to be executed, if any.

L1 = It defines the pocket thickness

The top center of the screen shown in Fig. 109, features a graphical explanation of the values
described here above.

Page181
MW310 – Project Windows

8.10.6 Creating a louver-blind program

Double-click on the screen left-side fields to display the list of all possible machinings (Fig. 110).

Fig. 110

[Link] Louver-blind routed section of variable length

“Fresa Lung. Var. Lav”
This command adds a slat routing line by defining a louver-blind routed section with the
following features.

If the machining includes at least one variable clear span, the pitch between two spans will
be fixed and the NC will determine the number of slats in the mirroring. The last slat will
either be inserted or not, depending upon whether it is overlapped by the following
machining, or not; if it is, it won't be executed (thus increasing the “Lmin” variable span
width).

If the clear spans are all fixed, the slat pitch between two spans will be variable and the NC
will determine the number of slats in the mirroring. The last slat will either be inserted or
not, depending upon whether it is overlapped by the following machining, or not; if it is, it
will be executed (by reducing the pitch).

[Link] Louver-blind routed section with fixed pitch and nominal length L
“ Fresa L Lav”
This command adds a slat routing line by defining a mirroring section that:

keeps the set fixed pitch within the set "L" length. The pitch between two spans will be
fixed and the NC will determine the number of slats in the mirroring. The last slat will
either be inserted or not, depending upon the position of following machining start-point; if
it is beyond the centerline, it will be executed, otherwise it won't. In the last case, one of the
two spans will be moved to make up for possible differences.

[Link] Louver-blind routed section with variable pitch and fixed length L
“ Fresa PV L Lav”
This command adds a slat routing line by defining a mirroring section where:

The slat pitch between two spans will be variable and the NC will determine the number of
slats in the mirroring. The last slat will either be inserted or not, depending upon whether it
is overlapped by the following machining, or not; if it is, it will be executed (by reducing
the pitch).

Page 182
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Clear span with fixed length L

“Luce L”
This command will add a program line for a clear-span where length “L” will remain the
same for any possible type of machining.

[Link] Clear span with variable length and minimum value

“Luce Lmin”
This command will add a program line for a clear span with its length varying with the type
of machining; anyway, the span minimum dimension will never be smaller than the value
set within the “Lmin” parameter.

[Link] Subprogram call-up in fixed length L

“Prog L T S”
Standing “T” for routing bit and “S” for spindle speed; value L is sent to the subprogram
with variable #80, thus allowing the subprogram to be parametered with relation to the
mirroring dimensions
T and S may be programmed only if they are not already set within the subprogram. This
command will insert a machining, defined within an ISO program, in a fixed-length
mirroring. In other words the ISO program machining is added after the section set for
mirrorings.

[Link] Subprogram call in variable length L

“Prog Lvar T S”
Standing “T” for routing bit and “S” for spindle speed; value L is sent to the subprogram
with variable #80. A machining program may include several Lung. Var. routed sections, in
that case the available room will divided by the number of declared mirrorings. T and S
may be programmed only if they are not already set within the subprogram. This command
will insert a machining, defined within an ISO program, in a variable-length mirroring. See
Fig. 111.

Fig. 111

[Link] Subprogram call-up in the previous routed section

“Prog T S”
It consists in calling-up a subprogram with the same origin and length of the previous
program line. This allows executing programs with different routing bits T within the same
mirroring and value L is sent to the subprogram with variable #80. It is possible to program
several lines of this kind, in a row. T and S may be programmed only if they are not already
set within the subprogram. This command will insert a machining, defined within an ISO
program, inside the previous machining. There's no restraint on the type of machining,
which allows inserting an ISO machining within "Luce" (Clear span). See Fig. 112.

What has been said here above entails that programming a louver blind with the following
features:
• 100-mm fixed span.
• Fixed-length mirrored section with L = 500 mm and fixed pitch.
• Clear span with variable length and minimum value.
• Mirrored section with variable length.
• Program call-up within previous routed section.
• 130-mm fixed span.
will produce a louver blind such as the one shown in Fig. 112.
Fig. 112

Page183
MW310 – Project Windows

LAV may be: ON standard routed section

OFF with no slats
LIN Linear machining

If a program requiring PROG Lmin specification is being used, a "LUCE Lmin" should be
programmed within the preceding line, since the following PROG........command will use the "LUCE
Lmin" length.

N.B. A louver blind program should always include at least one [Link] machining, allowing error
recovery.

Page 184
MW310 – Project Windows

8.11 ARCH MACHININGS WITH MASTERWOOD CAD PROGRAM

8.11.1 Foreword

This chapter describes how to execute arches, jambs, traverses and sashes with machines having two
working areas.

With this respect, the program allows two different operating modes:

• One for machines with first-generation Masterwood CAD program for frame execution,
suitable for managing programs with the A-field mirror-copying feature, Par. 8.9.3

• and the other for machines with second-generation Masterwood CAD program for frame
execution, suitable for managing programs with all machine mirror-copying features,
Par.8.9.4.

N.B. The working direction - leftward or rightward - is defined within the CAD program.
Moreover, in case of two workpieces being executed in each working area, the CAD program will
work out the offset and the mirror-copy feature for each pair of workpieces, thus creating an
appropriate ISO program.

8.11.2 Stop configuration

The position and mirror-copy of the stops, as they are set on the machine faces, are defined here
following.
Fig. 113

[Link] Theoretical definition of working areas

On the basis of what is shown in Fig. we may say that:

• Workpieces that will be machined in areas “A”, “E”, “J” and “C”, “G”, “L” will be alike each
other.
• Workpieces that will be machined in areas “D”, “H”, “K” and “B”, “F”, “I” will be alike each
other.

Page185
MW310 – Project Windows

8.11.3 Machines with First-Generation Masterwood CAD Program

[Link] Jamb Machinings

Two programs have to be generated:

• "1_MONTANTE.PRG " - Allowing to execute one workpiece in each working area.
• “2_MONTANTI.PRG ” - “Allowing to execute two workpieces in each working area.

1. The first program “1_MONTANTE.PRG” shall execute one single piece per working area. In
this case workpieces may be executed in succession, see Fig. 114.
Fig. 114
"1_MONTANTE.PRG" Program

2. The second program, “2_MONTANTI.PRG ”, shall create two workpieces per working area: the
first workpiece shall be the same as the one executed with the "1_ [Link]" program,
while the second workpiece shall be the mirror-copy of the first one along the Y-axis and shall be
shifted by an OFFSET equaling the distance along the Y-axis between the stops in area (∆BAT).
Since the distance (∆BAT) along the Y-axis between the stops in area 1 and area 2 is -and must be-
the same, if program “2_MONTANTI.PRG ” is performed in areas “E” and “L”, it will be possible
to execute two workpieces in succession, see Fig. 115.
Fig. 115
Program “2_MONTANTI.PRG ”

N.B. You are suggested to assign the program a name identifying the machining to be
executed

Page 186
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Log Machinings

Two programs have to be generated:
The first program, "1_ [Link] ", shall execute one single piece per working area,
Fig. 116.
Fig. 116
“1_TRONCHETTO.PRG” Program

3. The second program, "2_ [Link] “, shall create two workpieces per working area: the first
workpiece shall be the same as the one executed with the "1_ [Link] " program, while the
second workpiece shall be the mirror-copy of the first one along the Y-axis and shall be shifted by an
OFFSET equaling the distance along the Y-axis between the stops in area 1 (∆BAT). Since the distance
(∆BAT) along the Y-axis between the stops in area 1 and area 2 is -and must be- the same, if program "2_
[Link] " is performed, it will be possible to execute two workpieces in succession, see Fig.
117.
Fig. 117
“2_TRONCHETTI.PRG ” Program

N.B. You are suggested to assign the program a name identifying the machining to be
executed.

Page187
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] ARCH Machinings

You should set two programs:

The first one, “ARCO_PENDOLO.PRG”, shall be executed in areas “J” and “L”. The program shall
be assigned the workpiece length, corresponding to the “LPz” value, which is given by doubling the
distance between the arc center reference point and the zero point along the X-axis on the working
area (VRIFz), as shown in Fig. 119.
In this case, the arc center reference point will be at the center of the half-area.

The second program, “ARCO_CI.PRG”, will be executed in area “L”. The program shall be
assigned the workpiece length, corresponding to the “LPci” value, which is given by doubling the
distance between the arc center reference point and the zero point along the X-axis on the working
area (VRIFci), as shown in Fig. 119.
In this case, the arc center reference point will be at the center of the machine maximum working
area.

Workpiece fixing:

The workpiece needs being locked by means of the special pressers. The central one is provided
with a reference that will have to be set in the identified half area position.

Fig. 118

CAPTIONS

Pressori a due movimenti= Two-movement pressers

Battuta riferimento centrale arco= Arc central reference stop
Dettaglio = detail
Riferimento panetto = supporting plate reference point

Page 188
MW310 – Project Windows
Fig. 119
“ ARCO_PENDOLO.PRG ” Program

LPz = workpiece length

VRIFz = Distance between the X-axis stop and the arc center reference point that is positioned in the
center of the half area.
Fig. 120
“ ARCO_CI.PRG ” Program

LPci = Workpiece length

VRIFz = Distance between the X-axis stop and the arc center reference point that is positioned in the
center of the machine working area.

Page189
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Sash Machinings

Sash machinings are performed in areas “A” and “L”, therefore if a pendulum machining has to be
executed, workpiece are to be fixed on the machine as shown in Fig. 121.
Fig. 121

The pendulum-machining mode allows executing a sash without anuba-hinges.

CAPTIONS

Profilo vetro= glass profile

Anta sx = left-hand sash
Anta dx = right-hand sash
Batt.= stop

Page 190
MW310 – Project Windows

8.11.4 Machines with Second-Generation Masterwood CAD Program

[Link] Preliminary Remarks

Considering that:

• the offset along the X-axis of stop “B_aux” is to equal the offset along the X-axis of stop
“A”, and that the offset along the X-axis of stop “C_aux” is to equal the offset along the X-
axis of stop “D”;

• then the distance (along the X- axis) between stops “A” and “B_aux” is to equal the
distance between stops “D” and “C_aux”.

Workpieces may then be machined following the procedure explained here below:

• By means of the CAD tools, a program is to be created considering the stop where the
program shall be executed. Moreover, if the machining is to be performed in area “C” - i.e.
against auxiliary stops “C_aux” - and in area "B" "B_aux", the program must shift the X-
axis origin by the distance existing between stops “A” and “B_aux”.

• Workpiece length must always be given a value corresponding to the distance between stops
“A” and “B_aux”.

The pendulum machining may therefore be executed with the following reference points:
“A” with the other one in “D”.
“A” with the other one in “C_aux”.
“B_aux” with the other one in “D”.
“B_aux” with the other one in “C_aux”.

[Link] Jamb Machinings

Jamb programming and machining is the same as with machines provided with first-generation
Masterwood CAD.

[Link] Log Machinings

Log programming and machining is the same as with machines provided with first-generation
Masterwood CAD program.

[Link] ARCH Machinings

Arch programming and machining is the same as with machines provided with first-generation
Masterwood CAD program.

Page191
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Sash Machinings

To use work areas A and C for sashes, the following syntax msut be used:

Ex. ISO: #IF BAT A

G92 U=0
……
……
…(CODE RELATIVE TO THE WORK TO BE EXECUTED)…
……
#ENDIF
#IF BAT C
G92 U=DX
……
……
…(CODE RELATIVE TO THE WORK TO BE EXECUTED)…
……
#ENDIF

Fig. 122

Profilo vetro = glass profile

Two programs have to be generated:

• “ANTA_SX.PRG ” - For executing a left-hand sash.
• “ANTA_DX.PRG ” - For executing a right-hand sash.

Workpiece length has to be assigned the value corresponding to the distance between stops “BAT
A” and “BAT_Baux” along the X-axis. Sash machinings will therefore be executed as follows:

• In order to execute a pendulum machining to produce a left-hand sash, program

“ANTA_SX.PRG ” is to be performed in areas “A” and “C”, see Fig. 122.

• In order to execute a pendulum machining to produce a right-hand sash, program

“ANTA_DX.PRG ” is to be performed in areas “D” and “B”, see Fig. 123.

• In order to execute a pendulum machining to produce a left-hand and a right-hand sash,

program “ANTA_SX.PRG ” is to be performed in area “A” and program
“ANTA_DX.PRG ” is to be performed in area “D”, see Fig. 124.

This procedure also allows executing sashes requiring anuba-hinges.

Page 192
MW310 – Project Windows
Fig. 123

Fig. 123

Fig. 124

ANTA DX = RIGHT-HAND SASH

ANTA SX = LEFT-HAND SASH

Page193
MW310 – Project Windows

8.12 LASER PROJECTOR DATA FORMAT

After entering the ISO Editor and opening the program, select the ISO code portion concerning the
machinings to project and comment them.
Now replace, within the commented text lines, the tool numbers with the abbreviation “LAS”. The
following program, for instance, draws a straight line:
(G120 K1
(G172 X100 Y30 TLAS S5 E1 J90 Code programming the projection
(G101 X300 F2
G120 K1
G172 X100 Y30 T25/1 S5 E1 J90 Code programming the projection
G101 X300 F2

The laser projector currently supports only the following ISO codes:

G192 Translating motion for the face origins

G172 Origin for fixed cycles, tool, tool speed, entry speed, routing bit tilt
G101 Linear interpolation
G102 Clockwise circular interpolation (end point, center)
G103 Counterclockwise circular interpolation

All other codes and functions, which are not currently supported by the laser projector, will be
implemented in future versions.

After editing and saving the program, the machining may be projected as described in Par. 4.9.

Page 194
MW310 – Project Windows

8.13 DATA FORMAT FOR INDEX HEADS TYPE 11/12/13

The right side of the tooling-up window (Fig. 45) features the list of all index head types installed on
the machine, see Fig. 126.
Left-click on one of the items to display a complete description of the selected head. The last line in
the description - head types 11/12/13 - features value “Ang.”, defining the working angle value
assigned to that head.

Index heads will only operate if the C-axis angle, which is set within the ISO program line reserved
for type 11/12/13 head machinings, matches the displayed working angle value.

Examples of ISO commands:

G178 X0 Y200 Z10 I0 K30 J30 F3 T45/16 S4

G188 X0 Y100 Z10 I0 J30 F2 T45/14 S5
In both the above examples, item “I” defines the C-axis angle value, which IS TO MATCH
the processed working angle value.

N.B. The angle value is determined with relation to working angle values set in Par.[Link].2
“Configuration of the index heads for machines without the C-axis (Type 11/12/13)”.

If the set value for item “I” does not match the working angle, errors will occur at ISO program
validation and editing.

Fig. 126

Page195
MW310 – Project Windows

9 SYSTEM ERROR CODES

Fig. 127

BOX DISPLAYING
SERIAL
COMMUNICATION
ERRORS

BOX DISPLAYING
SYSTEM ERRORS

The error codes are divided into 4 groups:

- System Errors: these codes are encoded and defined by a string consisting in three
groups of numbers, separated by a dot. (See par. 9.1) (i.e.,. 00.0000.0090 )

- Program Validation Errors (editing process): these errors are defined by a four-
digit number, followed by a text string describing what kind of problem has occurred.
(See par. 9.3)
(Eg.2003 - Unknown command)

- Syncro Errors: they are defined by a three-digit number, followed by a text string
describing what kind of problem has occurred. (See par. 9.4)
(Eg. 252 - Hold reset by "SPR" command)

- Communication Errors: they occur in case of serial transmission/reception

problems. (See par.9.5)

Page 196
MW310 – Project Windows

9.1 SYSTEM ERROR CODES

They may be displayed, during execution, within a message such as: "BREAK PER ERRORE
N. 1.1.0001". They consist in 3 numbers, separated by dots, having the following meanings:

XX . YYY . ZZZZ

ERROR CODE

DEVICE NUMBER

DEVICE TYPE

DEVICE TYPE (XX): DEVICE NUMBER (YYY):

0 = EXECUTOR (Not relevant)

01 U-AXIS
02 V-AXIS
03 W-AXIS
04 S-AXIS (spindle)
1 = AXES 05 C-AXIS (U-V index axis)
06 J-AXIS (Anuba-hinge tilt)
07 H-AXIS (anuba-hinge)
08 P-AXIS (anuba-hinge)
09 I-AXIS (routing-bit tilt)

2 = PLC (Not relevant)

3 = REMOTE I/Os Remote I/O station number

Note: if YYY is included between 1 and 8,

the error concerns the remote I/O
station number YYY.
If it is instead included between 101
and 112, the error concerns the
remote axis station number "YYY-
100".
i.e.,. 03,002,0001 -Error 1 for remote I/O station 2
i.e.,. 03,104,0001 -Error 1 for remote axis station 4

Page197
MW310 – Project Windows

4 = COMMAND EXECUTION ERRORS Remote axis station number

ON REMOTE AXIS STATION (Supporting plate), (1 to 12)

5 = REMOTE AXES Remote axis sequential number (1

to 48).
i.e.,. 05,023,0012
Given that each supporting plate features 4 axes,
"23" stands for the third axis of the sixth supporting
plate, hence:

Error 0012 for the 3rd axis of the sixth supporting

plate

6 = REMOTE I/O Remote axes sequential numbering (from 1 to 255).

(CANopen Errors)

Page 198
MW310 – Project Windows

9.1.1 Executor (Device Type = 0) (ZZZZ)-

1 Unknown command.
2 Non-implemented command.
3 Command not allowed for immediate execution.
4 Command not allowed for program execution.
5 Program not available.
6 I-axis not present.
7 Repeated axis.
8 Non-reset axis.
9 Axis value off-limit.
10 Axis positioning.
11 DIGITAL I/O (input/output) number not allowed. (Check No of clamps enabled)
12 DIGITALE I/O number repeated.
13 JOG analogical output value not acceptable.
14 Speed value not acceptable.
15 Acceleration value not acceptable.
16 Command not allowed for in interpolation.
17 Axis not enabled for interpolation.
18 Executor program not finishing with END item.
19 Program already open.
20 Value for the first axis out of linear interpolation limit.
21 Value for the second axis out of linear interpolation limit:
22 Value for the third axis out of linear interpolation limit.
24 Radius of the first axis not allowed in circular interpolation.
25 Radius of the second axis not allowed in circular interpolation.
26 Working angle too wide in circular interpolation.
27 Value for the first axis out of circular interpolation limit.
28 Value for the second axis out of circular interpolation limit.
29 Value for the third axis out of circular interpolation limit.
30 Variation of Z value not allowed in circular interpolation.
31 Non-linear axis in interpolation.
32 Non-polar axis in interpolation tangency.
33 Too many polar axes in interpolation tangency.
34 Value of the polar axis out of interpolation limit.
35 Program with wrong checksum.
36 Program may not be deleted (LNC).
37 Wrong variable name.
38 Interpolator busy.
39 Interpolator NOT enabled.
40 Direct command to axis in interpolation or slave axis.
41 Command may not be executed by master axis.
42 Slave axis not allowed.
43 Slave axis active.
44 Error in master/slave ratio.
45 Master axis missing (Master/Slave circle closed).
46 Scale factor not acceptable.
47 Scale axis value not acceptable.
48 Command may not be executed by scale axis.
49 Flight value acquisition not initialized.
50 Flight value not available.
51 Command not allowed in interpolation search.
52 DAC number not allowed (Axis present).
53 Synchronous axis.
54 Program execution stop timeout.
55 Number of Rotated Axis not allowed.
56 Command may not be executed on a rotated axis.
57 Axis NOT rotated in interpolation.
58 Inconsistent executors' offset.
59 Interpolating axis not being kept.

Page199
MW310 – Project Windows
90 Emergency button pressed.
91 Stop held down or cell activation (if installed).
92 Overtemperature
93 Interpolator error.
94 Wrong machine parameters.
95 Machine parameters checksum error.
96 Remote I/Os not available
99 ALL_AXIS function not implemented

9.1.2 Axes (Device Type = 1) (ZZZZ)-

1 Axes switches not ready.
2 I-Axis against upper emergency limit switch.
3 I-Axis against lower emergency limit switch.
4 The max. chase error allowed has been exceeded.
5 The maximum DAC zero offset compensation allowed has been exceeded.
6 Axis against software limit switch.
10 Max. routing chase error exceeded.
11 Tolerance axis timeout.
12 Off-limit axis positioning. Check the signs and values for software limit-switches.
13 Axis value overflow.
14 Max out-of-line value for master/slave exceeded.
15 Alarm: flight value input switching.

20 Axis off interpolation limit.

9.1.3 Plc (Device Type = 2) (ZZZZ)-

1000 U-Axis against limit switch.
1001 V-Axis against limit switch.
1002 W-Axis against limit switch.
1003 IF_VEL_RAGG has gone down during execution.
1004 TOOL IN AND PISTON UP check error. Check Time 40 and Time 53 values and eventually
increase them.
1005 Check error for routing bit assembled with tool still on. Check time 40
1006 General vacuum check error.
1007 Field A vacuum check error.
1008 Field D vacuum check error.
1009 Saw working direction NOT correct.
1010 Drill micro-switch NOT backward or screw-driver forward.
1011 Oil level not enough.
1012 Face A inlet inside down with program being executing in A.
1013 Face A inlet stopped down for program being executed in A.
1014 Face D inlet inside down with program being executed in D.
1015 Face D inlet stopped down for program being executed in D.
1016 Field B vacuum check error.
1017 Field C vacuum check error.
1018 AREA 1 pressure control.
1019 AREA 2 pressure control.
1020 Tool presence with T.C. being RESET.
1021 Workpiece missing in X/Y sensing.
1022 Auxiliary faces NOT positioned.
1023 Drawrod 1 OK down after 5 tries, T.C. 4.
1024 Drawrod 2 OK down after 5 tries, T.C. 4.
1025 Error for clamps forward in T.C. 1, before reset.
1026 Error for clamps forward in T.C. 2, before reset.
1027 Error for clamps up in I.C. 3, before reset.
1028 Error for strap inlet down during execution.
1029 Hold Error with axes in tolerance.
1030 Pin overloaded during reset.
1031 Workpiece not at the stop within TIME42.

Page 200
MW310 – Project Windows
1032 Loader bar on extra-stroke micro-switch.
1033 Pin not engaged within 7 seconds. (OBLIGATION TO REPEAT RESET)
1034 Pin up during bar movement.
1035 IF_RALLEDX or IF_RALLESX or IF_PEZZOENT or IF_PEZZOUSC up during bar
movement.
1036 Bar moved manually by means of the selectors, without first resetting it.
1037 Bar not positioned when switching from loader OFF to loader ON.
1038 Sensing error
1039 Aggregated tools down during manual workpiece unloading.
1040 Jogger not back during manual workpiece unloading
1041 Drawrod 3 OK down after 5 tries, T.C. 4.
1042 Check wrong position on T.C. 6
1043 Check wrong position on T.C. 7 Drivers' failure or wire cutout
1044 Check wrong position on T.C. 8
1045 Clamp down during drum-T.C. 6 rotation.
1046 Clamp not down in drum-type T.C. 7 This is probably due to the sensor needing
readjustment or not being thoroughly sensitive
1047 Clamp down during drum-T.C. 8 rotation.
1048 T.C.7 called-up during execution (M16)
1049 T.C.8 called-up during execution (M16)
1050 Head boring downwards while spindle is tilting
1051 I-Axis against limit switch.
1052 Check wrong position on T.C. 9
1053 Clamp carriage not at rest during drum-type T.C. 9 rotation
1054 Tool changer 9 call-up during changing procedure (M16)
1055 NC error with routing bit on CLOCKWISE clamp and T.C. 9 tool still on
1056 NC error with routing bit on COUNTERCLOCKWISE clamp and T.C. 9 tool still on. 9
1057 Tripped-off barrier
1058 Machine busy (one or more loader cells are up)
1059 Timeout for 7 seconds, drawrod ok in t.c. with spindle 1 Colombo-type
1060 Timeout for 7 seconds, drawrod ok in t.c. with spindle 2 Colombo-type
1061 Timeout for 7 seconds, drawrod ok in t.c. with spindle 3 Colombo-type
1062 Manual non-EC T.C. operation confirmed without mounting the tool
1063 Manual non-EC T.C. operation confirmed without disassembling the tool
1064 Parking value for U-axis, area 1, beyond machine center line, for manual non-EC T.C..
1065 Parking value for the U-axis, area 2, before machine center line, for manual non-EC T.C.

15xx Input TIMEOUT error ( 7 sec. ), 1500 + input no.

TIMEOUT error encoding :
2.1.1510 -> Input 10 TIMEPUT
->Input 67 TIMEOUT
2010 Input timeout set not up. One input has been set to 254 instead of 255
2011 Input timeout set not down. One input has been set to 255 instead of 254

IF EITHER ERROR 2011 OR 2010 OCCURS, THE INPUT DETERMINING IT MAY

BE FOUND OUT BY MEANS OF THE PLCEDI PROGRAM, AS DESCRIBED IN
PAR.[Link].4.

Page201
MW310 – Project Windows

9.1.4 Remote I/Os (Device Type = 3) (ZZZZ)-

1 Unsuccessful synchronization with one station
2 Station with fewer outputs than required
3 Station with fewer inputs than required
4 Error during I/O exchange with specified station
5 Not enough time for I/O updating
6 Operation problem signal from specified station
7 Synchronization aborted due to timeout (irrelevant station number).

101 Station number too great (>8)

102 I/O number too great
103 No configuration
104 Required service not executed: synchronization on
105 Required service not executed: slaves not active
106 Required service not executed: I/O exchange on
150 Remote I/Os not available.

[Link] Station errors (Profibus Backoff)

If the BECKHOFF remote I/O modules are available, they will allow determining the cause of
possible hardware problems, by interpreting the flashes being produced by the led indicators of the
station where the error occurred, as described here-following.

If an error occurs on the profibus remote menu, in fact, it will be signaled by "I/O ERR" led-light
blinking sequences on the remote module.
Blink encoding:

If Led lights “I/Os ERR” keep on blinking very quickly, there's an electrical wiring problem with the
last station module, working as a stopper.

fast blinking for approx. 2 seconds = It signals that a menu error occurred.
First group of slow blinks = It identifies the error code.
Second group of slow blinks = It identifies the error type.

First group Second group of blinks

1 blink 0 blinks = Eeprom checksum error.

1 blink = I/O line buffer overflow.
2 blinks = Unknown data type.

2 blinks Programmed Configuration

0 blinks = invalid table entry/bus coupler.
n blinks (n > 0) = invalid table comparison (terminal n)

3 blinks 0 blinks = Terminal bus command error.

4 blinks 0 blinks = Terminal bus command error

n blinks = Rupture point after terminal n (0: coupler)

5 blinks n blinks = Terminal bus error during register

communication with terminal n.

6 blinks 0 blinks = Not enough DP-Cfg_data receiver

p blinks (p > 0) = Invalid DP-Cfg_data byte

Page 202
MW310 – Project Windows

9.1.5 Errors for executing commands on remote axis station

(Device type = 4) (ZZZZ)-

14 Wrong parameters
15 Workstation in local mode (Axes may not be moved by remote control)

9.1.6 Remote axes (Device type = 5) (ZZZZ)-

1 Axis switch not ready.

2 Axis against upper emergency limit switch.
3 Axis against lower emergency limit switch.
4 Max chase error exceeded.
5 Zero DAC max offset compensation exceeded.
6 Axis against software limit switch.

10 Max routing chase error exceeded.

11 Tolerance axis timeout.
12 Off-limit axis positioning.
13 Axis value overflow.
14 Max out-of-line value for master/slave exceeded.
15 Alarm for input flight value switching.
16 Overcurrent on axis XX alarm (Axis XX is assigned a different DAC than 0 but cannot
move, maybe due to some hindrance).

20 Axis off interpolation limit.

9.1.7 Station errors (CANBus) (Device type=6) (ZZZZ)-

EXPLANATORY NOTES ON CANOPEN ERRORS

CANopen errors were introduced starting with Syncro version 5.30-R1 and are significant only for
codes SY421011 and SY431011.
These are errors which determine the interruption of CANopen communication for all the nodes
present.

The error is formed as follows:

[Link]

where: 06 identifies the error class associated with CANopen.

xx identifies the element which has caused the error or on which the error occurs (a node or a branch). If it
is null it has no meaning.
N.B. When the element is a node, a value between 1 and 8 refers to an I/O digital node, while a value
between 17 and 32 identifies a remote display. (Remember that it is possible to set an address of between 1
and 16 on the displays, but internally an offset of 16 is added to that value, therefore node 17 corresponds to
display 1, and so on).

yyyy identifies the error type, using a numeric code.

ATTENTION: these errors are only signalled for I/O digital nodes (xx = 1..8). To the contrary, display
node problems do not cause emergencies, but are treated as warnings. If a display node exits from
communication, it is not aborted; the master continues to periodically monitor the display and if it
recovers, the master reconnects it. In the meantime, the other nodes continue to communicate normally.

Page203
MW310 – Project Windows

The CANopen errors can be divided into three main classes

1. Network functioning CANopen errors (from 0001 to 0016).

2. Configuration errors on the master (from 101 to 125).
3. Hardware or configuration errors on the Syncro (from 150).

There is a list of yyyy error codes below with several observations, for the purposes of clarifying the
meaning.

[Link] CANopen network functioning errors

0001 Node xx not found.

When the CANopen bus starts, the master interrogates all the configured nodes to verify its
presence. If a node does not respond, and it is not a matter of display, the master blocks all
communications and signals this error.
There are a variety of possible causes, below are the most common:
– The baud rate of the node is different from the one called for on that branch.
– The branch terminator has not been correctly inserted
– An incorrect address has been set on the node
– The node has not been connected.
– The node is not powered.
– The branch is interrupted.

0002 Node xx has an insufficient number of outputs.

When the CANopen bus starts, the master checks that, on each configured node, there is a
number of output bytes greater than or equal to the number obtained by the machine parameters,
to the contrary it signals this error.
Usually this type of error is caused with modular nodes with an insufficient number of outputs
installed.

0003 Node xx has an insufficient number of inputs.

When the CANopen bus starts, the master checks that, on each configured node, there is a
number of input bytes greater than or equal to the number obtained by the machine parameters,
to the contrary it signals this error.
Usually this type of error is caused with modular nodes with an insufficient number of outputs
installed.

0004 Node xx has stopped responding during data exchange.

Node xx has suddenly stopped responding to the master once CANopen communication had
regularly started and had been working for a given time.
The causes may be:
– The node has had a hardware problem fatal for communication.
– The branch was interrupted during functioning.
– Power has been cut to the node.

0005 Not used

0006 Node xx has signalled an emergency.

The master signals this error when the node xx signals a malfunction which prevents it from
continuing to communicate.

Page 204
MW310 – Project Windows
It is possible to obtain the error code signalled by the node using the CANopen diagnostics
program. This code makes it possible to derive the cause of the malfunction which can be
interpreted with the help of the documentation provided by the node manufacturer.
Typically, they are signalled as follows:
– Hardware errors on node (internal bus interrupted, etc.)
– Serious communication errors (too many incorrect messages, the node cannot process all
the received messages, etc.

0007-0011 Not used

0012 The master has gone in BUS-OFF: communication aborted (xx insignificant).

In the CANopen standard, BUS-OFF defines a state in which the error rate on the line is so high
that in the long run it prevents communications.

13 Not used.

0014 Overrun in reception: the master cannot process the messages received (xx not significant).

More messages that the master is reading arrive on its reception buffers, therefore many are
overwritten by the successive messages. In this case, it makes no sense to continue, therefore the
master aborts the communication and signals this error.
Generally this error never occurs, unless the master has serious internal problems.

0015 Two or more nodes on different branches have the same xx address.

Even if articulated on several branches with different communication speeds, the CANopen
network managed by the master is considered as a single network. Within the network, the only
way of distinguishing one node from another is the CANopen address. Therefore nodes on
different branches must not be given the same address. This is the disadvantage of being able to
connect each node, without distinction, to any branch.

0016 Node xx has exited from the operational state unexpectedly.

For correct CANopen communication with a node, the node must be in a state which the
CANopen standard defines operational. Only when in this state can the node accept to change its
outputs upon a command from the master. At the end of initialisation, it is the master that
commands all the nodes to become operational.
During the exchange, the master periodically queries each node regarding its internal state and
checks that it is correct. If it finds a node out of this state, it signals this error and aborts the
communication.
When a node has an internal error, the master may detect that it has exited the operational state
before receiving the emergency signal. In this case, error 16 is actually a masked error 6.

[Link] Configuration errors on the master

These errors are derived from incorrect commands sent to the master by Syncro. All with the
exception of 125 are detected upstream of the Syncro, which correctly signals an error. They
are given only for reference, but should never occur, with the exception of 125.

0101 xx is not a valid node address.

The address must be between 1 and 64, inclusive.

0102 Too many I/O have been declared

Page205
MW310 – Project Windows

0103 Current configuration not valid: impossible to initiate exchange.

0104 Impossible to execute the command: CANopen initialisation in progress.

0105 Impossible to execute the command: no node active.

0106 Impossible to execute the command: I/O exchange in progress.

0107 Number of nodes to be configured not allowed.

It is not possible to configure more than 64 nodes.

0108 Node xx repeated in configuration

0109 General syntax error

0110 Too many values on display node xx.

0111 Type of refresh not valid on node xx.

0112 The outputs on node xx exceed the maximum limit which can be managed.

0113 The inputs on node xx exceed the maximum limit which can be managed.

0114 Reference to general output off limits on display node xx.

0115 Reference to generic input off limits on display node xx.

0116 Too many nodes to be managed in real time.

0117 Too many nodes to be managed in slack time.

0118 Too many configured nodes.

0119 Resource not allowed on node xx.

0120 Too many I/O on BLT.

0121 Too many outputs on BLT.

0122 Too many inputs on BLT.

0123 Index of digital output bytes greater than limit on node xx.

Page 206
MW310 – Project Windows

0124 Index of digital input bytes greater than limit on node xx.

0125 xx is not a correct value for the branch baud rate.

This is the only error in this class that is not detected upstream of the Syncro. In this case check
that the content of the VP.1619 variable is correct.

[Link] Hardware or configuration errors on the Syncro

0150 CANopen card requested but not found.

This error indicates that at least one CANopen node (I/O digital or display) or an I/O BLT has
been configured in the Syncro parameters, therefore the presence of the CANopen card is
required, but has not been detected.

0151 Timeout expired while the Syncro waited for the CANopen card to start.
If the Syncro detects the CANopen card, it performs several operations necessary for its
initialisation and waits for a reply. If the timeout period expires this error is signaled.

0152 The CANopen card does not respond correctly to the request for data exchange.
Data exchange via CANopen is started by an interruption that the CPU card sends to the
CANopen card. When the CANopen card recognises the interruption, it is signalled to the CPU
card. The failed signal causes this error to be signalled.
It is generally caused by hardware problems on the external BUS.

0153 The xx node number specified in the parameters is incorrect.

The node address specified in the syncro parameters must be between 1 and 8 for the I/O digital
nodes and between 1 and 16 for the display nodes.

0154 Too many BLT input bytes.

This error has the same meaning as error 122, and occurs in its place since it is signalled by the
Syncro, which intercepts its cause upstream.
The maximum number of BLT input bytes which can be managed is 10.

0155 Too many BLT output bytes.

This error has the same meaning as error 121, and occurs in its place since it is signalled by the
Syncro, which intercepts its cause upstream.
The maximum number of BLT output bytes which can be managed is 10.

0156 The CANopen exchange has been aborted by the ~~SF0 command monitor.

0255 Too many I/O in total

This error is signalled when the total number of the inputs or the outputs, summing together local
and remote, exceeds the limit of 192.

Page207
MW310 – Project Windows

9.2 STATUS SIGNALS

P2C Two programs declared (A-B or C-D) with machine operating on two fields.
PCS Number of workpieces to machine equals zero.
PPL Wrong long workpiece program declaration.
PRG No program-to-execute has been declared.
BLK Clamping means not declared

9.3 PROGRAM VALIDATION ERRORS (EDITING PROCESS) -

These errors concern programs and their validation. They may occur when a program is
automatically called-up and then executed or when program validation is performed by
pressing

These kinds of errors are defined by a four-digit number, followed by a text string describing what
kind of problem has occurred.

9.3.1 Editing Process Error Codes

2002 Not compatible with set command.
2003 Unknown command.

2006 Aligned tips.

2007 Superimposed tips.

2013 Radius tolerance in circular interpolation.

2014 Both the radius and center co-ordinates are missing.
2016 Complete circle, given its start-point and radius.
2017 Superimposed or Aligned Co-ordinates.
2020 Missing parameters.
2021 No G40 between G41 and G42.
2022 Attempt at boring with a routing bit at slanting paths.
2023 Too many segments have been created in ellipse calculation.

2100 Program reading error.

2101 Tool-table reading error.
2102 Error if on the same G line, the second G line is different from G90, G91, G41, G422, G40
(useless).
2103 Maximum number of slave routing bits in G172 exceeded.
2104 G101 missing after G41, G42 or G40.
2105 G101 missing on the same line as G41, G42 or G40.
2106 Maximum number of nested subprograms exceeded.
2107 Length missing for face set in G117,G118,G119.
2108 Transfert program enabling without loader.

2110 U-Axis off limit.

2111 V-Axis off limit.
2112 W-Axis off limit.
2113 C-Axis off limit.
2114 H-Axis off limit.
2115 J-Axis off limit.
2116 P-Axis off limit.

2120 Declared routing-bit number not existing.

2121 Declared routing bit with F-axis not existing.
2122 Declared routing bit with I-axis not existing.
2123 Wrong routing-bit number declared.

Page 208
MW310 – Project Windows
2124 Face and routing-bit tilt not compatible: a routing bit with J (or I) tilt may only work on faces
<= J+45° and >= J-45°.
2125 Inconsistent tool rotating direction.
2126 Max. tool rotation speed exceeded.
2127 Routing-bit parameter VROT_10V == 0.

2201 Syntax error.

2202 Division by zero.
2203 Root of a negative number.
2204 Missing bracket.
2205 Function domain error.
2206 Wrong parameter number.
2221 Nested IF / WHILE.
2222 ENDIF without IF.
2223 ELSE without IF.
2224 WEND without WHILE.
2225 Endless WHILE/WEND cycle.

2301 ISO file already existing.

2302 Missing entities.
2303 Missing machinings or long routed workpieces.
2304 PRG File opening error.
2305 Hole optimization error 1.
2306 Hole optimization error 2.
2307 Hole optimization error 3.
2308 Hole optimization error 4.
2309 Vertical-boring tool missing.
2310 Horizontal-boring tool missing.
2311 GRF file not found.
2312 GRF file reading error.
2313 GRF file tool table missing.
2314 Auxiliary stop offset with positive value (on the right of the reference stop).
2315 Long workpiece that may not be executed with following offsets (long workpiece execution).
2316 Interactive pre-editor internal error (long workpiece execution).
2317 Profile division calculation error (long workpiece execution).
2318 Maximum number of entities exceeded.

2330 [Link] file not found.]

2340 Error in TED file editing process.]

2341 Error in Master System batch editing process .]

2401 Junction radius too narrow.

2402 Line–to-arch junction radius too long.
2403 Junction radius too wide.
2404 Attempt at blending shorter paths than the junction radius (at the inlet).
2405 Attempt at blending shorter paths than the junction radius (at the outlet).
2406 Attempt at blending two parallel straight lines.
2407 Junction radius not greater than 0.
2410 G05/G06 without previous tangency.

2502 Compensation radius not valid.

2503 Attempt at exiting compensation without entering.
2504 Incomplete compensation: there are only the inlet and the outlet.
2505 Compensation not allowed, segments too short.
2506 Compensation not allowed, starting on short segment.
2507 Parameter Q entered before G40

2601 Internal error in LINE-TO-LINE intersection.

2602 Internal error in LINE-TO-ARC intersection.
2609 Angle to narrow in COMPENSATION.
2610 Attempt at blending with an angle too narrow with relation to the radius.

Page209
MW310 – Project Windows
2611 Compensation on path with the angle being too narrow with relation to the angle of
compensation.

2612 Compensation on an ARC with smaller radius than the compensation radius.
2619 NULL radius in CARTESIAN-TO - POLAR conversion.
2621 Face change during compensation:

2800 Null pitch in louver-blind programming.

2801 Error in louver-blind programming: too many Lmins or Lvar number different than 1.
2802 Error in louver-blind programming calculation.
2803 Wrong angle in through-passing or half-passing louver-blinds: it must be 0 <= angle <= 90.
2804 Error in louver-blind editing: file for intermediate program could not be opened.

2810 Null male center-to-center distance.

2811 Out-of-range length in anuba-hinge type 4.
2812 Wrong number of programmed anuba-hinges.
2813 Minimum center-to-center distance exceeded (see parameter INTMIN).
2814 Type of anuba-hinge not supported.
2815 Anuba-hinge profile not defined.
2816 Wrong program heading data.

2817 Anuba-hinge program not allowed, only fields A and D or anuba-hinge program with
EN_ANUBA = 0.

2820 Traverse <= than correction

2821 Traverse > than machining.
2822 Mortise-chisel depth preset too small.
2823 Maximum number of adjacent chisel-mortises exceeded.
2824 Wrong face for mortise chisel

2830 Vacuum pads programmed with one only symmetric PRG.]

2831 Error due to the same supporting plates being assigned by different programs.]

2832 Vacuum pads programmed for full area on 2 intermediate areas.]

2833 Vacuum pads programmed in collision.]

2834 Asymmetrical vacuum-pad geometry.]
2835 Supporting plates programmed in collision.]
2836 Vacuum pads off limit.]
2837 Supporting plates off limit.]
2850 Current routing-bit diameter <= 0.
2851 Overlap used in figures >= routing-bit diameter or < 0.
2852 Error in Figure values in relation to Figure shape and routing-bit diameter.
2853 General error in figure compensation calculation.
2854 Figure not existing.

2860 G220 with A-axis disabled

2861 Non-defined face declared.
2862 Wrong face tilt, >= 0 and < 90°.
2864 Fixed head with inconsistent angle.

2900 Return command execution with no call-up.

2901 Subprogram not existing.
2902 Maximum number of nested subprograms exceeded.

2990 TX error with SYNCRO.

2991 RX error with SYNCRO.
2992 "COK" not received on the packet.
2993 Error in SBL program opening.

4001 Wrong tool type.

4002 T.C. spindle NOT allowed (1 - 3).
4003 Inconsistent pitch or multiple tool not aligned along the selected axis.

Page 210
MW310 – Project Windows
4004 T.C. tool NOT declared.
4005 T.C. tool NOT belonging to the spindle.
4006 Tools NOT belonging to the same type.
4007 Wrong T.C. magazine.
4008 Selected spindle busy.
4009 Rising and parking angle NOT allowed in T.C.7 or T.C.8.
4010 Number of controlled machinings smaller than 1.
4011 Distance between machinings not greater than 0.
4012 Symmetrical tool missing.
4013 Error on manual T.C. using head with the C-axis.
4014 Manual T.C. allowed only with [Link].
4015 Manual T.C. execution error with EC-type T.C.
4016 M60 execution error on EC-type manual T.C.

4025 Face NOT allowed.

4026 Angle NOT allowed.
4027 Speed NOT allowed.

4031 Double mirroring with multiple tool.

4032 Multiple tool not appropriate to the type of machining.
4033 Wrong symmetrical multiple head
4034 General error on tools.

4037 Route between two fields (S. F.).

4038 Indexed boring between two fields (S. F.)
4039 Offset set in G194 greater than working length.
4040 Tool change not allowed during long workpiece machining.

4050 I-axis NOT present.

4051 Tool length NOT appropriate.

4052 Tool diameter NOT appropriate.
4053 Sensing field NOT allowed.
4054 Collision with plates in X/Y sensing.
4055 Sensing error
4056 Sensor not tooled-up error.

Page211
MW310 – Project Windows

9.4 SYNCRO ERRORS

The following errors may as well occur during program check or execution, they are nonetheless
INTERNAL NC errors, concerning the SYNCOR system and the SBL language. If one of the
following errors occurs, please contact TECNOS, specifying your NC version and the program
producing the error.

200 UNKNOWN COMMAND

201 PROGRAM NOT EXISTING
202 NOT ENOUGH SPACE FOR THE INDEX.
203 NOT ENOUGH SPACE FOR PROGRAM BUFFER.
204 COMMAND STRING SYNTAX ERROR.
205 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION RADIUS TOLERANCE.
206 INTERPOLATION WITHOUT "MOV" FIRST.
207 WRONG PROGRAM NUMBER.
208 EXECUTOR MISSING.
209 EXECUTOR RUNNING AT PROGRAM SENDING.
210 OFF-LIMIT VALUE.
211 VARIABLE IN INTERPOLATION VALUE.
212 COMMAND NOT ACCEPTED.
213 RADIUS TOO GREAT IN CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION.
214 PROGRAM SENT WITH WRONG PARAMETER CHECKSUM.
215 Command not supported by remote axes (only JOG, OMO, ABM, MOV, WTQ, WAM and
MOR support remote axes).

216 WRONG STATION: A specified axis station is either not allowed (< 1 or > 12) or not
existing.
217 SYNCRO SYNTAX: syntax error detected by the Syncro (the command nibble is different
than 3, 4 or 5).
218 PROFIBUS CLEARANCE: profibus communication clearance during parameter transfer.
219 WRONG PARAMETER VALUE: a parameter has been given a wrong value; such
parameter is identified by the page and command numbers, which are specified right after the
string containing the error. i.e.,: “ERR 219 1 4” means that parameter number 4 at page 1 has
a not acceptable value.

220 STATION SYNTAX: syntax error detected in the remote station.

250 EXECUTOR BUSY FOR DIRECT COMMAND.

251 EXECUTOR ERROR DURING CIRC. BUFFER EXECUTION
252 HOLD RESET BY “SPR” COMMAND.

9.5 COMMUNICATION ERRORS -

These errors concern the serial communication between processor A and processor B.
Only one serial communication error has been encoded so far, this is defined by "ERROR3"
message, which informs the operator that, after several failed attempts, MW310 finally aborted
serial communication. Restart the NC to reestablish serial communication.

Page 212
MW310 – Project Windows

9.6 MEANING OF THE SHORT MESSAGES IN THE STATUS / PHASE

BOX

9.6.1 "Status" Box

RES Reset not performed.

PRG No program-to-execute has been declared.

BLK Workpiece not locked.

P2C Two programs declared (A-B or C-D) with machine operating on two fields.

PCS Number of workpieces to machine equals zero.

PPL Wrong long workpiece program declaration.

EXE Program being executed

9.6.2 "Phase" Box

RES Resetting.

CMP Program being edited.

OK Program editing completed with no error surveyed

ERR Error in program editing.

BL1 Lock waiting in area 1

BL2 Lock waiting in area 2
BL3 Lock waiting in area 3
BL4 Lock waiting in area 4

TAP Belt busy

SEL1 Vacuum releasing selector enabled in area 1

SEL2 Vacuum releasing selector enabled in area 2

LIN (colored in green) Line ready

LIN (colored in red) Line not ready

WAI Line waiting for command from server.

Page213
MW310 – Project Windows

10 MASTERWORK
10.1 FOREWORD
MasterWork is a complete integrated product that comprises as well CAD as CAM programs and
an Interactive system featuring Visual/Geometrical programming. It is supplied as a designing aid
added to the MW310 application program. It aims at making easier the creation of machinings to
execute on a wooden plate. This programming may be done either directly using the tools available
in the CAD program or importing graphical elements from other application programs (such as
AutoCAD, e.g.) without having to explicitly use ISO codes.
In developing this project some of the software features were expressly chosen with the primary aim
of making the program user-friendlier.
First of all, since it features the possibility to import projects directly from external CAD systems,
MasterWork was not overloaded with too many graphical functions though it was provided with a
sufficient quantity of tools for profiles drawing and moving. Our main intent was to create an
instrument capable to convert geometric elements into machinings and to subsequently move and
manipulate them as desired, so that both the user’s interface and the utilization mode of the program
are definitely set on such target.
MasterWork runs on WINDOWS 95/98, NT 4.0 or upgraded version. This implies that:
• MasterWork my be run on any PC working on one of the above mentioned versions of
Microsoft WINDOWS, with no other choice implications for what concerns graphics, input
peripheral devices or else.
• MasterWork has a standard interface, which may be easily used by anyone being familiar
with its environment.
Finally, as already said above, MasterWork may be used only as an additional tool of the MW310
program. Therefore it is necessary to have version 2.15 or upgraded of such application program
installed on the PC.

10.1.1 MasterWork working areas

Though MasterWork is a unique integrated software package, it is actually made up of the

following working areas: CAD program, CAM program, Interactive program, Post-Processor
unit and ISO part program.

[Link] CAD program

It allows to create and modify drawing files and to import them in .DXF format.
Basic functions :
• line and polyline tracing
• arc and circle tracing
• radii, diameters, horizontal and vertical dimensioning.
• multiple selections and possibility to delete / move / rotate / scale the selected elements
• zoom, pan, snap, grid functions

Advanced functions:
• polyline modification
• polyline automatic construction
• snap (grip function) at elements

Page 214
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] CAM program

It allows drawing conversion from .DXF to .TLF format (i.e. Tecnos machining format) by
associating technological parameters with drawing elements. It also allows tool radius compensation
on open and closed profiles.

[Link] Interactive Program

It is used to create and eventually modify machining programs in the visual mode (.TLF format).
With the Interactive Program the following functions are performed:
• creation and modification of horizontal, vertical, slanting, aligned holes
• creation and modification of groove-cuts
• creation and modification of open and closed routing profiles on horizontal, vertical and
slanting working faces.
• machinings dimensioning with respect to the 4 workpiece edges and 2 axes
• automatic workpiece trimming
• manual nesting
• introduction of macros written in ISO language
• introduction of special figures (fitting grooves)
• creation of hollowed profiles
• introduction of ISO instructions

[Link] ISO Post Processor

It converts a project from the .TLF format into the Project MW310 machine specific ISO language.

[Link] ISO Program

Used for the text mode visualization of the automatically created machining program.

10.1.2 Minimum Hardware and Software Requirements

This software may be installed in PCs having the following minimum requirements:

• Intel CPU with a PENTIUM 200 Mhz Processor or above;

hard disk with a minimum 40 MB free space;
• VGA 800x600 video with 16 colors (65535 at least are suggested);
• a two button mouse, the third button, if existing, will not be used;
• 32 MB RAM;

WINDOWS 9x, WINDOWS NT 4.0 (or above) operating program must be previously installed in
the PC.

Page215
MW310 – Project Windows

10.2 USER’S INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

User must always have a consistent and homogeneous outlook on the machining program while
working at the project. Switching over from CAD to CAM or Interactive mode is a very easy
process involving a subtle change only, the only noticeable difference being the insertion or removal
of some commands aiming at freeing the user’s field of vision from currently useless functions.
Moreover the mouse cursor shows the user the current phase of the processed program (drawing,
selection, creation, modification). Selection is the default status, therefore when not creating or
modifying any object (only 2 cases in which selection is not admitted), it is possible to select any
machining and display its properties.

10.2.1 Main Window

As you enter the program, the main window is displayed on the screen. This window is divided into seven
different areas.

[Link] Working Area

The drawing or working area is a box on the drawing of the project limited by two rulers that indicate
the distance (or offset) between said box and the working surface origin (or zero point) and by two
SCROLL BARS that allow the user to shift the box in all the four directions (PAN function).

[Link].1 Dedicated Menu

A dedicated menu, opening with a click on

the right mouse button, is associated to the
working area and shows “short cuts” to
easily perform some frequently used
complex functions.

The first part of this dedicated menu

contains advanced modification functions
that apply to machinings programmed on the
vertical working face and usually reached by
means of the specific key in the commands
table (see specific chapter). The functions available in this first box are copy, move, rotate, delete
and scale. Therefore, when selecting one of these functions the advanced machinings box gets
opened in the lower part of the screen, thus supporting user’s work with the possibility to enter data
upon the keyboard. Other important functions are redraw workpiece (to recompute the aspect of
figures or ISO macros imported on workpiece), display (visualization on whole screen or optimized
in relation with the dimension of the area containing machinings) and modify (undo and redo
commands).

Page 216
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Toolbar and menu

The tool bar contains the most frequently used commands in file management (open, close, save,
delete elements) and the general modification of a project (undo and redo operations, delete
element). The same functions are also available on the tool bar, so they be commanded from the
keyboard too, as well as other additional commands related to the visualization mode and default
parameter setting, all very useful functions when creating new machinings.

[Link].1 Create new project

Select this command to start a new project: if the current project was modified a prompt asks
user if to save the modification. Then the whole project is reset, the values displayed are the default
ones and the panel drawn is “empty” so that user can create any geometrical element and machining
he wants.

[Link].2 Open project

This command allows user to recall a project previously saved on disk (with .TLF extension),
selecting both the drive and path to retrieve the project to load.

[Link].3 Save project

This command allows saving the current project on disk, in .TLF format. The file is identified
by the name chosen by the user, with .TLF extension. It is possible to select both the drive and path
to retrieve the project to save.

[Link].4 Import TLF file

This command allows importing a .TLF file into the currently open .TLF project. In this case
all geometrical elements and machinings are summed with those of the current project.

[Link].5 Create ISO program

Starts the ISO program editing process or compilation (i.e. its translation into ISO codes).
Upon completion of the ISO program compilation, user is asked whether he wants to display the
ISO file just created, and - if so - the relevant file is displayed in a special window. The ISO file may
not be modified from this window. A dialog box is opened that allows user to abort the compilation
process in case he wishes to, for instance when it would be particularly long.

[Link].6 Open DXF file with work parameters

This command allows loading a file in .DXF format that contains not only geometrical
elements but also the technological parameters related to the machinings associated to such
geometrical elements. This kind of files being provided with a set of default parameters that can be
set in a specific program (see General DXF default-setting), should some data be missing, such
default values would apply.

[Link].7 Open DXF file

Unlike the previous button, this command allows the importation of standard DXF files, as
they are normally saved by applications like AutoCAD. For more details, see the section below
concerning loading a DXF file.

[Link].8 Open TED file

Page217
MW310 – Project Windows

This command allows loading a file in .TED format that contains not only information on the
geometrical part of the drawing but also additional information on the machinings (the technological
parameters). Also see General TED default-setting.

[Link].9 Redraw

This function allows recomputing all the figures and ISO macros contained in the currently
open project. This proves useful when the file that contains a figure or an ISO macro was modified
through an external program (typically MW310) unless MasterWork has been closed. When
pressing this key you will also reload the tools table (that can be modified through an external
program too).

[Link].10 Delete

Deletes the currently selected machining, if any. Is no machining selected, a warning prompt
is displayed to inform user thereof.

[Link].11 Cancel (undo)

Undo function that annuls the actions previously taken: the last made action is the first one
cancelled.

[Link].12 Restore (redo)

Redo function that restores the actions previously cancelled: the last cancelled action is the
first one restored.

[Link].13 Print project

Recalls the box featuring the required data for project printing with the indication of the
printed TLF file name and of the currently visualized working face.

[Link].14 Program check and work times computation

This function allows to close the application and “to pass” the MW310 master program the
current project related data, for it to check it and compute the various work times.

[Link].15 Head configuration

Recalls the Edit Head utility used to tool-up the working head. So, should user notice while
working on a project that the tools table is uncompleted, he can go on tooling up the head without
having to close the MasterWork application and get back to the MW310 master program. To
subsequently read again all data related to the thus modified head please press previously explained
key Redraw.

[Link].16 Figure Editor

This button displays the figure editor which can normally be called up by MW310. This is
particularly useful when a figure has to be added or modified before inserting it.

[Link].17 Tilting faces Editor

This button displays the tilting faces editor which can normally be called up by MW310. This
is particularly useful when a tilting face has to be added or modified before inserting it.

Page 218
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].18 End of work

With this command you exit the MasterWork application. Since the later is usually opened
inside the MW310 master program, when exiting the MasterWork, the MW310 main menu page is
then displayed.

[Link].19 Working face selection

Will you click on the tongue on the right side of the current working face box (see figure aside)
you’ll display the list of the currently available working faces. Once you have selected one of them,
it is displayed on the working area while the relevant junction of the machinings’ tree is selected and
highlighted.

Page219
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Gripping (snapping) keys

This set of keys that reveals very useful in drawing, editing and modifying operations enforces the
mouse cursor to position itself on given points of a figure or of the whole drawing area.

- Grid: enables/disables grid visualization on the screen. The grid can be very useful
when creating very complex figures using only the mouse, because it draws on the
workpiece a network of dots the which interspace is set by the user (see General
default-setting chapter).
- Ortho: enables/disables the orthogonal motion mode of the cursor: when enabled,
the cursor can move only along the two Cartesian axes
- Snap: enables/disables the cursor snapping at the grid function (to display the grid,
press the above-described key): when enabled, the cursor can move only by n
pixel at a time, where number n is set by the user (see General default-setting
chapter).
- Grip: selection of cursor mode of gripping the elements. There are 5 possible
options:
1. gripping intersections between 2 segments
2. gripping the nearest vertex
3. gripping the projection of cursor’s position on the nearest element
4. gripping the center of an arc or of a circle
5. gripping the middle point of a line or an arc of circle

When the grip mode is enabled each time cursor moves near one of these specific points you’ll see a
colored circle displayed on the drawing, the which center is the exact gripping point. The gripping
tolerance depends on a parameter set by user (see General default-setting chapter).

Page 220
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Machinings’ tree

This simple and user-friendly instrument allows to see the whole

project at once, showing all together the various faces of the workpiece
to machine, the machinings to perform on each of them and the order
in which these will be executed by the tooling machine. With this tree
you can also access all the machinings programmed on the current
workpiece and select the workpiece face on which to work. At last, a
dedicated menu, which you can open with a click on the right mouse
button, allows you to copy or delete machinings displayed on the tree
as well as to enter ISO instructions between one machining and the
other (see relevant paragraph) while the drag and drop function allows
you to easily change the order in which the machinings are arranged.
The reader be reminded that to bring a machining found at the last
position sequence on a given working face it is necessary to drag it on the tree junction of said
working face. Moreover, it is not possible to move a machining from a working face to another.
The button in the left upper corner allows to vertically stretch the machinings’ tree, thus allowing, in
case there are more machinings on the workpiece, to display the largest possible number of them at
once, may be eliminating the vertical scroll-bar if necessary. The same function is available upon
pressure of the F8 key.

[Link] Data chart

User’s interface lower area is dedicated to a dialog box in which the data relevant to what has
currently been selected or created is displayed. When nothing (drawing or machining) was created
or selected, this chart automatically displays the workpiece dimensions but as the situation changes,
in accordance to the operations made by the user, it is automatically updated and shows the data
related to the currently processed machining, or displays the fields in which to enter the necessary
data to create a new drawing or a new machining.

[Link] Status bar

This bar shows in every instant the updated status of the application (creation of a polyline,
construction of a routing work, modification of a machining, etc…) while often offering, for the
advantage of the most inexperienced users, help prompts suggesting the best step to take in every
situation. Indeed many commands comprise more steps, i.e. they are made up of more, subsequent,
actions to be made in a precise order, as illustrated herefater, therefore a short text string appears to
guide user moment after moment in taking the right action, thus preventing any ambiguity and
speeding the whole procedure development. This bar also contains a box on the left displaying the
values corresponding to the current mouse position on the drawing.

Page221
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Control (tool) bar

This tool is described in details further on. The control bar contains a series of keys, logically
divided into 4 sets, each of which being selectable by a click on the relevant icon on the right side of
the bar itself, as shown in the figure here-aside. These keys give access to all main functions
available with this application: drawing, machinings processing and project analysis, display and
advanced machinings functions. Will you place the mouse cursor on a key whatever, the use of such
key is automatically displayed, thus helping new users getting familiar with this program. Usually
selecting a key causes the updating of the data chart displayed in the lower part of the screen, so that
only the fields that are necessary for the operation to do are shown. This mechanism is fully
automatic and has the purpose to guide user in the progress of his work, since constantly having
under his eyes this data chart arranged in logical and intuition-based mode, independently from the
function he is about to use.

The third set features functions allowing the visualization and graphical analysis of a project:
- zoom in
- zoom out
- Zoom on window
- zoom reset
- optimized zoom
- full-screen display
- display suction pads
- 3D workpiece display
- measure angle and segments

The fourth set, finally, gives access to the functions required for the most advanced machinings:
- flange holes
- add figures
- import ISO macros
- creation of hollowed profiles
- n polyline, (including automatic polyline welding)

Page 222
MW310 – Project Windows

10.2.2 Keyboard controls

Some commands selectable from the main menu can also be enabled directly from the keyboard
(shortcuts) by selecting the keys or combination of keys listed here below:
• CTRL+’+’(small numeric keyboard): the picture displayed is enlarged, where the center of the new
picture is given by the cursor position (zoom in).
• CTRL+’-‘(small numeric keyboard): the picture displayed is reduced, where the center of the new
picture is given by the cursor position (zoom out).
• PGUP: previous segment/vertex (see polyline modification); selection of append in symmetry
function (see polyline creation); selection of offset direction (see polyline offset).
• PGDN: next segment/vertex (see polyline modification); selection to append in symmetry (see
polyline creation); selection of offset direction (see polyline offset).
• ESC: aborts the current command.
• CTRL+N: create a new project.
• CRTL+O: open a project.
• CRTL+P: print a project.
• CTRL+T: head tooling-up.
• CTRL+Q: quit MasterWork.
• CTRL+Z: cancel the last operation (Undo).
• CRTL+Y: restores the cancelled operation (Redo).
• CTRL+CANC: deletes selected elements.
• F5: Redraws the workpiece (figures and ISO macros) and reloads the tool table.
• F8: expand/shrink the machinings tree.
• F9: display whole workpiece.
• F10: display with optimized zoom.
• F11: full-screen display of drawing (if possible).

10.2.3 Selecting elements

The default status of the MasterWork program, as previously explained, is the selection mode: as
soon as you have completed the creation or modification of a new object (machining or drawing),
the program automatically enters selection mode.

[Link] Selecting machinings

It is possible to select only machinings
while drawings can be selected through a
specific menu (see polyline modification in
the CAD dedicated chapter). Since you first
have to select an element to be able to
modify it, this option offers a quicker
access to the machining relevant data and a
faster processing thereof. You may select
machinings in two ways: either by clicking
with the mouse on the drawing of the
workpiece, the cursor being on or near the
concerned machining; or by picking it
directly up from the machinings’ tree. In
both cases the final result is that the
selected machining is highlighted as well on
the drawing and on the machinings’ tree, while the data chart displays the information stored on
such machining, for user to modify it, if desired. As you can understand, it is sufficient to select a
machining to display its properties. Therefore it is not possible to select more machinings at once
with this command. In case of overlapping machinings, when clicking on them with the mouse, user
is shown the list of all the machinings found in the point indicated by the cursor when he clicked and
it is necessary to select one of the options proposed and confirm clicking on “OK”, so that only the
concerned machining is eventually highlighted.

Page223
MW310 – Project Windows
To operate a multiple selection, open the advanced modification of a machining menu. There, it is
possible to select more machinings either with a succession of mouse clicks (remember that clicking
again on a selected machining causes its de-selection or revocation), or using a selection box the
which limits you draw with the mouse, in order to capture at once all the machinings included in its
perimeter. In addition, in case of overlapping machinings, the above illustrated selection window
allows user to choose only the desired machinings (using the CTRL or SHIFT key) before
confirming with a click on “OK”. Remark: remember that you may select horizontal holes (either
single or aligned holes) and consequently display the relevant data and modify it, if desired, only
when the current working face is the horizontal one, whereas if proceeding from a side face, you can
see but not select them.
We also wish to point out that to directly select a machining on the drawing you have to point the
mouse cursor on a given part of such machining and click: for most machinings this position is an
edge thereof, as for routings and cuts, or, if speaking of vertical and tilted holes, the inside of the
represented circle. When dealing with complex machinings, you must point the mouse cursor only
on a part of them: a figure made up of aligned holes, for instance, can be selected by clicking on the
line that runs through all circles’ centers; in an horizontal fitting figure the line on which to click is
the one made up by all circles’ tangent; whereas the sensible area for flange borings is the first hole
(the one marked with a cross). Finally it is important to know that direct selection by mouse click
features a tolerance, set by machine user as a default parameter, that corresponds to the precision
degree wanted to grip an object with the mouse cursor.

[Link] Selecting polylines

To select polylines (i.e. geometrical elements that will not be machined), open the advanced
modification of a polyline menu (see relevant chapter). Just as it goes with machinings, in this
context it is possible to select more polylines at once either clicking in succession on more of them
or using the selection box drawn with the mouse. The only difference is featured in the event of
overlapping polylines: indeed no selection window is provided for polylines so that all polylines
contained in the mouse drawn box are captured at once.

10.2.4 References to workpiece

When creating a new project, one of the most frequently occurring operations is entering
with absolute co-ordinates the position of a given machining, or of the extremity of a
segment and so on. MasterWork allows you to enter co-ordinates either expressed as
absolute values or referred to workpiece real dimensions. In other words, co-ordinates may
be referring either to workpiece edges or to its midlines along the Cartesian X and Y-axes.
Are the here-aside shown keys pushed down, then the X (key with arrow to the right) and Y
(key with upward arrow) values respectively are not bound to workpiece dimensions but
intended as absolute values computed from the axes zero point (which, precisely, is the intersection
of the left and bottom sides).
The here-aside shown keys, on the other hand, indicate that the co-ordinate value is referred to
the right (X value) or to the upper workpiece edge (Y value). To transform a relative value into
an absolute one, the computation to do is the following:
Xa = L – X r and Ya = W – Yr
where L and W respectively stand for workpiece length and width, pedicel ‘a’ stands for the
absolute value and pedicel ‘r’ for the relative value.
Are these keys pushed-in, this means that the co-ordinate they are associated to refers to
workpiece midline axis. To convert such a value into an absolute value the computation is the
following:
Xa = L/2 + Xr and Ya = W/2 + Yr
where L and W respectively stand for workpiece length and width, pedicel ‘a’ stands for the
absolute value and pedicel ‘r’ for the relative value.
Once you have set the type of reference to workpiece (edges or midlines) you want to use to fix a
given value, the latter will not only always follow workpiece dimensions but it will vary as these are
modified. Example: do you program to bore a hole at 100 mm from the right edge of a workpiece
with total length 900 mm, said hole will be drilled at the absolute co-ordinate 800 mm. But is
workpiece length changed into 1200 mm, then the hole will be drilled at the absolute co-ordinate
1100 mm (since it was programmed at 100 mm from the right edge). This mechanism also applies
when computing the deformation of a geometric element (see relevant paragraph in the CAD
chapter).

Page 224
MW310 – Project Windows

10.2.5 Help function

MasterWork features several help functions supporting users in all the activities.
First of all there’s an on-line help function may be enabled at anytime by striking the F1 key or by
clicking on the HELP button when it is active.
On-line help is context-sensitive, that means that when it is enabled it automatically goes to the topic
relating to the current system status (normally it displays the page corresponding to the selected
menu). The on-line help is context-sensitive… The on-line help is in HTML format, which has now
become a very common standard allowing easy and fast retrieval of information.
Other on-line help functions are: the description of the control bar buttons’ function (which is
visualized whenever the cursor is placed upon each symbol) and the description of both the currently
active control and of the suggestions concerning the next step to be taken, which are displayed on the
status bar. Moreover, when moving the mouse arrow along the machinings tree, a caption is
displayed describing the junction, either workpiece face or machining, the mouse is pointing at.

Page225
MW310 – Project Windows

10.2.6 Importing DXF files

Masterwork alows importing geometrical elements directly from DXF files. The dialog box shown
in the figure may be displayed either within the 'File' menu or by means of the specific button on the
toolbar:

Within this box you may select the file to be imported, decide whether you want to change the units
of measurement and if you want to use the layers that are already defined within the file. Once you
have confirmed your selection, all enmtities included within the file are imported into the program
according to the following principles:

- polylines and arcs of a circle are directly imported as polylines - they also take on polyline
features;
- circles and segments are imported as geometrical elements to which you have to assign a
meaning - here follow the instructions on how to turn circles into circular polylines or holes and
segments into groove-cuttings or polyline segments-; that's why such elements will be displayed
in gray.

You shall need to expressly transform the entities that will not be automatically turn into polylines
or machinings by using the available Masterwork tools for machining or drawing conversion -
please refer to the following paragraphs-.
PLease note that not all entities contained in a DXF file are recognised so far. In particular, the
following entites are not imported: “spline” entities, formatted texts -i.e. texts that have not been
saved as a polyline- and dotted figure fillings.

Page 226
MW310 – Project Windows

10.3 THE PROJECT

The integrated operational system MasterWork is based upon the concept of project.
A project is the totality of geometrical and technological information defining all operations to be
performed in order to turn the raw material into the final product. Within the same project, user
individually processes the various working faces available on the tooling machine which the project
is allocated to, and for each working face he is required to set the type and geometry of each single
machining, the associated technological parameters and the sequence in which the machinings will
be executed. All this information is stored in a file with .TLF extension.

10.3.1 Project general data

The Project General Data dialog box is displayed each time no element is currently selected, being
modified or created. It can be recalled any time by a click on one of the main junctions of the
machinings’ tree (that represent the available working faces for the current project). The information
is divided into 2 pages: the first one titled “standard” that contains the most frequently used (and
changed) data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is dedicated to information less subject
to be modified by users.

The tables contained in such pages feature the following fields:

• Description a short description of the project.
• Length, height & width define workpiece dimensions; modify the values displayed to change
workpiece dimensions. Are drawings or machinings bound to workpiece edges, these are altered
consequently
• Tools table No. identifies the tools table bound with the ISO program
• Suction cups table No. identifies the suction cups table bound with the ISO program
• Measurement unit selects the measurement unit: millimeters or inches. Important remark:
whenever you change the measurement unit in a given project, the existing values ARE NOT
CONVERTED in the new measurement unit! The numerical values remain UNCHANGED since only
their interpretation changes. Example: in a project you have programmed a hole with diameter 5 mm;
will you change the measurement unit for inches, you still have value 5, intended as inches instead of
millimeters and NOT 5/25.4=0.197 ”). However a prompt is displayed at any measurement unit
change to warn users on this “danger”.
• Boring optimization when ticked off, i.e. enabled, it allows the machine head route
optimization during vertical and horizontal boring process, independently from the tool used for each
of them
• Machining sequence sets the sequence in which the various workpiece faces will be worked

Page227
MW310 – Project Windows
out. A click on this field opens a dialog box in which it is possible to change such order using two
keys.
• Offset on X, Y and Z additional offsets to sum to workpiece dimensions (for instance when
using a larger supporting board under the workpiece). The drawing side is provided as a guide.
• Break value for long workpieces: it defines the position where the workpiece is to be cut if it
exceeds the dimensions allowed by the machine working area. Click on the button located by this field
to enable it, then enter the desired value either by typing it or by clicking in the intended position on
the workpiece drawing.

Each time you modify one of these fields, buttons “OK” and “Cancel” are enabled while the other
areas of the user’s interface are disabled, therefore you can access them newly only after having
confirmed (clicking on OK) or annulled (clicking on CANCEL) the modification made to the project.
User is thus always made aware that the project data was altered and possible errors or dysfunctions
during the execution are thus avoided.
User has the possibility to set the default values displayed in this dialog box each time a new project is
being created. Indeed, does user mostly work with pieces having common characteristics (size or
other), once stored as default values (the default-setting function is explained in another chapter) these
will be automatically proposed in the relevant fields each time user begins the creation of a new
project.
The button shown here-beside, which is found in the Project General Data main window,
displays the table where the slanting faces may be defined. The present version of the program
allows defining two slanting faces, one in the back and one in the front, that may be added to the
default faces included in the machinings tree.

The buttons located by the text boxes display a grid featuring all
slanting face configurations, which may be created within the
MW310 software environment and which are defined by the three
parameters shown in the table here-beside. The grid gives access to
the available slanting face library and displays their properties.
Click on the row corresponding to the intended slanting face to
select it. The number identifying it will thus be displayed in either
text box, where no direct modification is possible except for
deleting the face number by pressing CANC or BACKSPACE on
the keyboard. The properties of each selected face are displayed underneath the relating text box. To remove a
slanting face, simply leave the corresponding box empty. Click on Cancel to abort any modifications to the
slanting faces and on OK to confirm them. In both cases, you will then go back to the Project General Data
table. Please note that if at least one slanting face was introduced, the button opening the slanting face
configuration window will be displayed in colors.

Page 228
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4 INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING

The Interactive programming area is made up of all those functions that allow creating machinings on
the current workpiece. These functions are accessed by a simple mouse click upon the corresponding
icon out of the first set of keys of the control bar, found on the right side of the screen. This first set of
keys is usually displayed as soon as the program is opened, otherwise you can select it by clicking on
the highest of the 3 icons that identify the 3 sets of keys that make up the control bar.
This first set of keys allows to create any type of machining and to modify any existing machining.
This chapter is dedicated to the detailed explanation of all these functions, starting from the simplest
one, i.e. single hole boring, to finally describe a complex routing work.

10.4.1 Single vertical hole

Click on the aside-illustrated key to create a single hole on a workpiece. Upon selection of this
key the data chart is immediately updated insofar as it will display all the necessary fields to
program a vertical boring work. The first page displayed is the one titled “standard”, that contains
the most frequently used (and changed) data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is
dedicated to information less subject to be modified by users.

Hooking
Symmetry choice
Type of drills buttons Slowdown modes buttons

• Type of drill: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the
type of drill to use (standard, countersinking, V-point or flat drill). Selecting one type
automatically excludes any other one and to each type of drill is associated the following
default information: a slowdown mode, a rotation speed, a diameter and two slowdown
depths, set by user in the default-setting program. So, as soon as you select a type of drill, the
associated default-information is automatically proposed in the data chart. Anyhow these
values are not binding; user shall consider them as suggestions and may change them any
time, as he desires.
• Slowdown mode: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine,
the type of slowdown you want to apply when drilling the current hole. Selecting one type
automatically excludes any other one. To each type of slowdown is associated the following
default information: a rotation speed and two slowdown depths, set by user in the default-
setting program.

Page229
MW310 – Project Windows

• Hole center co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the hole
position, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in on
the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the
workpiece drawing.
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with
which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges,
or workpiece midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with
the left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered
changes to adapt to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right
mouse button you set the new reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered,
therefore the hole position changes.
• Relative reference choice button: if you click on this button, the values contained in the X1
and Y1 fields are not considered as absolute values but instead as increments with reference
to the previously drilled hole (if the “Next” button is clicked-on).
• Depth: is the depth of the hole to drill.
• Diameter: is the diameter of the drill and therefore that of the hole.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed hole.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to drill the hole. If the boring optimization is
enabled, this field is senseless and will not be considered. The key to the left of the data field,
if pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to
the right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting
you to choose the most suitable one.
• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow
you to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed hole, where the
symmetry axis is the one shown on the selected button. Example: should you push-in the first
button (symmetry with respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two holes are created, one of
which is exactly positioned as per the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy,
whose values are symmetric with respect of workpiece midline along the X axis.

Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a hole is created on the upper horizontal face or, if
you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog box is then disabled
and the “single hole” button on the control bar is re-enabled. The "Next" button produces the same
effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on
setting other holes. Important: if, in phase of creation, you wish to drill more identical holes on a
single workpiece, instead of clicking on “OK” once the procedure is completed, it is sufficient to
double-click on the workpiece drawing in the position where you want to create another hole. This
command, if associated to an appropriate use of the boring default parameters, allows you to create
new holes in the twinkling of an eye. Finally, have a look on the machinings’ tree: once a hole was
created, you can see the tree has a new junction, whose representation is a vertical drill, as a “branch”
of the current working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a single vertical
hole to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a single vertical hole previously
created you may click with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon created in the machinings’
tree. In both cases the selected hole color changes, the relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and
the dialog box we have described here above is displayed. Will you change some values, you can
immediately verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming the modification made
with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled
and the previous data are restored. You can see that the symmetry choice buttons are disabled. Indeed,
they may be enabled only in creation phase. So should you wish to make a mirror-copy of an existing
hole, you must use specific commands of the advanced modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that vertical holes may be programmed only from the horizontal surface
(i.e. with the horizontal working face displayed during programming) or from the slanting faces. In the
latter case, however, the table being displayed is slightly different.
As you may see here-above, it is much simpler: in fact, you no longer need to select a slowdown mode
and a type of drill, in that routing bits are normally used to drill holes on slanting faces. For this

Page 230
MW310 – Project Windows

reason, however, the field for the tool rotation speed, which was not included in the previously
described tables, has been added to this one.

10.4.2 Multiple vertical holes

Click on the aside-illustrated button to create on a workpiece a machining made up of more
vertical holes arranged along a straight line. Upon selection of this button the data chart is
immediately updated insofar as it will display all the necessary fields to program aligned vertical
holes. The first page displayed is the one titled “standard”, that contains the most frequently used
(and changed) data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is dedicated to information less
subject to be modified by users.

Reference choice Symmetry

Types of buttons Types of drills
Slowdown modes choice buttons
machining

• Type of machining: these 3 buttons allow you to choose the type of multiple hole machining you
want to create (fitting on X, fitting on Y or aligned holes on the XY face). In fitting works, the number
of holes is determined by the position of both ends and the pitch between 2 holes, whereas in aligned
holes works the number of holes is entered by user and the position of the last hole is determined by
the programmed angle and pitch between 2 holes. Finally, in accordance with the type of work
chosen, the necessary fields to fill-in in the data chart are activated.
• Type of drill: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the type
of drill to use (standard, countersinking, V-point or flat drill). Selecting one type automatically
excludes any other one and to each type of drill is associated the following default information: a
slowdown mode, a rotation speed, a diameter and two slowdown depths, set by users in the default-
setting program. So, as soon as you select a type of drill, the associated default-information is

Page231
MW310 – Project Windows
automatically proposed in the data chart. Anyhow these values are not binding; user shall consider
them as suggestions and may change them any time, as he desires.
• Slowdown mode: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the
type of slowdown you want to apply when drilling the current hole. Selecting one type automatically
excludes any other one. To each type of slowdown is associated the following default information: a
rotation speed and two slowdown depths, set by user in the default-setting program.
• First hole co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the first hole
position, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in on the
keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece
drawing.
• Last hole co-ordinates: X2 and Y2 are relevant only for fitting works. In this case these are the
values respectively on axis X and Y of the last hole position, expressed in the current measurement
unit. The total number of holes the fitting work is made up of is automatically computed in accordance
with the pitch entered (there shall be as many holes as possible along the concerned segment). This
co-ordinate may be keyed-in on the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the
desired position on the workpiece drawing. Obviously one of the two co-ordinates is always disabled
since it is identical for both the first and the last hole (X2=X1 if constructing a fitting on Y or Y1=Y2
if constructing a fitting on X).
• X2 and Y2 do not apply for aligned holes boring works (and are therefore disabled), since the
only other data required to construct the machining is the line angle, while the number of holes is a
value user must key-in (instead of being automatically computed as for fitting works).
• Fitting centering: if this checkbox is selected, the fitting work will be centered with reference to
the end-points set in the previously mentioned fields; the first hole will therefore, generally, no longer
correspond to the fitting start point.
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece
midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with the left mouse button
you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt to such new
reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the new
reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the machining position changes.
• Depth: is the depth of the holes to drill.
• Diameter: is the diameter of the drill and therefore that of the holes.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood.
• Pitch: is the distance between two holes.
• Angle: is the inclination in degrees of the line running through all hole centers in an aligned
holes boring work. This value may be keyed-in on the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with
the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece drawing, after you have entered the first hole co-
ordinates. This field is disabled when the machining to create is a fitting work.
• Number of holes: is the number of holes to draw in an aligned holes boring work. This field is
disabled when the machining to create is a fitting work.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to drill the holes. Is the boring optimization
enabled, this field is senseless and will not be considered. The key to the left of the data field, if
pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to the
right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting you to
choose the most suitable one.
• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow you
to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed machining, where the symmetry axis is
the one shown on the selected button. Example: when creating a fitting on Y, should you push-in the
first button (symmetry with respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two fittings on Y are created, one
of which is exactly positioned as per the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy, whose
values are symmetric with respect of workpiece midline along the X axis.

Page 232
MW310 – Project Windows
Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a series of holes is created on the upper horizontal
face or, if you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog box is
then disabled and the “multiple holes” button on the control bar is re-enabled. Pressing the "Next"
button produces, instead, the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit
the table and that you may go on setting other aligned holes. Important: if, in phase of creation, you
wish to drill more identical multiple hole machinings on a single workpiece, instead of clicking on
“OK” once the procedure is completed, it is sufficient to double-click on the workpiece drawing in the
position where you want to create another machining. This command, if associated to an appropriate
use of the boring default parameters, allows you to create new multiple hole machinings in the
twinkling of an eye. Finally, have a look on the machinings’ tree: just as it happens with single holes,
you can see that once a multiple hole machining was created, the tree has a new junction, whose
representation is a series of vertical drills, as a “branch” of the horizontal working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a multiple hole
machining to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a multiple hole
machining previously created you may click with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon
created in the machinings’ tree. In both cases the machining color changes, the relevant junction on
the tree is highlighted and the dialog box we have described here above is displayed. Will you change
some values, you can immediately verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming
the modification made with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the
modifications made are annulled and the previous data is restored. You can see that the symmetry
choice buttons are disabled. Indeed, they may be enabled only in creation phase. So should you wish
to make a mirror-copy of an existing machining, you must use specific commands of the advanced
modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that vertical holes may be programmed only from the horizontal surface
(i.e. with the horizontal working face displayed during programming) or from the slanting faces.
Again, just as it happens with single holes, the table being displayed in the latter case is simpler:

there is still no need to select the slowdown mode and the type of drill in that routing bits are assumed to be
used, which requires the tool rotation speed selection.

Page233
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.3 Single horizontal hole

Click on the aside-illustrated key to create a single horizontal hole on a workpiece. Upon
selection of this key the data chart is immediately updated insofar as it will display all the
necessary fields to program a vertical boring work. The first page displayed is the one titled
“standard”, that contains the most frequently used (and changed) data, whereas the second page, titled
“advanced”, is dedicated to information less subject to be modified by users.
Side to bore Reference Symmetry
choice buttons choice buttons

• Side to bore: i.e. choice of the working face in which to bore the horizontal hole. Selecting one
type automatically excludes any other one. According to the selected face, X1 and Y1 will have a
different meaning.
• Hole center co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values determining the hole position, expressed in
the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may only be keyed-in on the keyboard. Is the
current face the front or the rear one, Y1 is the offset of the hole with respect to workpiece edge and
X1 its position along X axis; is the current face the left or the right one, X1 is the offset of the hole
with respect to workpiece edge and Y1 its position along Y axis.
• Z co-ordinate: is the position of the hole along Z-axis.
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece
midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with the left mouse button
you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt to such new
reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the new
reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the hole position changes. This
principle applies as well for all 3 the axes.
• Depth: is the depth of the hole to drill.
• Diameter: is the diameter of the drill and therefore that of the hole.
• Boring speed: is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood, in m/min.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed hole.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to drill the hole. Is the boring optimization
enabled, this field is senseless and will not be considered. The key next to the data input field, if
the MW310 programme is enables, allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on
the head, thus permitting you to choose the most suitable one.

Page 234
MW310 – Project Windows

• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow
you to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed hole with respect to the X or Y
axis on the same side or on the opposite workpiece side. Example: when creating an horizontal hole
on the left workpiece side, should you push-in the first button (symmetry with respect to axis X) then
click on “OK”, two holes are created, one of which is exactly positioned as per the values entered and
the other one being its mirror-copy, on the right face. But is the programmed hole on the rear or front
face, the second hole, if symmetric with respect to axis X, is always on the same side but its values are
symmetric with respect of workpiece midline along the X-axis.
Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a hole is created on the selected vertical face or, if
you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog box is then disabled
and the “horizontal hole” button on the control bar is re-enabled. Pressing the "Next" button produces,
instead, the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that
you may go on setting other horizontal holes. Now, if you have a look on the machinings’ tree you can
see that, once a hole was created, the tree has a new junction, whose representation is a horizontal
drill, as a “branch” of the current working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a single horizontal
hole to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a single horizontal hole
previously created you may click with the mouse either on its drawing (if viewed from the horizontal
face) or on its icon created in the machinings’ tree. Will you visualize a vertical face instead, the hole
is visible but it cannot be selected. In both cases the selected hole color changes, the relevant junction
on the tree is highlighted and the dialog box we have described here above is displayed. Will you
change some values, you can immediately verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before
confirming the modification made with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead,
the modifications made are annulled and the previous data is restored. You can see that the symmetry
choice buttons are disabled. Indeed, they may be enabled only in creation phase. So should you wish
to make a mirror-copy of an existing hole, you must use specific commands of the advanced
modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that horizontal holes may be programmed only from the horizontal
surface (i.e. with the horizontal working face displayed during programming).

Page235
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.4 Horizontal fitting

Click on the aside-illustrated key to create a horizontal fitting on a workpiece (this machining is
conceptually identical to a vertical fitting work with the only difference that it is executed on a
vertical face, in parallel to the horizontal surface). Upon selection of this key the data chart is
immediately updated insofar as it will display all the necessary fields to program horizontal fitting
works. The first page displayed is the one titled “standard”, that contains the most frequently used
(and changed) data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is dedicated to information less
subject to be modified by users.
Reference Symmetry
Side to bore choice buttons choice buttons

• Side to bore: i.e. choice of the working face in which to bore the horizontal hole. Selecting one
type automatically excludes any other one. According to the selected face, X1 and Y1 will have a
different meaning.
• First hole co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values determining the first hole position, expressed
in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may only be keyed-in on the keyboard. Is the
current face the front or the rear one, Y1 is the offset of the hole with respect to workpiece edge and
X1 its position along X axis; is the current face the left or the right one, X1 is the offset of the hole
with respect to workpiece edge and Y1 its position along Y axis.
• Last hole co-ordinates: X2 and Y2 are the values determining the last hole position, expressed in
the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may only be keyed-in on the keyboard. Is the
current face the front or the rear one, Y2 is the offset of the hole with respect to workpiece edge and
X2 its position along X axis; is the current face the left or the right one, X2 is the offset of the hole
with respect to workpiece edge and Y2 its position along Y axis
Obviously one of the two co-ordinates is always disabled since it is identical for both the first and the
last hole (X2=X1 if constructing a fitting on Y or Y1=Y2 if constructing a fitting on X).
• Z co-ordinate: is the position of the hole along Z-axis.
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece
midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with the left mouse button
you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt to such new
reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the new
reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the hole position changes. This
principle applies as well for all 3 the axes.
• Depth: is the depth of the holes to drill.

Page 236
MW310 – Project Windows

• Diameter: is the diameter of the drill and therefore that of the holes.
• Boring speed: is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood, in m/min.
• Pitch: is the distance between two holes.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to execute the fitting work. If the boring
optimization is enabled, this field is senseless and will not be considered. The key to the left of
the data field, if pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while
the key to the right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus
permitting you to choose the most suitable one.
• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow you
to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed machining with respect to the X
or Y axis on the same side or on the opposite workpiece side. Example: when creating a
horizontal fitting work on the left workpiece side, should you push-in the first button (symmetry
with respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two fittings are created, one of which is exactly
positioned as per the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy, on the right face.
But is the programmed fitting on the rear or front face, the second one, if symmetric with respect
to axis X, is always on the same side but its values are symmetric with respect of workpiece
midline along the X-axis.

Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a fitting work is created on the selected vertical
face or, if you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog box is
then disabled and the “horizontal hole” button on the control bar is re-enabled. Pressing the "Next"
button produces, instead, the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit
the table and that you may go on setting other horizontal fitting holes. Now, if you have a look on the
machinings’ tree you can see that, once a horizontal fitting was created, the tree has a new junction,
whose representation is a series of horizontal drills, as a “branch” of the current working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a single horizontal
fitting to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a single horizontal fitting
previously created you may click with the mouse either on its drawing (if viewed from the horizontal
face) or on its icon created in the machinings’ tree. Will you visualize a vertical face instead, the
fitting is visible but it cannot be selected. In both cases the selected machining color changes, the
relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and the dialog box we have described here above is
displayed. Will you change some values, you can immediately verify the effects thereof on the
drawing even before confirming the modification made with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click
on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled and the previous data is restored. You can
see that the symmetry choice buttons are disabled. Indeed, they may be enabled only in creation
phase. So should you wish to make a mirror-copy of an existing machining, you must use specific
commands of the advanced modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that horizontal holes may be programmed only from the horizontal
surface (i.e. with the horizontal working face displayed during programming).

Page237
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.5 Indexed (tilted) vertical hole

Click on the aside-illustrated key to create a single tilted vertical hole on a workpiece. Upon
selection of this key the data chart is immediately updated insofar as it will display all the
necessary fields to program an indexed boring work. The first page displayed is the one titled
“standard”, that contains the most frequently used (and changed) data, whereas the second page,
titled “advanced”, is dedicated to information less subject to be modified by users.

Reference
choice Symmetry
buttons choice buttons

• Hole center co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the hole
position, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in on the
keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece
drawing.
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the values set are referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece midline axes,
or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with the left mouse button you only set
the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt to such new reference; but if
you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the new reference but the
numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the hole position changes.
• Z co-ordinate: is the value along Z axis of the penetration point, i.e. the distance along which the
drill must go down from the upper surface before penetrating in the wood.
• Face XY angle: is the drill penetration angle on the XY face.
• Face ZX angle: is the drill penetration angle with respect to the horizontal face.
• Air value: is the distance between drill tip and workpiece surface before starting the execution.
• Depth: is the depth of the hole to drill.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood.
• Boring speed: is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood, in m/min.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed hole.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to drill the hole. If the boring optimization is
enabled, this field is senseless and will not be considered. The key to the left of the data field, if
pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to the
right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting you to
choose the most suitable one.

Page 238
MW310 – Project Windows

• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow you
to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed hole, where the symmetry axis is the
one shown on the selected button. Example: should you push-in the first button (symmetry with
respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two holes are created, one of which is exactly positioned as per
the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy, whose values are symmetric with respect
of workpiece midline along the X axis.
Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a tilted hole is created on the upper horizontal face
or, if you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog box is then
disabled and the “indexed hole” button on the control bar is re-enabled. Pressing the "Next" button
produces, instead, the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the
table and that you may go on setting other indexed holes. Important: if, in phase of creation, you wish
to drill more identical holes on a single workpiece, instead of clicking on “OK” once the procedure is
completed, it is sufficient to double-click on the workpiece drawing in the position where you want to
create another hole. This command, if associated to an appropriate use of the boring default
parameters, allows you to create new holes in the twinkling of an eye. Finally, have a look on the
machinings’ tree: once a hole was created, you can see the tree has a new junction, whose
representation is a tilted drill, as a “branch” of the horizontal working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a single tilted hole
to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a single indexed hole previously
created you may click with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon created in the machinings’
tree. In both cases the selected hole color changes, the relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and
the dialog box we have described here above is displayed. Will you change some values, you can
immediately verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming the modification made
with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled
and the previous data is restored. You can see that the symmetry choice buttons are disabled. Indeed,
they may be enabled only in creation phase. So should you wish to make a mirror-copy of an existing
hole, you must use specific commands of the advanced modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that indexed holes may be programmed only from the horizontal surface
(i.e. with the horizontal working face displayed during programming).

10.4.6 Cuts
Click on the aside-illustrated key to create a vertical cut on a workpiece. Upon selection of this
key the data chart is immediately updated insofar as it will display all the necessary fields to
program cuts in the horizontal surface. In addition, is no suitable blade for the desired type of
cut found in the tools table, user is immediately warned thereof. On the contrary, when the right tool is
found, its number is automatically entered in the appropriate box and the blade entry speed and cutting
speed fields are instantaneously updated in the data chart as per the maximum values found in the
configuration page of such tool. This data is subject to be modified by user, if desired.
As explained many times, the data chart is made up of 2 pages. The first page displayed is the one
titled “standard”, that contains the most frequently used (and changed) data, whereas the second page,
titled “advanced”, is dedicated to information less subject to be modified by users.

Type of Reference Symmetry

machining choice buttons choice buttons

Page239
MW310 – Project Windows

• Type of machining: these 2 buttons allow you to choose the type of cut you want to create (cut
along the X-axis, cut along the Y-axis, or tilted cut in the two possible modes: using the cut end-points
or its length and angle with relation to the X-axis). In accordance with the type of work chosen, the
necessary fields to fill-in in the data chart are activated.
• Start point co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values determining the position of the initial
extremity of the cut to execute, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be
keyed-in on the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the
workpiece drawing.
• End point co-ordinates: X2 and Y2 are the values determining the position of the final extremity
of the cut to execute, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in
on the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the
workpiece drawing. Obviously, if the cut is to be executed either along the X-axis or along the Y-axis,
one of the two co-ordinates is always disabled since it is identical to the initial extremity (X2=X1 if
constructing a cut on Y or Y1=Y2 if constructing a cut on X).
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece
midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with the left mouse button
you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt to such new
reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the new
reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the cut extremity position
changes.
• Cut length: this field is enabled when a tilted cut is to be executed by using its length and angle.
• Cut inclination: this field is enabled when a tilted cut is to be executed by using its length and
angle.
• Depth: is the depth of the cut to execute.
• Cutting width: is the width of the programmed cut. Is the blade thickness minor than this value,
the deriving ISO code shall provide for more passes of the tool until the desired slot width is reached.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood, expressed in
m/min.
• Cutting speed: is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to execute the cut. The key to the left of the data
field, if pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to
the right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting
you to choose the most suitable one. Usually, when creating a new cut this field is automatically
filled by the program that searches for the first available blade on the operation head and
provides to enter its identification code. In case no blade is available a warning is displayed.
• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow you
to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed machining, where the symmetry axis is
the one shown on the selected button. Example: when creating a cut along Y axis, should you push-in
the first button (symmetry with respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two cuts are created, one of
which is exactly positioned as per the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy, whose
values are symmetric with respect of workpiece midline along the X axis.

Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a cut is created on the selected face (either
horizontal or vertical) or, if you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the
dialog box is then disabled and the “cut” button on the control bar is re-enabled. The "Next" button
produces the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that
you may go on setting other groove-cuttings. Now, if you have a look on the machinings’ tree you
can see that, once a cut was created, the tree has a new junction, whose representation is a saw blade,
as a “branch” of the current working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a single cut to
display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a cut previously created you may click
with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon created in the machinings’ tree. In both cases the
selected machining color changes, the relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and the dialog box

Page 240
MW310 – Project Windows
we have described here above is displayed. Will you change some values, you can immediately verify
the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming the modification made with a mouse click
on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled and the previous
data is restored. You can see that the symmetry choice buttons are disabled. Indeed, they may be
enabled only in creation phase. So should you wish to make a mirror-copy of an existing machining,
you must use specific commands of the advanced modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that cuts may be programmed only from the horizontal surface (i.e. with
the horizontal working face displayed during programming).

10.4.7 Trimming
Trimming means to cut down the edges of a workpiece with a specific tool (usually a routing bit)
in order to bring workpiece to the programmed dimensions. Click on the aside-illustrated key to
create a trimming work on a workpiece. Upon selection of this key the data chart is immediately
updated insofar as it will display all the necessary fields to program a trimming work. Once you
have programmed the trimming of a workpiece, pushing-in this key again will have no further effect,
since trimming is an operation you may perform only once in each project. As explained many times,
the data chart is made up of 2 pages. The first page displayed is the one titled “standard”, that contains
the most frequently used (and changed) data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is dedicated
to information less subject to be modified by users. It is necessary at this stage to mention an
important factor that is not included in the data chart but is always present with cutter-like tools, i.e.
the type of compensation in accordance with the tool dims. In trimming operations the compensation
is completed NC-controlled, therefore it will always remain outside the workpiece area and the
programmed compensation will never happen to be incompatible with the machining direction.
Reference Move start
Change Types of attack Manual junction
choice buttons point
direction

• Change machining direction: this key allows reversing the sense in which the tool moves along
the workpiece perimeter (from clockwise to anticlockwise and vice-versa). Each time you change the
direction you must change the type of compensation too (from left to right or vice-versa), so that it
always remains external. In addition, should the penetration side not be compatible with the current
machining direction (i.e. the trimming would be performed inside the workpiece area instead of
outside) the relevant button (penetration from the left or from the right) is automatically disabled.
• Type of attack: these 4 buttons allow user to select amongst those available (vertical, with
junction loop on the left, with junction loop on the right, slanted along Z axis). Selecting one type
automatically excludes any other one and to each type of attack is associated some default information
so that as soon as you select a type of attack, the associated default-information is automatically
proposed in the data chart. Follows a short description of the various attack modes:

Page241
MW310 – Project Windows
- Vertical attack: the cutter moves above workpiece to the trimming start point where it starts
rotating and vertically lowers down to the programmed depth. Then it starts moving forward along the
workpiece perimeter until it has reached the start point again, where it vertically exits the wood again.
- Side attack: the cutter moves to a given point on workpiece edge, penetrates into the wood then
it moves forward along an arc of circle that connects the penetration point with the trimming start
point (also called entry junction loop). Then it starts moving forward along the workpiece perimeter
until it has reached the start point again, where it exits the wood covering an arc of circle (or exit
junction loop) that is the mirror-copy of the previous one.
- Slanting attack along axis Z: the cutter moves above workpiece to a given point at distance x
from the trimming start point. Then it starts to rotate and lowers along the Z-axis while
contemporaneously moving forward until it reaches the trimming start point. Then it stops lowering
and only moves forward along the workpiece perimeter until it has reached the start point again,
where it exits the wood again in the opposite mode with respect to the entry.
• Workpiece offset: is the distance between the trimmed workpiece edges and the stop (i.e.
between the trimmed and the rough edges).
• Trimming start point co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values, expressed in the current
measurement unit, respectively on axis X and Y of the start point position, i.e. the point where the
trimming effectively begins at the preset depth. These co-ordinates may be entered only graphically
clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece drawing. Should no start point be
entered, a point near the axes zero point would automatically be selected for this purpose (when no
junction loop is set in vertices, it will be the axes intersection vertex; otherwise it will be the junction
loop start point). Thanks to the graphical selection user can immediately see the compensation type
and direction indicated by a colored arrow.
• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece
midline axes, or to machine zero point. They display read-only values, which may not be altered, their
only purpose being to show the hooking reference being associated with the trimming start-point
coordinates. Such hooking reference is automatically assigned by the program, basing upon that of its
nearest vertex.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to trim workpiece. The key to the left of the data
field, if pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to
the right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting
you to choose the most suitable one. As to trimming tools, the number that will appear in this
field can be entered as a default-parameter. Each time you change this value, also the values
displayed in the speed, depth and tool compensation fields are updated accordingly. The junction
loop radius is modified too, because deemed proportional (by default) to the diameter of the tool
used to perform the trimming work (see here-under).
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood.
• Working speed: is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood, in m/min.
• Rotation speed: is the tool rotation speed, in thousands of laps per minute.
• Depth: is the programmed working depth.
• Pass depth: if set on zero, the cutter passes one time only to perform the work; otherwise there
shall be as many passes of the cutter as necessary to reach the programmed depth. Example: the
programmed depth is 10 mm and the pass depth is set on 3 mm, then the ISO code sees 4 passes, the
which first three will cut 3 mm each and the last one 1 mm only.
• Junction loop radius: is the attack of the cutter on wood with junction loop, this value is the
radius that such junction route (whose shape is a semi-circle) shall have. This value is proportional (by
default) to the diameter of the tool used to perform the trimming work, therefore it is automatically
updated when the tool changes. It is anyhow possible to use a radius whatever. In this case the button
aside this field should be pushed-in to re-enable the automatic radius calculation in relation with the
tool diameter, after you had entered a value manually (see here-under).
• Length of the slant along Z-axis: is the length of the slanting portion of route along workpiece
side that tool has to cover before reaching the trimming start point.
• Set trimming start point: When selecting a trimming work, this button upon which you can select
a new start point on the perimeter along which workpiece shall be trimmed is enabled. Push button in

Page 242
MW310 – Project Windows
then point the mouse cursor on the desired start point and click. Once pushed-in it remains down as
long as you haven’t chosen a new start point, then it automatically comes out again.
• Set junction route start point (set attack point): this key allows you to customize the initial
junction loop (if pushed-in while another type of attack is selected, automatically the attack mode
automatically changes to side attack with junction loop) and decide the junction route start point and
shape (in this case not necessarily a semi-circle). When using this command the junction loop radius
field is disabled (colored in gray and up again) to remind user that it is not pertinent to the current
junction loop.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Trimming junction radius: this parameter is intended as the junction radius applied on the rough
workpiece vertices during the trimming work.
• Compensation without junction: parameter K is entered in the G41 and G42 ISO instructions to
activate the compensation mode in which no junction is created on the vertices of the compensated
figure.
• Generate Q: if disabled, parameter Q is not entered in the G41 and G42 ISO instructions and
compensation is carried out using only the tool radius, whereas when ticked off, the compensation
field is enabled and the value therein is attributed to parameter Q for the compensation.

• Compensation radius: is the “generate Q” parameter ticked off, this field is enabled too and used
for the computation of the compensation radius, independently from the tool radius value.

Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a trimming work is created on the upper
horizontal face or, if you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog
box is then disabled and the “trimming” button on the control bar is re-enabled. Important: in phase of
creation, instead of clicking on “OK” you may double-click on the workpiece drawing in the position
where you want to create a trimming. This command, if associated to an appropriate use of the
trimming default parameters, allows you to create a trimming work in the twinkling of an eye. Finally,
have a look on the machinings’ tree: once a trimming was created, you can see the tree has a new
junction, whose representation is a panel with dotted outlines, as a “branch” of the horizontal working
face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a trimming work
to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a trimming previously created you
may click with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon created in the machinings’ tree. In both
cases the selected machining color changes, the relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and the
dialog box we have described here above is displayed. Will you change some values, you can
immediately verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming the modification made
with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled
and the previous data is restored.
At last we wish to recall you that trimming works may be programmed only from and on the
horizontal surface.

Page243
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.8 Routing
A routing or spindle molding work is a machining consisting in having a routing tool cutting the
wood along a profile whatever that had been previously drawn. The profile or shape drawing is
examined in another chapter of this book. In this paragraph we shall describe only the creation
of the execution program. More routing works may be programmed on the same workpiece; in
this case we’ll use the term “multiple routings”. Click on the aside-illustrated key to create a routing work on a
workpiece. Upon selection of this key the data chart is immediately updated insofar as it will display all the
necessary fields to program a routing. The first data chart page displayed is the one titled “standard”, that
contains the most frequently used (and changed) data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is dedicated
to information less subject to be modified by users.

Type of Move start point Manual junction

Change
compensation direction
Symmetry
Type of attack choice buttons

• Type of compensation: differently from trimming works where the compensation may only
be external, in routing works it can be programmed as user desires. User may choose no compensation
at all, compensation on the right or compensation on the left (with respect to the routing tool feed
direction). According to the compensation type chosen, one of the two penetration sides may not be
admitted; in this case the relevant button would automatically be disabled. Moreover, the side on
which to perform the routing may be changed if incompatible with the preset compensation type.
• Change machining direction: this key allows reversing the sense in which the tool moves
along the profile to rout (from clockwise to anticlockwise and vice-versa). Each time you change the
direction you must change the type of compensation too (from left to right or vice-versa), if you chose
any, so that the side on which the routing is performed remains unaltered.
• Type of attack: these 4 buttons allow user to select amongst those available (vertical, with
junction loop on the left, with junction loop on the right, slanted along Z axis). Selecting one type
automatically excludes any other one and to each type of attack is associated some default information
so that as soon as you select a type of attack, the associated default-information is automatically
proposed in the data chart. Follows a short description of the various attack modes:
- Vertical attack: the cutter moves above workpiece to the routing start point where it starts
rotating and vertically lowers down to the programmed depth. Then it starts moving forward along the
profile until it has reached the start point again, where it vertically exits the wood again.
- Side attack: the cutter moves to a given point aside the routing start point, penetrates into the
wood then it moves forward along an arc of circle that connects the penetration point with the routing
start point (also called entry junction loop). Then it starts moving forward along the profile until it has

Page 244
MW310 – Project Windows
reached the start point again, where it exits the wood covering an arc of circle (or exit junction loop)
that is the mirror-copy of the previous one.
- Slanting attack along axis Z: the cutter moves above workpiece to a given point at distance x
from the routing start point. Then it starts to rotate and lowers along the Z-axis while
contemporaneously moving forward until it reaches the routing start point. Then it stops lowering and
only moves forward along the profile to rout until it has reached the start point again, where it exits
the wood again in the opposite mode with respect to the entry.
• Routing start point co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values, expressed in the current measurement
unit, respectively on axis X and Y of the start point position, i.e. the point where the routing
effectively begins at the preset depth. These co-ordinates may be entered only graphically clicking
with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece drawing. Should no start point be entered, the
first vertex of the figure would automatically be selected for this purpose. Thanks to the graphical
selection user can immediately see the compensation type and direction indicated by a colored arrow.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons located beside the hole coordinates, identify the selected
type of reference to the workpiece, that is to say whether the displayed values are referred to one of
the workpiece edges or to the workpiece midline axes. They display read-only values, which may not
be altered, their only purpose being to show the hooking reference being associated with the trimming
start-point coordinates. Such hooking reference is automatically assigned by the program, basing upon
that of its nearest vertex.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the routing tool to use. The key to the left of the data field, if
pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to the
right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting
selection of most suitable one. The number that will appear in this field can be entered as a
default-parameter in creation phase. Each time you change this value, also the values displayed
in the speed, depth and tool compensation fields are updated accordingly. The junction loop
radius is modified too, because deemed proportional (by default) to the diameter of the tool used
to perform the routing work (see here-under).
• Tilting angle: this function is enabled only in case of tools being assembled on tilting spindles. It
allows setting the tool inclination with reference to the horizontal axis.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood.
• Working speed: is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood, in m/min.
• Rotation speed: is the tool rotation speed, in thousands of laps per minute.
• Depth: is the programmed working depth.
• Pass depth: if set on zero, the cutter passes one time only to perform the work; otherwise there
shall be as many passes of the cutter as necessary to reach the programmed depth. Example: the
programmed depth is 10 mm and the pass depth is set on 3 mm, then the ISO code sees 4 passes, the
which first three will cut 3 mm each and the last one 1 mm only.
• Junction loop radius: is the attack of the cutter on wood with junction loop, this value is the
radius that such junction route (whose shape is a semi-circle) shall have. This value is proportional (by
default) to the diameter of the routing tool used, therefore it is automatically updated when the tool
changes. It is anyhow possible to use a radius whatever. In this case the button aside this field should
be pushed-in to re-enable the automatic radius calculation in relation with the tool diameter, after you
had entered a value manually (see here-under).
• Length of the slant along Z-axis: is the length of the slanting portion of route along workpiece
side that tool has to cover before reaching the routing start point.
• Set routing start point: When selecting an already existing routing, this button upon which you
can select the start point on the profile to rout is enabled and allows you to change it. Push button in
then point the mouse cursor on the desired start point and click. Once pushed-in it remains down as
long as you haven’t chosen a new start point, then it automatically comes out again.
• Set junction route start point (set attack point): this key (enabled only with already existing
routings) allows you to customize the initial junction loop (if pushed-in while another type of attack is
selected, automatically the attack mode automatically changes to side attack with junction loop) and
decide the junction route start point and shape (in this case not necessarily a semi-circle). When using
this command the junction loop radius field is disabled (colored in gray and up again) to remind user
that it is not pertinent to the current junction loop.

Page245
MW310 – Project Windows

• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow you
to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed machining, where the symmetry axis is
the one shown on the selected button. Example: when creating a routing, should you push-in the first
button (symmetry with respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two profiles are created, one of which is
exactly positioned as per the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy, whose values are
symmetric with respect of workpiece midline along the X axis.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Sharp edges if enabled, the edges in the figure will be routed without junction and kept sharp.
• Compensation without junction: parameter K is entered in the G41 and G42 ISO instructions to
activate the compensation mode in which no junction is created on the edges of the compensated
figure.
• Generate Q: if disabled, parameter Q is not entered in the G41 and G42 ISO instructions and
compensation is carried out using only the tool radius, whereas when ticked off, the compensation
field is enabled and the value therein is attributed to parameter Q for the compensation.
• Compensation radius: is the “generate Q” parameter ticked off, this field is enabled too and used
for the computation of the compensation radius, independently from the tool radius value.
• Change of direction on symmetrical workpiece: if this checkbox is selected when a workpiece is
being executed in the machine symmetrical area, the routing direction will be inverted.
• Tool management for symmetrical workpiece: if this checkbox is selected, the data contained in
the fields it enables, the ones defining the tool and its speed of rotation, will apply whenever a
workpiece is being executed in the machine symmetrical field. Such fields take as default values the
one defining the tool set for routings in non-symmetrical areas and the same speed of rotation, with
opposite sign, set in the first data window.

Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a routing is created or, if you click on
“CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases the dialog box is then disabled and the
“routing” button on the control bar is re-enabled. The "Next" button produces the same effect as
clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on setting
other routing works. Important: if, in phase of creation, you wish to create more identical routings on
a single workpiece, instead of clicking on “OK” once the procedure is completed, it is sufficient to
double-click on the workpiece drawing in the position where you want to create another routing. This
command, if associated to an appropriate use of the routing default parameters, allows you to create
new machinings in the twinkling of an eye. Finally, have a look on the machinings’ tree: you can see
that once a routing was created, the tree has a new junction, whose representation is a routing bit, as a
“branch” of the current working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a routing work to
display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a routing previously created you may
click with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon created in the machinings' tree. In both cases
the selected machining color changes, the relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and the dialog
box we have described here above is displayed. Will you change some values, you can immediately
verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming the modification made with a mouse
click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled and the
previous data is restored. As already explained, you may create more routings on the same workpiece.
In case of overlapping machinings, user is shown the list of all the machinings found in the point
indicated by the cursor when he clicked, for him the one he wants to display and/or modify.
Routings may be performed on all workpiece faces.

Page 246
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.9 Multiple routings

This function is an advanced version of the previous one. This menu allows selecting several
profiles at the same time and programming, for all workpieces, a routing work having the same
Technological Parameters. This menu window is therefore very similar to the single routing one.
Symmetry choice
Type of buttons
compensation

• Type of attack: these 4 buttons allow user to select amongst those available (vertical, with
junction loop on the left, with junction loop on the right). Selecting one type automatically
excludes any other one and to each type of attack is associated some default information so
that as soon as you select a type of attack, the associated default-information is automatically
proposed in the data chart. Follows a short description of the various attack modes:
- Vertical attack: the cutter moves above workpiece to the routing start point where it lowers
along the z axis to the programmed depth and it starts moving forward along the profile until
it has reached the start point again, where it vertically exits the wood again.
- Side attack: the cutter moves to a given point aside the routing start point, penetrates into the
wood then it moves forward along an arc of circle that connects the penetration point with the
routing start point (also called entry junction loop). Then it starts moving forward along the
profile until it has reached the start point again, where it exits the wood covering an arc of
circle (or exit junction loop) that is the mirror-copy of the previous one.

• Tool: it is the number assigned to the routing tool that will be used. The key to the left of the data
field, if pressed, allows you to specify the tool name instead of the tool number, while the key to the
right allows you to access a list of all tool currently available on the head, thus permitting selection of
the most suitable [Link] number displayed in this field may be set as a default parameter at routing
creation. Each time this value is changed, the fields defining the speed, the depth and the tool
compensation radius are updated accordingly. The junction loop radius is also modified, since it is
proportional, by default, to the radius of the tool being used to perform the routing work (see below).
• Tilting angle: this function is enabled only in case of tools being assembled on tilting spindles. It
allows setting the tool inclination with reference to the horizontal axis.
• Entry speed: it is the speed of the tool when piercing the wood.
• Working speed: it is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood.
• Speed of rotation: it is the tool revolving speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.
• Depth: it is the programmed working depth.
• Pass depth: if this value is set to zero, the cutter passes only once to perform the work; otherwise
the cutter will pass as many times as required to reach the set depth. If, for instance, the set depth is 10
mm and the pass depth is 3 mm, the produced ISO code will feature 3 passes with 3-mm depth each
and a last one with 1-mm depth.

Page247
MW310 – Project Windows

• Junction loop radius: if an attack with junction loop is set, this value determines the radius of
such junction, which shall have the shape of a semi-circle. Usually, this value is proportional, by a
factor that is set with the program default parameters, to the diameter of the tool to be used. Which
means that when the latter is changed, the former is also updated. It is anyhow possible to use a radius
whatever. The button located beside this field thus allows re-enabling it, in case it had been previously
disabled due to manual radius setting (see below).
• Symmetry choice buttons: these three buttons, which may be enabled all together if desired,
allow creating at once mirror copies of the machining being programmed, with reference to even all
three symmetry axes. If for instance you select only the first of the three buttons (symmetry with
respect to the X-axis), while programming a routing work, and then click on "OK", two cuts would be
created, one having the set values and the other being the mirror-copy of the first one, having
symmetric values with reference to the workpiece midline along the X-axis.
• Description: in this text box users may optionally enter a description of the routing work
being programmed.
• Sharp edges: if this button is enabled, the edges in the programmed profile will not be
blended, but will instead be cut as sharp edges.
• Compensation without junction: in ISO compilation, the K parameter is included in G41 and
G42 instructions to enable the compensation mode, which does not generate junctions outside the
compensated figure edges.
• Generate Q: If this checkbox is not selected, parameter Q will not be included in G41 and
G42 instructions and compensation will be carried out basing upon the tool radius only. If instead it is
selected, the compensation radius field will be enabled and the value it contains will be associated
with parameter Q for compensation.
• Compensation radius: If the Generate Q checkbox is selected, this field is also enabled and
will be used in working out the compensation radius, regardless of the tool radius value.
• Change of direction on symmetrical workpiece: if this checkbox is selected when a
workpiece is being executed in the machine symmetrical area, the routing direction will be inverted.
• Tool management for symmetrical workpiece: if this checkbox is selected, the data contained
in the fields it enables, the ones defining the tool and its speed of rotation, will apply whenever a
workpiece is being executed in the machine symmetrical field. Such fields take as default values the
one defining the tool set for routings in non-symmetrical areas and the same speed of rotation, with
opposite sign, set in the first data window.

After entering all above data, within this menu, you may select as many profiles as you wish and then
confirm by either clicking on "OK" or on "Next". The program will thus create as many routing works
as the number of profiles you selected, all having the same technological parameters. The only
possible attack in this mode is the vertical one. Routing works created by means of this command may
be modified afterwards, just as they had been individually programmed.
After setting all data, click on "OK" to create the routing works or click on "Cancel" to abort the
whole operation. In both cases the dialog box is disabled and the multiple routings button on the
control bar is re-enabled. The "Next" button produces the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the
advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on setting other routing works. Finally
please note that after routing works are created, new junctions, represented by routing-bit icons, are
also added to the machinings tree as "branches" of the current working face.
If the "Cancel" button is instead selected, all modifications are deleted and the machining will take
back on its previous values. As we've already mentioned, new routings more routings may be created
on the same workpiece. In case of overlapping machinings, you are shown the list of all the
machinings that were found in the point you selected by mouse clicking; you may thus choose the one
you want to display and/or modify.

Page 248
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.10Advanced modification of a machining

The last button of the control bar first set of keys allows to access some very helpful functions
aimed at operating more radical and sophisticated changes on the machinings than those possible
simply changing values in a data chart.

As explained before, a dedicated menu, activated by a click on the drawing with the right mouse
button, allows you to access some of these functions that we’ll now examine in details. When
pushing-in this button some selected machinings are de-selected and the advanced modification chart
is displayed as usual in the lower part of the screen. Now you may select more objects at once, either
clicking on them in succession (an object previously selected will thus be de-selected) or by means of
a selection window, which outlines are traced by means of the mouse and which includes all the
desired machinings.
The keys found on the upper edge of the chart are similar to a tool bar: indeed, each key is associated
a specific function that may be executed either with the mouse or with the keyboard, obviously used
to fill-in the various fields and activate the keys of the chart. With the aim of guiding user in his work,
the pertinent fields and keys are automatically enabled while those not inherent to the selected
function are disabled. Once you have completed the modification process, exit the advanced
modification page. The above-mentioned chart is now disabled, once again so to facilitate user’s steps.
All keys are initially disabled. But as soon as at least one machining is selected, they are activated
again. Important: not all keys are enabled for all types of machinings (if the relevant function is not
pertinent for this type of work) and if selecting more machinings of various types at once, only the
function keys that are compatible with all the selected machinings are enabled. E.g.: rotation cannot be
applied to a fitting work or a cut, but it can to aligned holes. Identically, symmetry with respect to a
straight line whatever or scaling do not apply to all machinings.
Proceed as follows: first select the machining(s) to modify, then click on the specific key to achieve a
given modification. Indeed, once a modification key was pushed-in no further machining can be
selected and be affected thereby.

[Link] Delete

Simply push-in to delete the selected machining(s). A prompt is displayed that asks user to
confirm deletion before proceeding, thus preventing accidental deletion or the removal of the wrong
machining.

Page249
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Relative motion

This key allows moving one or more machinings by a given offset (on X and Y axes) with
respect to its/their current position. This operation may be commanded either with the mouse or with
the keyboard.

[Link].1 Relative displacement with the mouse

Once you have pushed the “relative displacement” key shown above click on a point whatever of the
drawn machining to capture it. Now slide the mouse on its mat to drag the selected machining(s) on
the drawing up to the desired point, then drop it with a click of the mouse, thus confirming the
displacement made. In the data chart you can see the extent of the displacement displayed in the offset
fields.

[Link].2 Relative displacement upon value input in the chart

Pushing-in the above-shown key enables the offset on X and offset on Y fields. Will you enter a value
in those fields and confirm them by pressure of the “OK” button, automatically the concerned
machining is shifted by the entered value (e.g.: a machining at value 100 on axis X will be shifted to
value 500 on axis X if the entered offset on X value was 400).

[Link] Move to absolute value

This function allows you to move a machining up to a given point on the working face. Push-
in the illustrated key then select a point whatever on the current working face; all the selected
machinings shall be “hooked” to such point and shifted along a distance equal to the distance between
this point and the point whose co-ordinates are the X and Y values previously entered in the relevant
fields (that appear enabled). This function is very practical since once you have entered a given value,
when you select a point of a figure, you can move the latter to a very precise position on the working
face. As you can understand, this function requires both the use of the mouse and of the keyboard to
enter the destination point absolute co-ordinates.

[Link] Copy at relative values

This function is used in the same way as the relative motion function. The only difference is that
the selected machining(s) also remain in their original position and it is a copy thereof that is
created by a given offset (on X and Y axes) with respect to its/their original position. You can also
notice that the copy made is added as a new junction of the machinings’ tree.
[Link] Copy at absolute value
This function allows you to copy a machining in a given point on the working face. Push-in
the illustrated key then select a point whatever on the current working face; all the selected
machinings shall be “hooked” to such point and copied at a distance there from equal to the distance
between this point and the point whose co-ordinates are the X and Y values previously entered in the
relevant fields (that appear enabled). This function is very practical since once you have entered a
given value, when you select a point of a figure, you can copy the latter in a very precise position on
the working face. As you can understand, this function requires both the use of the mouse and of the
keyboard to enter the destination point absolute co-ordinates.
[Link] Rotate
This key is used to rotate a machining. This operation can be achieved either intuitively with
the mouse or filling-in the relevant fields in the data chart, which are the rotation center and the angle
with respect to axis X.

[Link].1 Rotate with the mouse

With a mouse click you choose the rotation center then you capture and drag the concerned machining
up to the desired inclination. The rotation occurs in real time and a mouse click will confirm the whole
procedure.

Page 250
MW310 – Project Windows
[Link].2 Rotate upon value input in the chart
Pushing-in the above-shown key enables the rotation center and inclination fields. Will you enter a
value in those fields and confirm them by pressure of the “OK” button, automatically the concerned
machining is rotated by the entered values.
[Link] Scale
Scaling of a machining requires a reference point (becoming the scaling center) and a scale
factor. The selected machining is then shifted to the entered reference point and scaled as per the
entered enlargement factor.

[Link].1 Scale with the mouse

With a mouse click you choose the scaling center then the final point. The farer the final point is from
the initial one, the bigger the scale factor is. You can see the machining being enlarged in real time.
Upon completion of the enlargement the distances previously selected with mouse clicks are
converted into values that appear in the relevant fields of the data chart.

[Link].2 Scale upon value input in the chart

Pushing-in the above-shown key enables the scaling center and scale factor fields. Will you enter a
value in those fields and confirm them by pressure of the “OK” button, automatically the concerned
machining is scaled in relation to the entered values. This function is very useful in those cases where
a direct graphic enlargement is not possible.
[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to the axes
These 3 buttons aim at creating mirror-copies of selected machinings with respect to the
Cartesian axes (only X, only Y, both X and Y), or better said with respect to the workpiece midlines
running along such axes. This function is available only in creation phase. Will you push-in one of
these keys and confirm upon key “OK”, a new machining is created in symmetric position, with
respect to the concerned axis/axes midline, to the original one. A new junction is created in the
machinings’ tree. Mouse is not required to achieve this operation.
[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to a straight-line
This function aims at creating mirror-copies of selected machinings with respect to a straight line
whatever.

[Link].1 Mirror-copy with the mouse

With a mouse click you choose the 2 extremities of the symmetry line and the creation of the mirror-
copy is automatic. Upon completion the co-ordinates of the symmetric copies appear in the relevant
fields of the data chart.

[Link].2 Mirror-copy upon value input in the chart

Enter the co-ordinates of the 2 extremities of the symmetry line then push key “OK”. The creation of
the mirror-copy is then automatic.

Page251
MW310 – Project Windows

10.4.11Turning geometrical elements into machinings

This command allows turning geometrical elements, which have either been created by
Masterwork or imported from external CAD programs, into machinings complete with
technological parameters. Particularly you may turn:

- circles into vertical holes;

- lines into horizontal, vertical or slanting groove-cuttings;
- rectangles into horizontal holes.
When you acces the data input table, all fields it contains are disabled and you may only use
the buttons located on the upper left-hand side of the window. These buttons allow you
selecting the kind of conversion you want to use, among the above-listed ones. According to
your choice, you will then be able to select one or moe circles, lines or rectangles - these
selections are all mutually exclusive-.

• Types of machinings: by clicking on these buttons you may choose the kind of boring or cutting
work you want to be performed (vertical or horizontal holes, groove-cutting along the X-axis, the Y-
axis or even a slanting one, with either of the available modes, that is to say through either the groove-
cutting end points or its length and angle with respect to the X-axis). According to the button being
pressed, the required fields will be enabled. The buttons relating to the groove-cuttings along the X or
Y-axis allow only selecting horizontal or vertical elements, while the buttons corresponding to the two
slanting groove-cutting modes allow selecting any segment. Please note that you may only select as
rectangles to be turned into horizontal holes, those having one of the sides adjacent to the upper face
edge.
• Type of drill: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the type
of drill to use (standard, countersinking, V-point or flat drill). Selecting one type automatically excludes
any other one and to each type of drill is associated the following default information: a slowdown
mode, a rotation speed, a diameter and two slowdown depths, set by user in the default-setting program.
So, as soon as you select a type of drill, the associated default-information is automatically proposed in
the data chart. Anyhow these values are not binding; user shall consider them as suggestions and may
change them any time, as he desires.
• Slowdown mode: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the
type of slowdown you want to apply when drilling the current hole. Selecting one type automatically
excludes any other one. To each type of slowdown is associated the following default information: the
rotation speed and slowdown depths, set by user in the default-setting program.
• Z coordinate: it is the hole value along the Z-axis
• Reference choice buttons: these buttons, located beside the hole value, indicate the type of
reference to workpiece with which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended as referred
to workpiece upper or lower edge, or to workpiece center. If you click on one of these buttons with the
left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt
to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the
new reference and the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the hole position changes.

Page 252
MW310 – Project Windows

• Depth: it is the hole or grooving-cut depth. With horizontal holes, it is inferred by the
rectangle position and dimensions.
• Groove-cutting width: it defines the width of the set groove-cut. If theset tool has a smaller
thickness than this value, the generated ISO code will include several saw passings, up to
produce the required width.
• Larghezza del taglio: indica la larghezza desiderata per il taglio impostato. Nel caso l’utensile
impostato abbia spessore minore di questo valore, il codice ISO prodotto conterrà più passate
effettuate con la lama fino ad ottenere la larghezza richiesta.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood and it is
given in m/min.
• Velocità di lavorazione: indica la velocità con cui la lama si muove nel legno.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Saw tool: it is the code number of the tool being used for the machining, Ifhe button located on
the left of the textbox is pressed, it means that you want to indicate the name of the tool instead
of its number. The button on the right, instead, displays the list of all the available tools for that
head, so that you may select the most appropriate one. Usually, when a new groove-cutting is
being generated, this field is automatically filled by the program that searches for the first
available saw on the head and enters its ID number code. If there’s no saw, an error message
will be displayed.
• Rotating speed: it is the tool rotatine speed given in thousands of rpm.
• Diameter: it is the diameter of the drill being used, that is to say the hole diameter.
• Diameter enabling: it enables the fields where the diameter value may be entered. If this check
box is enabled, all selected circles will be turned into holes having the same diameter, which
corresponds to the set value; if it is disabled, each hole will have the diameter corresponding to
the circle it has been generated from.
• Drill tool: it is the number code of the tool being used for boring. If boring optimization is
enabled, this field is ignored and has np effect. If the button located on the left of the box is
pressed down, it means that you want to specify the name of the tool, instead of its number The
button on the right, instead, displays the list of all the available tools for that head, so that you
may select the most appropriate one.

Once data input is completed, clicking on “OK” or “Next” produces a number of machinings
corresponding to the number of selected elements and having the same technological parameters they
have. If you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. The "Next" button produces the same
effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on
transforming other elements. Finally notice that, after machining creation, new junctions, represented by
a vertical drill, have been added to the machining tree as “branches” of the current working face.

Page253
MW310 – Project Windows

10.5 CAD

The CAD section of Masterwork includes all basic functions for drawing and thus creating geometric
objects (polylines) on a workpiece. Actually all drawings produced with the CAD tool are polylines,
i.e. objects that are made up of segments (and with this term we call both straight segments and curved
lines) and vertices. After their creation these polylines can be used as profiles to be routed if the CAD
file is turned into a machining file, as explained in the previous section.
The drawing functions are accessed upon the second set of keys of the control bar found on the right
side of the screen. Each of these keys, upon its pressure, opens a specific data chart that user will fill-
in, thus producing the requested drawing (or part of it). Just as with the Interactive program, with the
CAD program user can create and draw new polylines and modify existing polylines. Now let us see
these tools in details!

10.5.1 Drawing polylines

The first button of the page dedicated to drawing functions (see figure underneath) allows user
to carry-out guided construction of new polylines. The data chart is zero-set in real time and user can
immediately enter the polyline first point co-ordinates.

• Polyline first point co-ordinates: X0 and Y0 are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the
first point position, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in on
the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the drawing.
When you enter in these fields the co-ordinates of the end point of a previously created polyline, the
next steps will be a prolongation of the old polyline, insofar as any new segment will be appended
there.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons aside the first point co-ordinates fields indicate the type
of reference to workpiece with which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended
referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece midline axes. If you click on one of these buttons with the
left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to
adapt to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you
set the new reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the polyline first
point position changes.
• Depth: it is possible to associate every vertex of a polyline a specific depth. In this case the
general routing depth will not apply to such vertex that, on the contrary, shall be routed at the specific

Page 254
MW310 – Project Windows
depth entered for this vertex. Before keying-in any value in this field, it is necessary to enable it
ticking off the box aside.
• Enable Z value: Tick off to enable the input of a specific routing depth for a vertex. You can then
key-in a specific depth at which to rout only the concerned vertex, independently from the general
routing depth entered.
The routing start point can be entered either upon the keyboard, filling-in the relevant fields of the
data chart, or by a mouse click on the drawing. It is necessary then to click on “OK” to confirm the
data input or to double click on the workpiece drawing, in the desired position. A new chart is
displayed that contains all the available CAD functions. From this moment, when moving the mouse
on workpiece, a dotted line (whose form may vary, as we’ll see in the following) will constantly
connect the mouse pointer to the last entered point. This feature allows user to add new elements to
the existing polyline in an even easier and intuition-based way while recalling him that the final point
of the last set segment is the start point of the new appended segment.

• X1 and Y1 co-ordinates: are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the last point of a
segment or an arc of circle (but in case of arcs defined by 3 points, these are the co-ordinates of the
intermediate point), expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in
on the keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the
workpiece drawing.
• X2 and Y2 co-ordinates: are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the last point of a arc of
circle defined by 3 points, or of the center of an arc (in the which case they become “Cx” and “Cy”),
expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in on the keyboard or
entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece drawing.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons aside the first point co-ordinates fields indicate the type
of reference to workpiece with which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended
referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one
of these buttons with the left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value
entered changes to adapt to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right
mouse button you set the new reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the
concerned point position changes.
• Absolute/relative value buttons: Enable the relevant buttons marked with the symbol “∆” to turn
the input co-ordinates (in mm/inches or degrees) into relative values, i.e. as referred to the last vertex
(for metric/imperial values) or the last segment (for angles).
• Segment length: field in which to enter a segment’s length.
• Radius: field in which you may enter the radius of an arc for those functions that require this
information.
• Angle: field to use to enter the inclination degree as well of segments and of arc tangents.
• Arc width (or central angle): field to use to enter the width of the angle in the center of an arc, if
required.
• Depth: it is possible to associate every vertex of a polyline a specific depth. In this case the
general routing depth will not apply to such vertex that, on the contrary, shall be routed at the specific
depth entered for this vertex. Before keying-in any value in this field, it is necessary to enable it
ticking off the box aside.
• Enable Z value: Tick off to enable the input of a specific routing depth for the last vertex of the
current segment. You can then key-in a specific depth at which to rout only the concerned vertex,
independently from the general routing depth entered. It is possible to associate every vertex of a
polyline a different depth. In this case, when turning the profile into a routing, the general routing
depth will apply only to the vertices for which no specific routing depth was entered, while the others
shall be routed at the specific depth entered. The machining will therefore be performed with a linear
interpolation on axis Z between vertices at various depths.
• “Next” button: allows to confirm the data entered on the current polyline element and to go on
with the polyline construction appending a new segment on its extremity. If drawing with the mouse
this key is useless (the “next” command is automatic).

Page255
MW310 – Project Windows

• “Stop” button: confirms the data entered on the current polyline element and terminates the
polyline construction with the last segment or arc entered before push-in this key, while the data chart
is disabled.
• “Cancel” button: disables the data chart after deletion of the last entered segment or arc. Was the
polyline made up of one element only, it is completely removed.
The data input chart is very similar to the one used to create machinings: a tool bar in the upper part
allows to select the type of element to add to the polyline (arc or linear segment) and with what type
of data (e.g. an arc may be constructed defining either 3 points, or the 2 extremities and the center, and
so on). Each of these buttons enables only the necessary fields. In this case too, data may be entered
either directly with the mouse on the workpiece drawing or keyed-in upon the keyboard.
After every new entry you must press the “Next” command or, whenever you want, the “Stop”
command: the only difference is that when pushing-in the “Next” button you save the information
entered until then and you can go on adding elements to the current polyline while when pushing-in
the “Stop” button you save the information entered until then and terminate, because no further
element my be appended and the data chart is no longer accessible. Remember that you may also
terminate a polyline with a mouse double-click and that if setting as last point of a segment the first
point of the polyline, the latter is automatically closed and terminated. Also mind that the depth at
which to rout the final extremity of a segment must be entered before confirming with “Next” or
“Stop”.
[Link] Segment defined by 2 points
This is the default mode proposed when opening the program. It allows adding a new segment to
the polyline upon indication of its final point (the initial point corresponds to the final point of the last
entered segment). If working with the mouse, simply click on the desired point and the dotted line
(called rubber) becomes a plain line that evidences that a segment was created and a new one may be
appended. If you prefer to enter the final point co-ordinates manually, key them in so that the
appendage is created and push-in key “Next” to confirm and allow the next input. If pushed-in, the
key with symbol “∆” indicates that the entered values are referred to the last entered point and not to
the axes origin, i.e. that the entered values are relative.
[Link] Tangent segment
This key allows adding to the polyline a new segment that is tangent to the previous one on the
common point. This function is disabled if the last entered segment is NOT an arc. The
construction rubber shows that it is necessary to enter only the final point of this new segment,
because its direction is given by the condition of tangency to the previous arc. Said end point may be
entered either with a mouse click or you may key-in the segment length manually in the chart. Once
again, the “Next” command function is implicit when working with the mouse whereas it is necessary
to press such button when using the keyboard to manually enter some data.
[Link] Segment defined by length and inclination
Another possibility to construct a segment is to specify its length and inclination. If key with
symbol “∆” is pushed-in, then the entered angle is referred to the previous segment slant (or to the
previous arc tangent) and not to the axes origin. The angle is deemed positive if developing to the
right, otherwise it is negative.
[Link] Arc defined by 3 points
An easy method to construct an arc is basing it on 3 points: the initial, the final and an intermediate
point whatever. In this case too you may proceed using the mouse and clicking first on the chosen
intermediate point then on the arc end point, where you also benefit on the real time representation
of the arc thus created. You may also enter these points’ co-ordinates upon the keyboard then push-in
the “Next” key made by the rubber. If key with symbol “∆” is pushed-in, then the entered values are
referred to the previous segment end point (which also is the actual arc start point) and not to the axes
origin.
[Link] Tangent arcs
This key allows adding to the polyline a new arc that is tangent to the previous element on
the common point. The construction rubber shows that it is necessary to enter only the final point of
this new segment, because its direction is given by the condition of tangency to the previous element.
Said end point may be entered either with a mouse click or you may key-in its co-ordinates manually
in the chart. In the latter case it is necessary to press “Next” to be able to go on with the construction
of the polyline.

Page 256
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Arc defined by end point and tangent on the start point
This key allows drawing an arc based on the final point and the slant of the tangent running
through the start point. If proceeding with the mouse, first fix the final point then move the mouse on
its mat to shape the arc as desired with the rubber (the arc being anchored at both extremities, you
only have to decide the curvature). Or you may enter with the keyboard the end point and angle values
in the respective fields of the chart then press “Next” to be able to go on with the construction of the
polyline, or “Stop” to terminate.
[Link] Arc defined by end point and center
This key allows drawing an arc of circle based on the final point and the center. As usual you can
operate with the mouse clicking first on the final point then on the circle center on the workpiece
drawing or you may enter with these points’ values upon the keyboard then press “Next” to be able to
go on with the construction of the polyline, or “Stop” to terminate.

[Link] Arc defined by end point and radius

This function is basically identical to the last one described (also the construction rubber is
the same): the only difference is that you choose as second data to enter the circle radius instead of its
center co-ordinates. If using the mouse proceed as above explained, if filling-in the chart upon the
keyboard enter the radius length in the second field then press “Next”.

[Link] Arc defined by end point and width

This function is basically identical to the last ones described (also the construction rubber is
the same): the only difference is that you choose as second data to enter the arc width. If using the
mouse proceed as above explained, if filling-in the chart upon the keyboard enter the arc width in the
second field then press “Next”.

[Link] Arc defined by center and width

The data to enter is the arc center co-ordinates and width. If proceeding with the mouse, first fix
the center then move the mouse on its mat to set its width following the rubber (and thus, implicitly,
the arc end point). Or you may enter with the keyboard the arc center and width values in the
respective fields of the chart then press “Next” to be able to go on with the construction of the
polyline, or “Stop” to terminate.
[Link] Arc defined by radius, initial tangency and width
This key allows adding to the polyline a new arc based on its center, the slant of the tangent
running through its start point and the width of its central angle. If proceeding with the mouse first fix
the center then move the mouse on its mat to set the inclination of the dotted segment running
between the start point and the mouse pointer: this will be the initial tangent. Finally rotate the dotted
segment running between the mouse pointer and the arc center to set the width. Or you may enter
these values in the data chart upon the keyboard, remembering as usually that if key with symbol “∆”
is pushed-in, then the entered values are relative (or absolute if this key is out). Then press “Next” to
be able to go on with the construction of the polyline, or “Stop” to terminate.
[Link] Polyline symmetry
These 3 keys interrupt the polyline construction process seen up to this stage and
introduce a new prolongation modality. Indeed, will you push one of them in, the dotted line that
connects the mouse pointer with the last vertex is cut off and the appending new segments (or arcs)
modality is disabled. Will you now select one of the polyline open extremities you can prolong such
polyline appending there its mirror-copy with respect to the axis shown on the key itself, or to both
Cartesian axes. The symmetry type is chosen upon those 3 keys or with the PgUp and PgDn keys.
Will you choose another time the symmetry direction, you can mirror-copy the new polyline thus
obtained by pressure of key “Next”, and so on. If during one of these subsequent processes of mirror-
copy of always-longer polylines it should happen to close itself (a polyline, even if complex, often
happens to close itself through symmetric duplication), then it cannot be further prolonged and the

Page257
MW310 – Project Windows
“Next” key is therefore effect less. At this stage you can also push-in key “Stop” to save the drawing
made and completely exit the polyline construction menu.

10.5.2 Drawing rectangles

This key allows constructing very easily and quickly a rectangular closed polyline with either
sharp or rounded angles. This latter characteristic is selected upon the two keys in the left upper
part of the chart, pushing-in the key displaying a rectangle with sharp corners or the one showing
a rectangle with rounded corners.

• X1 and Y1 co-ordinates: are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the rectangle first
vertex, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in upon the
keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece
drawing.
• X2 and Y2 co-ordinates: are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the rectangle second
vertex (opposite to the first one). These co-ordinates may be keyed-in upon the keyboard or with a
mouse click in the desired position on the workpiece drawing.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons aside the co-ordinates fields indicate the type of
reference to workpiece with which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred
to workpiece edges, or workpiece midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these
buttons with the left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered
changes to adapt to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse
button you set the new reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the
concerned point position changes.
• Junction loop radius: in case the constructed rectangle has rounded corners, this parameter
indicates the curvature radius to apply to the four vertices.
To create a new rectangle, simply fix the extremities of a diagonal thereof (either with mouse clicks or
entering their co-ordinates with the keyboard). Press key “OK” to confirm only if operating with the
keyboard. Remember that once a rectangle has been drawn, you may go back to it for possible
modifications, just as it happens with other polylines.

Page 258
MW310 – Project Windows

10.5.3 Drawings circles and ellipses

Just as for rectangles, this key allows to construct very easily and quickly circular or elliptic
closed lines, which drawing with traditional tools is rather difficult. Will you press on this key;
automatically the chart hereunder is displayed. You may then choose upon the two keys in the left
upper part of the chart whether to create a circle or an ellipse.

• Cx and Cy co-ordinates: are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the circle or ellipse
center, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in upon the
keyboard or, only for circles, entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on
the workpiece drawing.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons aside the co-ordinates fields indicate the type of
reference to workpiece with which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred
to workpiece edges, or workpiece midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these
buttons with the left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered
changes to adapt to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse
button you set the new reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the
concerned point position changes.
• Circle radius: is the radius of the circle to draw (only circles).
• Semi axis along X: is the length of the ellipse semi axis along axis X (only ellipses).
• Semi axis along Y: is the length of the ellipse semi axis along axis Y (only ellipses).
• Ellipse inclination: is the inclination, expressed in degrees, of the ellipse to draw with respect to
axis X. To set before the ellipse is drawn.
A circle may be drawn either using the data chart or the mouse: in the latter case you first have to fix
the center then to shift the mouse externally to set the circle radius. As usually press key “OK” if
entering the required data upon the keyboard. As a result a polyline made up of two symmetric arcs
with common extremities and center is created, i.e. a circle.
On the other hand an ellipse can be created only using the data chart and NOT GRAPHICALLY.
Enter the required information in the concerned fields and confirm upon key “OK”. As a result a
polyline made up of more arcs joined together is created, whose final shape is approximately an
ellipse. The number of single arcs it includes mainly depends on the semi axes dimensions. Are the 2
semi axes identical, obviously the final result is a perfect circle made up of only 2 arcs. Remember
that once a circle or an ellipse has been drawn, you may go back to it for possible modifications, just
as it happens with any other polyline.

Page259
MW310 – Project Windows

10.5.4 Copy polyline with offset

The offset function allows reproducing a given polyline (whether open or closed) in a different
position that is parallel and aligned with the original one. So closed polylines generate new closed
polylines, with the same shape but proportionally larger or smaller, and all concentric, while open
polylines generate other open polylines, all on the same side.

• Offset pitch: is the distance between two polylines, one of which is the original one and the
other one generated with this function.
• Change direction: this key, enabled only with open polylines, allows to decide on which side
of the original polyline to create the larger or smaller copies: thanks to the arrows displayed on the
polyline extremities user may thus see the direction in which the offset develops. You may also
change the direction entering a negative offset pitch. For closed polylines, is the value negative the
copies are drawn internally to the original one (and are always smaller), whereas if the value is
positive the offset runs externally and the copies are always larger.
• “Next” button: allows creating a new polyline at the set offset from the previous one.
• “Back” button: allows deleting the last copy generated.
Once you have selected the polyline to reproduce with an offset, enter the pitch and upon the direction
button (or with keys PgUp + PgDn) the offset direction. As explained above, the latter step is possible
only with open polylines. With closed polylines the offset usually develops outwardly, so to create
smaller copies internally you must give the pitch a negative value. Will you now press key “Next” a
new polyline is created at the given offset, and a new one again pressing the “Next” key again, and so
on until the available space is completely occupied (and the “Next” button is disabled). Will you press
key “Back” you remove the last created polyline, and the previous one again pressing the “Back” key
again, and so on until there is no other polyline to delete (and the “Back” button is disabled). Click on
“Cancel” to delete the last polyline and exit this function or click on “Stop” to exit this function.
Please note that a dialog box is displayed, allowing to abort the creation of highly complicated
polylines and offsets, which take a long time for their computation.

Page 260
MW310 – Project Windows

10.5.5 Polyline deformation

A polyline or part of it may be “hooked” (tied) to workpiece, therefore, if the dimensions of the
latter change, the bound polyline is consequently deformed. The illustrated key gives access to
this particular modification function. The dialog window displayed only contains a small tool bar
made up of 4 keys corresponding to the functions available to achieve a deformation.

The deformation applies to the portion of polyline (or to the complete polyline) included in the
rectangular selection box created with the mouse. This selection area shall contain specific points of
the polyline through which it is tied to workpiece edges or midpoint. These connection points along
each axis are referred to the maximum value of the selected polyline portion, the minimum value, the
start point co-ordinates and the end-point co-ordinates. Deformation is performed independently
along axis X and axis Y, in accordance with the workpiece dimensions variation and with the
references set for the above-mentioned specific points.

[Link] Set deformation

Once you have selected the polyline, you must indicate which part of it shall be subject to
deformation. Therefore create a selection box (clicking with the mouse on two opposite vertices
thereof) that contains the complete portion of polyline, or the entire polyline, which you intend to
deform.
The concerned polyline portion is then automatically enclosed in a rectangle whose dimensions are the
overall dimensions of the selected portion. The deformation basic points appear along the X and Y
axes of such rectangle, maximum four of them per side. Now you must define for only two of these
basic points the type of reference to the workpiece edges that characterize the deformation to perform.
This operation is made upon the reference choice buttons found aside the deformation basic points:
clicking on them with the mouse opens a dialog box that includes all the possible types of bonds
available for this specific vertex and along this specific axis, i.e. as well those related to workpiece
edge or center and the proportional bond (the segment which the selected extremity belongs to is made
proportional to workpiece dimension along such axis). Once you have set all bonds press key “OK” to
exit the deformation setting function and the deformed portion is displayed in a different color on the
workpiece drawing. Very important: it is not possible to modify a polyline that is subject to
deformation.

[Link] Modify deformation references points

Select the polyline portion (or the entire polyline) subject to deformation. The deformation basic
points appear together with the references to the workpiece edges that characterize the deformation.
Now you can select with the mouse the basic points references simply clicking on the keys that
represent such references. A dialog box is opened that contains the various types of references
amongst which you can choose the most suitable one.

Page261
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Remove deformation

This command is used to remove the deformation from the polyline portion (or the entire polyline)
that was subject to it. Simply select the concerned part with the mouse after you has pushed-in the
here-aside illustrated key.

[Link] Restore workpiece primary dimensions

When you command a deformation, the primary workpiece dimensions are automatically
memorized. With this key you can restore them so that workpiece turns to its primary look.

10.5.6 Advanced modification of a polyline

This button allows to access some very helpful functions aimed at operating more radical and
sophisticated changes on entire polylines (and not only on single segments thereof, a type of
modification that we’ll explain in the following of this guide). As usually the object to modify
must be selected before. You may also select more objects at once, either clicking on them in
succession (an object previously selected will thus be de-selected) or by means of a selection window
the which outlines are traced by user with the mouse and which includes all the desired polylines.

The keys found on the upper edge of the chart are similar to a tool bar: indeed, each key is associated
a specific function that may be executed either with the mouse or with the keyboard, obviously used
to fill-in the various fields and activate the keys of the chart. With the aim of guiding user in his work,
the pertinent fields and keys are automatically enabled while those not inherent to the selected
function are disabled. Once you have completed the modification process, exit the advanced
modification page. The above-mentioned chart is now disabled, once again so to facilitate user’s steps.
All keys are initially disabled. But as soon as at least one polyline is selected, they are activated again.
As you can see the above-illustrated chart is absolutely identical to that of the advanced modification
of machinings. Nevertheless, if accessed through the polyline advanced modification key, the chart
can be used only to modify POLYLINES.

[Link] Delete
Simply push-in to delete the selected polyline(s). A prompt is displayed that asks user to confirm
deletion before proceeding, thus preventing accidental deletion or the removal of the wrong
polyline.

[Link] Relative motion

This key allows moving one or more polylines by a given offset (on X and Y axes) with respect to
its/their current position. This operation may be commanded either with the mouse or with the
keyboard.

[Link].1 Relative displacement with the mouse

Once you have pushed the “relative displacement” key shown above click on a point whatever of the
drawn polyline to capture it. Now slide the mouse on its mat to drag the selected polyline(s) on the
drawing up to the desired point, then drop it with a click of the mouse, thus confirming the

Page 262
MW310 – Project Windows
displacement made. In the data chart you can see the extent of the displacement displayed in the offset
fields.

[Link].2 Relative displacement upon value input in the chart

Pushing-in the above-shown key enables the offset on X and offset on Y fields. Will you enter a value
in those fields and confirm them by pressure of the “OK” button, automatically the concerned polyline
is shifted by the entered value.
[Link] Move to absolute value
This function allows you to move a polyline up to a given point on the working face. Push-in the
illustrated key then select a point whatever on the current working face; all the selected polylines
shall be “hooked” to such point and shifted along a distance equal to the distance between this point
and the point whose co-ordinates are the X and Y values previously entered in the relevant fields (that
appear enabled). This function is very practical since once you have entered a given value, when you
select a point of a figure, you can move the latter to a very precise position on the working face. As
you can understand, this function requires both the use of the mouse and of the keyboard to enter the
destination point absolute co-ordinates.

[Link] Copy at relative value

This function is used in the same way as the relative motion function. The only difference is that
the selected polyline(s) also remain in their original position and it is a copy thereof that is created
by a given offset (on X and Y axes) with respect to its/their original position.

[Link] Copy at absolute value

This function allows you to copy a polyline in a given point on the working face. Push-in the
illustrated key then select a point whatever on the current working face; all the selected polylines
shall be “hooked” to such point and copied at a distance there from equal to the distance between
this point and the point whose co-ordinates are the X and Y values previously entered in the relevant
fields (that appear enabled). This function is very practical since once you have entered a given value,
when you select a point of a figure, you can copy the latter in a very precise position on the working
face. As you can understand, this function requires both the use of the mouse and of the keyboard to
enter the destination point absolute co-ordinates.

[Link] Rotate
This key is used to rotate a polyline. This operation can be achieved either intuitively with the
mouse or filling-in the relevant fields in the data chart, which are the rotation center and the angle
with respect to axis X.

[Link].1 Rotate with the mouse

With a mouse click you choose the rotation center then you capture and drag the concerned polyline
up to the desired inclination. The rotation occurs in real time and a mouse click will confirm the whole
procedure.

[Link].2 Rotate upon value input in the chart

Pushing-in the above-shown key enables the rotation center and angle fields. Will you enter a value in
those fields and confirm them by pressure of the “OK” button, automatically the concerned polyline is
rotated by the entered values.
[Link] Scale
Scaling of a polyline requires a reference point (becoming the scaling center) and a scale factor. The
selected polyline is then shifted to the entered reference point and scaled as per the entered
enlargement factor.

[Link].1 Scale with the mouse

With a mouse click you choose the scaling center then the final point. The farer the final point is from
the initial one, the bigger the scale factor is. You can see the polyline being enlarged in real time.
Upon completion of the enlargement the distances previously selected with mouse clicks are
converted into values that appear in the relevant fields of the data chart.

Page263
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link].2 Scale upon value input in the chart

Pushing-in the above-shown key enables the scaling center and scale factor fields. Will you enter a
value in those fields and confirm them by pressure of the “OK” button, automatically the concerned
polyline is scaled in relation to the entered values. This function is very useful in those cases where a
direct graphic enlargement is not possible.

[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to the axes

These 3 buttons aim at creating mirror-copies of selected polylines with respect to the
Cartesian axes (only X, only Y, both X and Y), or better said with respect to the workpiece
midlines running along such axes. This function is available only in creation phase. Will you push-in
one of these keys and confirm upon key “OK”, a new polyline is created in symmetric position, with
respect to the concerned axis/axes midline, to the original one. Mouse is not required to achieve this
operation.

[Link] Mirror-copy with respect to a straight-line

This function aims at creating mirror-copies of selected polylines with respect to a straight line
whatever.

[Link].1 Mirror-copy with the mouse

With a mouse click you choose the 2 extremities of the symmetry line and the creation of the mirror-
copy is automatic. Upon completion the co-ordinates of the symmetric copies appear in the relevant
fields of the data chart.

[Link].2 Mirror-copy upon value input in the chart

Enter the co-ordinates of the 2 extremities of the symmetry line then push key “OK”. The creation of
the mirror-copy is then automatic.

10.5.7 Modification of polyline segments

In this paragraph we’ll explain how to operate to modify a polyline not as a whole but acting on
the single segments and arcs it is made up of. Single segments are selected by a mouse click on
them. Once selected it is possible to perform on the segment the various modifications that are
displayed in the data chart automatically displayed:

• Displacement offset: do you wish to move a segment, select it with the mouse and enter in this field
the value of such displacement.
• Number of segments: this data is bound to the division command, insofar as you can specify there in
how many equal parts you want to divide the selected segment.

Page 264
MW310 – Project Windows

• Curvature radius: allows modifying the curvature of an arc entering the new radius.
• Multiple selection: Is this item ticked-off, the multiple selection is enabled, therefore it is possible to
select more segments at once (before operating any modification) clicking in succession on the
concerned segments. Was a segment already selected, a new mouse click de-selects (revokes). The
type of modification subsequently commanded would apply to all the selected elements that appear
highlighted. Remember that you may not select more than one segment at a time, unless they all
belong to the same polyline. If you select a vertex on the same polyline the previously selected
vertices belong to, the multiple-selection function is disabled.
• Shift keys: these keys allow you to move on a polyline and change the currently selected
segment (an operation that with the keyboard is achieved upon the PgUp and PgDn
keys). Is the multiple selection enabled, the current segment is added to the list of the
selected elements.

In this case too, with the aim of simplifying the use of the modification commands, once a command
key is pushed-in, the relevant modification is performed then the modification function is exited and
the input chart is totally disabled until a new segment or group of segments is selected, thus enabling
again the keys found in the upper part of said chart. Each of these keys has a specific function, as
explained hereafter. Remember that, with relation to the functions explained hereafter, the “OK”
button may be replaced by the “Apply” button, which may be used to produce the same effect as the
former without quitting the Modification of Polyline Segments function.

[Link] Delete segments

First select the segments you want to delete, then press on this key to actually cancel them. A
confirmation prompt is displayed. Will you confirm deletion, the selected elements are definitely
removed and the modification status is exited. Note that deleting one or more segments always has
the effect to open a polyline. Deleting all polyline segments is the same as deleting the whole polyline.

[Link] Move segments

First select the segments you want to displace, then press on this key to actually move them on the
workpiece face, still maintaining them connected to the rest of the polyline which they are part of.
As it goes with entire polylines, this operation may be commanded either with the keyboard -
entering the offset value in the relevant field and confirming them by pressure of the “OK” button - or
with the mouse - clicking on a point whatever of the segment to capture it and sliding the mouse to
drag the selected segment(s) up to the desired point, then drop it without any further confirmation. In
the data chart you can see the extent of the displacement displayed in the offset fields.

[Link] Division of a segment into equal parts

Once you have selected a segment, enter in this field the number of parts into which you want to
divide it, then confirm upon key “OK”. Just as the others described up to this stage, this command
may apply to more segments at once (whether linear or arcs).

[Link] Conversion of straight lines into arcs

This command allows you to set a curvature radius for a given segment defined by the two
extremities' co-ordinates: this function not only allows to change the curvature of an existing arc
but also to turn a straight line into an arc. Once you have selected the desired segment, push-in the
here-aside illustrated key and the program automatically proposes the minimum radius necessary to
create an arc running through the two vertices previously set. Should the entered radius be minor than
the suggested value, the arc (that appears as a semicircle) would be drawn with the minimum possible
radius. This command does NOT apply to more segments at once. In case the selected segment is an
arc of a circle, it will be immediately converted into a straight line.

Page265
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Change arc direction or reverse arc

This multiple-choice command allows you to replace the selected arc with one of the other three
possible arcs that run through the same extremities. Click on the button as many times as necessary
until the desired change is obtained, then confirm upon key “OK”.

10.5.8 Modification of polyline vertices

A polyline may be modified also acting on the single segments thereof. The functions we’ll see in
details in the following allow to change form, position or number of vertices. Push-in the here-
illustrated key to recall the vertex modification function. The data chart hereunder is displayed
and enabled to operate changes on the polyline vertices only.

• X1 and Y1 co-ordinates: when moving a vertex, these are the values respectively on axis X and Y of
the new position.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons aside the co-ordinates fields indicate the type of reference to
workpiece with which you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to
workpiece edges, or workpiece midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these
buttons with the left mouse button you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered
changes to adapt to such new reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse
button you set the new reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the
concerned vertex position changes.
• Depth: it is possible to associate every vertex of a polyline with a specific depth. In this case the
general routing depth will not apply to such vertex that, on the contrary, shall be routed at the specific
depth entered for this vertex. Before keying-in any value in this field, it is necessary to enable it
ticking off the box aside.
• Enable Z value: tick off to enable the input of a specific routing depth for the last vertex of the current
segment. You can then key-in a specific depth at which to rout only the concerned vertex,
independently from the general routing depth entered. It is possible to associate every vertex of a
polyline with a different depth. In this case, when turning the profile into a routing, the general routing
depth will apply only to the vertices for which no specific routing depth was entered, while the others
shall be routed at the specific depth entered. The machining will therefore be performed with a linear
interpolation on axis Z between vertices at various depths.
• Chamfer length: indicates the chamfer length to be applied to the selected vertices.
• Curvature radius: allows modifying the curvature radius to apply to the selected vertices.
• Multiple selection: Is this item ticked-off, the multiple selection is enabled, therefore it is possible to
select more vertices at once (before operating any modification) clicking in succession on the
concerned vertices. Was a vertex already selected, a new mouse click de-selects (revokes). The type of
modification subsequently commanded would apply to all the selected elements that appear
highlighted. Remember that you may not select more than one vertex at a time, unless they all belong
to the same polyline. If you select a vertex on the same polyline the previously selected vertices
belong to, the multiple-selection function is disabled.
• Shift keys: these keys allow you to move on a polyline and change the currently
selected vertex (an operation that with the keyboard is achieved upon the PgUp and
PgDn keys). Is the multiple selection enabled, the current vertex is added to the list of
the selected elements.

Page 266
MW310 – Project Windows
Some operations require first the selection of one or more vertices then the pressure of the desired
modification command key. Others are directly launched by pressure of the desired modification
command key that causes the data chart to appear so that user can directly enter the requested data and
confirm it by clicking on “OK” or on “Apply”. Others, at last, are actuated with the mouse only. First
the input chart is totally disabled (but the 2 keys on the right side that are explained here-under) until a
new vertex or group of vertices is selected, thus enabling again the keys found in the upper part of said
chart. Each of these keys has a specific function, as explained hereafter. Again the only difference
between the "OK" and the "Apply" button is that the latter allows confirming the entered data without
quitting the Modification of Polyline Vertices function.

[Link] Introduce new vertices

This function allows you to create a new vertex in a point whatever of a polyline, i.e. to divide in
two parts the segment the selected point belongs to. When pushing-in this key the cursor shape
changes to recall user that whatever point of the polyline that he will then select shall be transformed
into a new vertex. Once a point was selected a new mouse click allows exiting the function and
selecting a new point to transform, if any, or to confirm upon key “OK” and definitely quit.

[Link] Break a polyline on a given point

When pushing-in this key the cursor shape changes to warn user that whatever point of the polyline
that he will then select, the polyline shall be cut-off on this point and 2 different and separated
polylines are thus created. When using this command on an intersection of more straight segments
or arcs, all the concerned elements are opened. Once a point was selected a new mouse click allows
exiting the function but not the data chart, so that you may switch over to another function, if desired,
or confirm upon key “OK” and definitely quit.

[Link] Weld/blend overlapping vertices

This function allows constructing new polylines based on already drawn segments or other open
polylines. To do so, the necessary condition is that one polyline has a vertex that partially overlaps
a vertex of the other polyline (in the contrary case, you can create this situation either with the
polyline or segment moving functions seen before, or with the vertex moving functions explained
here-after). When this condition is fulfilled simply select one of the overlapping vertices by clicking
on: this causes the two vertices to blend together so that the two polylines are welded to each other.
Are the overlapping vertices the extremities of 2 open profiles, this automatically becomes a close
polyline. To abort and quit this function simply press again the corresponding button, which will thus
be de-selected.

[Link] Delete vertex with profile opening

This function allows you to delete a vertex from a polyline and break it. The final result is that the
polyline is divided into 2 different polylines on the point corresponding to the selected vertex. First
select the vertex, then press on this key to actually cancel it and break the polyline. You may repeat
this operation on other vertices after having selected them, one at a time. To exit this function press
key “OK”. From this function you can also directly switch over to another function. This function
does not apply to more vertices at once.

[Link] Delete vertex with profile closing

Differently form the previous one, this function allows you to delete a vertex from a polyline and
keep it closed. First select the vertex, then press on this key to actually cancel it and re-weld the
polyline. You may repeat this operation on other vertices after having selected them, one at a time.
To exit this function press key “OK”. From this function you can also directly switch over to another
function. This function does not apply to more vertices at once.

[Link] Move vertex

This command allows you to move a vertex to given absolute co-ordinates. First select the vertex
you want to displace, then press on this key to actually move it on the workpiece face. You’ll see

Page267
MW310 – Project Windows
that after pressure of this key all values and bonds related to the selected vertex are displayed in the
data chart, thus permitting user to know the exact situation of said vertex before the modification. Its
motion may be commanded either with the keyboard - entering the absolute co-ordinates of the new
position and confirming them by pressure of the “OK” button - or with the mouse - clicking on the
destination point of the selected vertex, an operation that can be repeated as many times as wanted as
long as you don’t exit this function. This function may apply to more vertices at once. The first
selected vertex shall move to the programmed position and the others shall follow it maintaining the
distances between them unaltered. When operating with the mouse it is also possible to move different
vertices with the shift keys found in the lower part of the chart (you cannot use the mouse because its
function is to fix the coordinates of the destination point).

[Link] Round vertex

This function allows you to round the vertices of a polyline, i.e. to transform the sharp edges into
rounded corners by application of a given rounding radius. First select the concerned vertex (or
more vertices with the multiple selection mode) then press this key and enter the desired radius
value. Finally confirm upon key “OK” so that all the selected vertices are rounded with the entered
curvature radius and this function is exited.

[Link] Chamfer vertex

This function is similar to the rounding function but it transforms sharp corners into chamfered
edges. First select the concerned vertex (or more vertices with the multiple selection mode) then
press this key and enter the desired chamfer length. Finally confirm upon key “OK” so that all the
selected vertices are chamfered as programmed and this function is exited.

10.5.9 Automatic Polyline Creation

This function has two applications: besides allowing the conversion of circles imported
from DXF files into circular polylines - each path, in order to be routed, has to be a
polyoline -, it has also an automatic feature for making one single polyline out of several
segments of a polyline and/or lines - imported from DXF files-, with very close or even
superimposed vertices. Both operating mode are fully automatic: according to the element that you
select by means of your mouse - a circle or a segment - this function will produce either conversion.

[Link] Turning a circle into a circular polyline

This function allows turning a circle element that has been imported from a DXF file into a closed
circular polyline, where you may even add a routing work. In order to do so, you simply need to
click on the button shown here above - which stays down and may be pressed again to end this
operation - and select the circle you wish to convert. Each time you click on a circle, the program
produces a closed circular polyline. By clicking on the workpiece, outside the circles, you will
instead end conversion.

[Link] Automatic polyline construction

If you select a segment, instead of a circle, teh program will assume you intend to make a polyline
out of one or more closeby segments - after importing several elements from a DXF file or after
performing CAD program operations such as cutting a polyline st intersecton points with other
ones-. An automatic algorithm, in fact, starting from the selected segment and following its
direction, will search for any segments that might be appended to the current one and will blend
them in a sequence. In caso of branching-off, the user will be asked to chooseeans of the Page up
and Page down keys, in which direction he/she wants to proceed - the candidate segment for
polyline continuation is displayed in a different color- and to confirm selection by clicking on the
workpiece. At the end of the creation process - if it's not possible to go on the algorithm tries going
through the polyline in the opposite direction for blending further segments- users are asked
whether they want to append another polyline or to end creation process. If the last polyline segment

Page 268
MW310 – Project Windows
ends on the first one, a closed polyline will be directly created and the algorithm will automatically
stop after informing users.

10.6 VIEW
In this section we shall examine all the MasterWork functions aiming at the visualization and
analysis of a project. These functions are usually used in a second moment, after the creation of the
project (whether machining or polyline) but thanks to keyboard shortcuts it is possible to recall most
of the featured viewing functions already in construction phase.
The viewing functions are accessed upon the third set of keys of the control bar found on the right side
of the screen. Differently from the first 2 sets, most of these keys are not associated to a data chart but
are direct function keys. Now let us see these tools in details!

10.6.1 Zoom in

This function allows magnifying a project so to be able to analyze it with major precision. When
pushing-in this self-latching key the cursor shape changes to warn user that the current modality
is the “zoom in” function. At this stage, each mouse click will produce an always major
enlargement of the drawing according to a scale factor that user will have previously set as a default-
parameter. Therefore the drawing is reproduced at a smaller scale and centered on the point where you
did click with the mouse, thus creating the effect of the drawing moving closer to user’s eyes. To exit
this function simply click again on the key, that comes up while cursor’s shape turns the usual one.
During a profile or machining construction you may recall the “zoom in” function upon
contemporaneous pressure of the ‘Control’ and the ‘+’ keys on the small keyboard, once you have
pointed the cursor on the desired position.

10.6.2 Zoom out

This function allows reducing the drawing display. When pushing-in this self-latching key the
cursor shape changes to warn user that the current modality is the “zoom out” function. At this
stage, each mouse click will produce an always major reduction of the drawing according to a
scale factor that user will have previously set as a default-parameter. Therefore the drawing is
reproduced at a larger scale and centered on the point where you did click with the mouse, thus
creating the effect of the drawing moving away from user’s eyes. To exit this function simply click
again on the key, that comes up while cursor’s shape turns the usual one. During a profile or
machining construction you may recall the “zoom out” function upon contemporaneous pressure of
the ‘Control’ and the ‘-’ keys on the small keyboard, once you have pointed the cursor on the desired
position.

10.6.3 Reset zoom

This function allows to annul any enlargement or reduction of the drawing display previously
commanded and to bring it back to its primary scale factor (1:1) so that the workpiece drawing is
seen again in its wholeness (therefore the default scale factor varies in accordance with the drawn
workpiece dimensions). This button is not self-latching. This function can also be recalled upon
the F9 function key.

10.6.4 Zoom on window

This function allows magnifying only a rectangular portion of the project, which will thus occupy
the whole working area. When pushing-in this self-latching key the cursor shape changes to warn
user that the current modality is the “zoom on window” function. At this stage, you can draw with
the mouse a dotted rectangular area (click on the first vertex, drag, click on the second vertex)
that will automatically adapt so to occupy the whole display area. To exit this function simply click
again on the key, that comes up while cursor’s shape turns the usual one. No keyboard shortcut
available.

Page269
MW310 – Project Windows

10.6.5 Optimized zoom

This command allows zooming only on the area of the workpiece that is occupied by machinings
or polylines. The function automatically chooses the right scale factor to adapt such area (that
contains all the geometric elements and machinings created on the workpiece) to occupy the
whole working area on the screen. This button is not self-latching. This function can also be recalled
upon the F10 function key.

10.6.6 Whole screen display

With this non-self-latching button you command the workpiece drawing to occupy the whole
screen surface. Differently from the 2 previous commands, not only a portion of the workpiece is
magnified (but the entire drawing) and it does not occupy only the working area on the screen but
the whole screen, included the space normally occupied by the machinings’ tree and the tool bar.
This function can also be recalled upon the F11 function key, if available in the third set of keys (view
functions) of the control tool bar.

10.6.7 Display suction cups

Masterwork also features an advanced suction cups management program able to perform many
operations on the clamping suction cups positioned on the worktable, beneath the workpiece.
Such function proves particularly useful in case of through-borings works that could therefore
damage the suctions cups underneath. The program features tests on the position of the suction
cups’ supporting bars and holders and checks out that they will not collide. The here-aside illustrated
key allows you to enable the suction cups operation on the current tooling machine. The first
information requested is whether user prefers an initial arrangement in accordance to workpiece and
holders’ dimensions, or if he wants the suction cups to be positioned at the minimum X and Y values.
After the first arrangement the suction cups may anyhow be moved as desired upon the mouse, simply
dragging the supporting bars or the holders up to the desired position. You’ll see you cannot just move
the suction cups to any position whatever, because also during manual displacements the program
carries out the due collision tests and operates under consideration of the maximum X value which the
supporting bars may slide to as well as of the minimum Y value the suction cups’ holders may
assume. If, when loading a project constructed with a given suction cups’ configuration, the controls
made reveal a collision between supporting bars or suction cups’ holders, a relevant prompt is
displayed that explains how such problem shall be automatically shot off. In addition to manual
dragging, suction cups may also be positioned as follows: click with the right mouse button on a given
supporting bar or holder to open a dialog box in which user may enter its new co-ordinates (on X for
supporting bars and on Y for holders), the type of value entered (absolute or relative) and, for holders
only, the inclination of the suction cup
fitted hereon.
Will the new position thus commanded
(once confirmed by pressure of the
“OK” key) cause a collision, user is
warned thereof and the requested
motion is refused.

When suction cups are visualized the chart beneath is shown too:

Page 270
MW310 – Project Windows

Further to the “OK” key used to confirm the modification made and exit the function, it includes the
here-aside illustrated key that commands the shuttle operation, i.e. the possibility to arrange and
visualize only half or a quarter of the usable supporting bars (depending on the number of working
fields available on machine) and the others are then automatically arranged in symmetry. When
pushing-in this key once, only half the available suction cups are displayed. Has the machine four
working fields, if you push-in the key a second time the suction cups displayed are newly halved (i.e.
a quarter of the total number). With a third pressure of the key all the available suction cups are
visualized.

10.6.8 Working faces visualization

The program allows user to create drawings and machinings as well on the upper horizontal (i.e.
standard) workpiece face and on its 4 sides (or vertical faces). All these working faces correspond
to main junctions on the machinings’ tree. As seen in the previous chapters, some machinings
cannot be performed on the vertical faces (cuts, ...). This function key allows first of all selecting
the working face to visualize and on which to work; it also allows the interactive and three-
dimensional visualization of the whole workpiece, thus facilitating the comprehension on behalf of
user of the project totality and of the origin points on the various faces.

Page271
MW310 – Project Windows

The keys arranged under the letters ‘X’, ‘Y’ and ‘Z’ allow to rotate workpiece around the specified
axis of a number of degrees that is multiple of respectively 15 or 30. The “Reset” key allows setting
the workpiece position to zero, with respect to such axis. By each pressure of the desired key (+30,
+15, -15, -30) the three-dimensional drawing of workpiece is updated, i.e. rotated of respectively 30
or 15 degrees to the right or 15 or 30 degrees to the left. This function allows user to better figure the
arrangement of the various elements and machinings in the space. On each working face you can also
see the origin of the axes as used by the program in two-dimensional visualization and their
orientation.
Click on the working face list to select one of them, that is immediately displayed: click then on the
“OK” key to select such working face as the current one on which to work and thus close the here-
above shown dialog box.

Page 272
MW310 – Project Windows

10.6.9 Measure distances and angles

While analyzing or constructing geometric figures or machinings it is often necessary to know

the distance that runs between 2 points or the angle made by 2 segments. This function key
allows to very easily and precisely calculating such values. Push-in the here-aside illustrated
key to open the following data chart:

Differently from all the other data charts described in this guide, the present one does not allow to
input any value but only to read automatically surveyed values. The 2 buttons in the upper left part
allow selecting the measurement either of a distance or of an angle.

[Link] Measure segments

The default mode proposed upon the opening of the data chart is the measurement of a distance.
Simply click with the mouse on the two extremities of a segment to display in the chart its length,
its projection on the X and Y-axes and its angle with respect to the X-axis. Push-in key “Cancel” to
quit the measurement function.

[Link] Measure angles

Click on the relevant button on the left upper part of the chart to calculate the angle made by 2
segments, then follow up the steps suggested in the status bar. First select the vertex of the angle to
measure, then click on a point of the first segment and then on a point of the second segment (thus
entering as well the initial and the final angle requested by the prompts of the status bar). At this stage
you can read in the specific field of the data chart the width of the angle thus defined. Is the initial
angle major than the final one (the angle is calculated clockwise), then the width shall have negative
value. Push-in key “Cancel” to quit the measurement function.

Page273
MW310 – Project Windows

10.7 ADVANCED MACHININGS

10.7.1 Flange holes

Click on the aside-illustrated key to create on a workpiece a machining made up of vertical holes
arranged along a circle, called flange holes. Upon selection of this key the data chart is
immediately updated insofar as it will display all the necessary fields to program flange holes. The
first page displayed is the one titled “standard”, that contains the most frequently used (and changed)
data, whereas the second page, titled “advanced”, is dedicated to information less subject to be
modified by users.

Reference Symmetry
Types of drills choice choice
buttons Slowdown modes
buttons

• Type of drill: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the type
of drill to use (standard, countersinking, V-point or flat drill). Selecting one type automatically
excludes any other one and to each type of drill is associated the following default information: a
slowdown mode, a rotation speed, a diameter and two slowdown depths, set by user in the default-
setting program. So, as soon as you select a type of drill, the associated default-information is
automatically proposed in the data chart. Anyhow these values are not binding; user shall consider
them as suggestions and may change them any time, as he desires.
• Slowdown mode: these 4 buttons allow you to choose, amongst those available on machine, the
type of slowdown you want to apply when drilling the current hole. Selecting one type automatically
excludes any other one. To each type of slowdown is associated the following default information: a
rotation speed and two slowdown depths, set by user in the default-setting program.
• Flange center co-ordinates: X1 and Y1 are the values respectively on axis X and Y of the flange
middle point, expressed in the current measurement unit. These co-ordinates may be keyed-in on the
keyboard or entered graphically clicking with the mouse in the desired position on the workpiece
drawing.

Page 274
MW310 – Project Windows

• Reference choice buttons: these 6 buttons indicate the type of reference to workpiece with which
you want to operate, i.e. if the entered values are intended referred to workpiece edges, or workpiece
midline axes, or to machine zero point. If you click on one of these buttons with the left mouse button
you only set the new reference, therefore the numeric value entered changes to adapt to such new
reference; but if you click on one of these buttons with the right mouse button you set the new
reference but the numeric value entered remains unaltered, therefore the machining position changes.
• Radius: is the radius of the circumference along which the flanges holes are arranged.
• Start angle: is the angle made with respect to axis X by the line that runs through the flange
center and the first hole center.
• Depth: is the depth of the holes to drill.
• Diameter: is the diameter of the drill and therefore that of the holes.
• Entry speed: is the speed at which the tool rotates when it penetrates into the wood.
• Description: is the description, if any, of the programmed machining.
• Tool: is the number assigned to the tool to use to drill the holes. Is the boring optimization
enabled, this field is senseless and will not be considered. The key aside the tool number field allows
you, when the MW310 is active, to access the list of all tools currently available on the head, thus
permitting you to choose the most suitable one.
• Symmetry choice buttons: these 3 buttons (that may be selected all together if desired) allow you
to create simultaneously also mirror-copies of the programmed machining, where the symmetry axis is
the one shown on the selected button. Example: when creating a flange, should you push-in the first
button (symmetry with respect to axis X) then click on “OK”, two flanges are created, one of which is
exactly positioned as per the values entered and the other one being its mirror-copy, whose values are
symmetric with respect of workpiece midline along the X axis.
Once data input is completed, if you click on “OK” a series of holes arranged in circle is created on
the upper horizontal face or, if you click on “CANCEL”, the whole operation is aborted. In both cases
the dialog box is then disabled and the “flange holes” button on the control bar is re-enabled. The
"Next" button produces the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit
the table and that you may go on setting other flange holes. Important: if, in phase of creation, you
wish to drill more identical flanges on a single workpiece, instead of clicking on “OK” once the
procedure is completed, it is sufficient to double-click on the workpiece drawing in the position where
you want to create another flange. This command, if associated to an appropriate use of the boring
default parameters, allows you to create new machinings in the twinkling of an eye. Finally, have a
look on the machinings’ tree: you can see that once a flange was created, the tree has a new junction,
whose representation is a circle of holes, as a “branch” of the current working face.
When in selection mode (you understand it from the mouse cursor) you can capture a flange
machining to display its properties and modify them, if desired. So, to select a flange previously
created you may click with the mouse either on its drawing or on its icon created in the machinings’
tree. In both cases the machining color changes, the relevant junction on the tree is highlighted and the
dialog box we have described here above is displayed. Will you change some values, you can
immediately verify the effects thereof on the drawing even before confirming the modification made
with a mouse click on “OK”. Will you click on “Cancel” instead, the modifications made are annulled
and the previous data is restored. You can see that the symmetry choice buttons are disabled. Indeed,
they may be enabled only in creation phase. So should you wish to make a mirror-copy of an existing
machining, you must use specific commands of the advanced modification page, described further on.
At last we wish to recall you that vertical holes may be programmed only from the horizontal surface
(i.e. with the horizontal working face displayed during programming).

Page275
MW310 – Project Windows

10.7.2 Introduction of special figures (fitting grooves)

The term "figure" stands for any group of one or more machinings, being normally used to fit
hardware in (locks, bottom plates and so on). They may not be edited within the Masterwork
program, which would process them as unalterable and indivisible read-only objects. They are instead
created within the MW310 environment and stored in a library that is therefore loaded by Masterwork
and thus made available to users. During the editing process, the program will then recall the
dedicated figure machining ISO function.
The dialog box allowing to enter the data for figure input is displayed here below:
Symmetry
choice buttons Reference choice
buttons

• Symmetry choice buttons: they allow selecting the figure arrangement among four possible
positions.
• Figure number: it is the number identifying the figure, which may be selected among the
available ones. It may also be entered manually, that is to say without selecting it from the drop-down
list.
• Co-ordinates of the point of insertion: X1 and Y1 are the coordinates of the figure origin (any
kind of figure has one).
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons located beside the figure coordinates, identify the
selected type of reference to the workpiece, that is to say whether the displayed values are referred to
one of the workpiece edges or to the workpiece midline axes. If one of these buttons is selected by
left-clicking on it, only the hooking will be changed, while the numeric values will be updated to suit
the new reference. By right-clicking on one of them, instead, the hooking is modified but the numeric
values remain the same, which means that the figure position actually changes.
• Tool: it is the number assigned to the boring tool that will be used. The button located beside
the text box allows, when MW310 is running, accessing the list of all currently available tools for the
head and thus selecting the most appropriate one. The number displayed in this field, at routing
creation, may be set as a default parameter. If this is changed, the value in the speed field will also be
updated.
• Entry speed: it is the speed of the tool when piercing the wood.
• Working speed: it is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood.
• Speed of rotation: it is the tool revolving speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

After setting all data, click on "OK" to insert the selected figure on the current workpiece face or
click on "Cancel" to abort the whole operation. In both cases the dialog box is disabled and the
figures button on the control bar is re-enabled. The "Next" button produces the same effect as
clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on setting
other figures. Finally, please note that after a figure is created, a new junction, which is represented
by an icon corresponding to the selected type of figure, is also added to the machinings tree as a
"branch" of the current working face.
When you're in selection mode, you can tell by the mouse-pointing icon, you may select a figure to
display its properties and/or modify it. to do so, click on any part of the intended figure, this also
reminds you that a figure is to be considered as a whole, with no distinction between the different
parts comprising it. The selected figure will thus change in color, the corresponding junction will be
highlighted and the above-described box appears on the screen. This allows changing the machining
values and immediately displaying the effects of such modification on the workpiece, even before

Page 276
MW310 – Project Windows
confirming by clicking on "OK". If the "Cancel" button is instead selected, all modifications are
deleted and the figure will take back on its previous values.

10.7.3 Import ISO macros (subprograms)

ISO macros are essentially subprograms that are written by means of the MW310 integrated ISO
editor, which is made available through a conversion file with '.mac' extension. The ISO program
thus created will therefore contain a subprogram call with a reference to the file corresponding to
the inserted macro. Even ISO macros, just like figures, are to be considered as indivisible and
unalterable read-only elements.
The input box for ISO macro data is the following one:

• ISO macro name: the search function selects all files having '.mac' extension and displays the
description of the selected macro, beside the possible parameters it exports. Such parameters, if any,
are displayed in a grid located on the right of the data table.
• Co-ordinates of the point of insertion: X1 and Y1 are the values defining of the macro
origin's position, which, during the macro creation within the ISO editor, is assumed to be the same as
the machine axes' origin. Since, within MW310, the machine axes are located at the top and on the
left, the macro will still be referred to that corner within Masterwork as well. This means that it will
be displayed exactly in the same way as within MW310, only if its origin will correspond with the
upper left corner of the workpiece.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons located beside the ISO macro coordinates, identify
the selected type of reference to the workpiece, that is to say whether the displayed values are referred
to one of the workpiece edges or to the workpiece midline axes. If one of these buttons is selected by
left-clicking on it, only the hooking will be changed, while the numeric values will be updated to suit
the new reference. By right-clicking on one of them, instead, the hooking is modified but the numeric
values remain the same, which means that the macro position actually changes.
• Parameters grid: if the macro exports some parameters, the latter are displayed in a grid
containing, for each one of them, the relevant description, number, (‘#…’), as well as an empty box
where the value to be assigned to that specific parameter, within that given macro, is to be entered.
Therefore, for each raw on the grid there will be, within the edited ISO program and before the
subprogram call, as many assignments (‘#…=…’).

After setting all data, click on "OK" to insert the selected macro on the horizontal workpiece face or
click on "Cancel" to abort the whole operation. In both cases the dialog box is disabled and the ISO
macros button on the control bar is re-enabled. The "Next" button produces the same effect as clicking
on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on setting other macros.
Please note that macros may be inserted in the horizontal face only. During the editing process,
moreover, the program saves the current environment (working face and axes origin), previous to the
subprogram call, and restores it afterwards. Finally, please note that after a macro is created, a new
junction, which is represented by an icon corresponding to the selected type of figure, is also added to
the machinings tree as a "branch" of the current working face.
When you're in selection mode, you can tell by the mouse-pointing icon, you may select a macro to
display its properties and/or modify it. To do so, click on any part of the macro icon; this also reminds
you that a macro is to be considered as a whole, with no distinction between the different machinings
comprising it). The selected macro will thus change in color, the corresponding junction will be
highlighted and the above-described box appears on the screen. This allows changing the machining
values and immediately displaying the effects of such modification on the workpiece, even before
confirming by clicking on "OK". If the "Cancel" button is instead selected, all modifications are
deleted and the macro will take back on its previous values. Finally remember that macro shifts do not
affect the position of the horizontal holes and hinge sections that the macro itself could possibly

Page277
MW310 – Project Windows
include. Such machinings may, in fact, be displayed from the horizontal face but do not belong to it.
ISO macros, moreover, are not subject to advanced modifications (scale, rotate, etc..).

10.7.4 Creation of hollowed profiles

As it often happens, you may have to create hollows having particular shapes on one of the
workpiece faces. This function allows an optimized hollowed profile to be executed by a routing
bit after simply entering the geometrical properties of the profile itself. Possible hollowed profiles
include rectangles with rounded corners, circles and ellipses. The box shown here below displays all
the fields to be filled-in in order to define each of the above-mentioned profiles.

• Profile selection buttons: they allow selecting the type of hollowed profile to be executed,
thus enabling the required fields and disabling the unnecessary ones.
• X1 and Y1 coordinates: they define the values of either the first vertex of the rectangle or the
center of the circle and ellipse.
• X2 and Y2 coordinates: they define the values of the rectangle second vertex.
• Reference choice buttons: the 6 buttons located beside the coordinates, identify the selected
type of reference to the workpiece, that is to say whether the displayed values are referred to
one of the workpiece edges or to the workpiece midline axes. If one of these buttons is
selected by left-clicking on it, only the hooking will be changed, while the numeric values
will be updated to suit the new reference. By right-clicking on one of them, instead, the
hooking is modified but the numeric values remain the same, which means that the position
of the point actually changes.
• Circle radius: this field is used to set the radius of the circle to draw.
• Semiaxis along the X-axis it defines the length of the ellipse semiaxis being parallel to the X-
axis.
• Semiaxis along the Y-axis: it defines the length of the ellipse semiaxis being parallel to the
Y-axis.
• Ellipse inclination: it defines the slope angle, in degrees, of the ellipse that will be drawn to
the X-axis.
• Tool: it is the number assigned to the boring tool that will be used. The button located beside
the text box allows, when MW310 is running, accessing the list of all currently available
tools for the head and thus selecting the most appropriate one. Just as it happens with routing
works, the number displayed in this field, at hollowed profile creation, may be set as a default
parameter. Each time this value is changed, the fields defining the speed and the depth are
updated accordingly.
• Entry speed: it is the speed of the tool when piercing the wood.
• Working speed: it is the speed at which the tool moves in the wood.

Page 278
MW310 – Project Windows

• Speed of rotation: it is the tool revolving speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.
• Depth: it is the programmed working depth.
• Pass depth: if this value is set to zero, the cutter passes only once to perform the work;
otherwise the cutter will pass as many times as required to reach the set depth. If, for
instance, the set depth is 10 mm and the pass depth is 3 mm, the produced ISO code will
feature 3 passes with 3-mm depth each and a last one with 1-mm depth.
• Description: Short description of the machining.
• Junction radiuses: these values define the junction radiuses for the four vertices of the
rectangle hollow to execute.

After setting all data, click on "OK" to insert the selected hollowed profile on the current workpiece
face or click on "Cancel" to abort the whole operation. In both cases the dialog box is disabled and the
hollowed profiles button on the control bar is re-enabled. Pressing the "Next" button produces,
instead, the same effect as clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that
you may go on setting other hollowed profiles. Finally, please note that after a hollowed profile is
created, a new junction is also added to the machinings tree as a "branch" of the current working face.
In order to distinguish standard routing works from hollowed profiles or from the so-called "meeting"
figure, hollowed profiles are represented in a more realistic fashion, that is to say by its final-product
appearance, after processing (and therefore not by the mere external profile of the hollow).
When you're in selection mode, you can tell by the mouse-pointing icon, you may select a figure to
display its properties and/or modify it. This is possible by clicking on either the hollowed profile
itself or the corresponding junction of the machinings tree. The selected figure will thus change in
color, the corresponding junction will be highlighted and the above-described box appears on the
screen. This allows changing the machining values and immediately displaying the effects of such
modification on the workpiece, even before confirming by clicking on "OK". If the "Cancel" button is
instead selected, all modifications are deleted and the hollowed profile will take back on its previous
values. Remember that upon clicking on ”OK”, the NC checks all entered data are consistent and
makes sure the programmed hollow may actually be executed. The values given for the rectangle
vertices, for instance, may produce incompatible junction radiuses.

10.7.5 ISO instructions

With version 2,00 and above, ISO instructions may be introduced directly within the project, either
before or after a given machining. In order to do so, go to the machinings tree and right-click on it. A
pop-up menu will thus appear featuring the "Append ISO instruction" and the "Insert ISO instruction"
items. With the former the ISO instruction is inserted after the junction corresponding to the selected
machining and with the latter it is inserted before it. If the selected junction corresponds to a
workpiece face, only the first option will be available. In both cases the following dialog box will be
displayed.

The field located on the upper left of the window allows selecting the instruction to be inserted among
the available ones. If the instruction features one or more parameters, an equal number of text boxes
will also be displayed. The required ones will be marked by an asterisk, ‘*’, which means that such
fields must absolutely be filled-in in order to insert a syntactically correct instruction in the program.
Upon ISO instruction selection, users are also asked to provide a short description of the instruction
itself and its parameters, this in order to save users from searching for such information elsewhere.
After setting all data, click on "OK" to insert the selected ISO instruction on the current workpiece
face or click on "Cancel" to abort the whole operation. The "Next" button produces the same effect as
clicking on “OK”, with the advantage that you don't quit the table and that you may go on setting
other figures. Finally, please note that after an ISO instruction is introduced, a new junction, which is

Page279
MW310 – Project Windows
represented by an icon featuring the code of the selected instruction, is also added to the machinings
tree as a "branch" of the current working face.
When you're in selection mode, you can tell by the mouse-pointing icon, you may select an ISO
instruction to display its properties and/or modify it. This is possible by clicking on the corresponding
junction of the machinings tree (ISO macros do not have a visible graphical representation on the
workpiece). The corresponding junction will thus be highlighted and the above-described box appears
on the screen, which allows making all required modifications. If the "Cancel" button is instead
selected, all modifications are deleted and the ISO instruction will take back on its previous values.
When inserting ISO instructions, however, keep in mind that no check will be performed on either the
syntax or the final result in case of hole optimization. When this function is enabled, in fact, the holes
will not be bored in the same order as they are represented on the machinings tree, which causes
misalignment of the machinings and the ISO instructions. When inserting ISO instructions, users
should therefore accurately select their order or disable boring optimization. Whenever this function is
enabled and ISO instructions have been inserted in between boring works, the program will execute
the latter after boring the last hole.

10.8 GENERAL AND DEFAULT PARAMETER SETTING

This part of the program allows users to set and store in memory some general parameters’ values as
well as pre-defined values of given working parameters. The preset values will thus be automatically
proposed in the relevant fields of the data charts displayed in creation phase and users don’t have to
enter them manually each time they are requested, what spares a lot of time and facilitates the
procedure of creating new machinings. This part is accessed clicking on item “General default-
setting” within menu “Settings”: a dialog box contains all the possible settings in this application,
divided in thematic pages.

10.8.1 Project default-setting

In this page you can set all

default values related to project
general data: so each time a new
project is created, the here-
entered values are automatically
displayed in the data chart and
the here-set workpiece
parameters shall apply.
Nevertheless user can change
the project data any time, as
desired, thus customizing the
workpiece according to the
current requirements.
This page (see above
illustration) also features default
settings related to routing
works: the tool number should
be the code of the most frequently used cutter (also for trimming works). So, when creating a new
routing work this value already figures in the data chart and user doesn’t have to enter it each time.
The second routing default setting is the ratio between the entry radius (in case the attack is by means
of a junction loop) and the routing tool diameter: according to the here-set value, when changing the
type of cutter, you’ll always know the optimal entry radius for such specific tool. This feature
contributes to simplify and accelerate the programming of a routing since user has less data to enter.

Page 280
MW310 – Project Windows

10.8.2 General default-setting

The fields figuring in the here-

aside data chart are not related to
the currently loaded project but
directly to the program. In other
words, these are global
parameters.
The upper part of the chart
displays the values of some
parameters used for to modify
and visualize the drawing. The
snap values indicate the
sensitivity grade of the mouse
motion (i.e. the minimum pitch).
E.g.: should the set value be 5
mm as well on X and on Y, the
mouse can move along both axes
by “steps” of minimum 5 mm or multiples thereof but cannot go to intermediate positions.
The selection tolerance indicates, in number of pixels, the admitted tolerance in selection phase. E.g.:
is the set tolerance 10 pixels and you try to select an element clicking with the mouse pointer at a
distance of 7 pixels from the desired element, this is been captured all the same.
The zoom factor indicates the enlargement or reduction pitch by each new pressure of a zoom
command.
The rounding radius is the default value entered to round a vertex originally figured as a sharp corner
(see chapter related to vertex modification). As usually this is only a suggested value that can anyhow
be changed any time by user, as desired.
The chamfer length is the default value entered to chamfer a vertex originally figured as a sharp
corner (see chapter related to vertex modification). As usually this is only a suggested value that can
anyhow be changed any time by user, as desired.
[Link] Boring default-setting
This chart allows associating to every type of drill a series of preset values for some of its parameters,
such as diameter, depth, speed and slowdown type. These values are used to propose user a pre-filled
data chart each time he commands the creation of a new vertical boring work (being a single hole, a
fitting or flange holes). Let us see them in details and understand how user can employ them once set
as default values.
MasterWork is presently configured for 4 different types of drills: standard, countersinking (with
wider base), V-point (for through-borings) or flat (for holes with very large diameter).
First of all it is possible to associate to each type of drill a given diameter. Best thing is to enter for
each type of drill the diameter of the most frequently used tool.
It is also possible to associate to each type of drill a boring depth that shall be determined in
accordance with the use normally made with each of them.
The third column is dedicated to the preferred slowdown type
for each type of drill: no slowing-down, slowing-down when
perforating the upper surface, slowing-down when perforating
the bottom face, slowing-down when perforating both the upper
and the lower horizontal faces). To select a slowdown type,
double-click with the mouse on the concerned slowdown field
thus causing the list of the possible slowdown types to be displayed (see here-aside). When selecting
one of these with the mouse, the list automatically disappears and the relevant field in the data chart is
immediately updated accordingly.
In addition to the slowdown type you must specify the depth up to which such slowdown shall be
maintained.

Page281
MW310 – Project Windows
Finally enter in the last 2 columns the drill working speed and the slowed down speed used during
workpiece perforation (if any).
Now the chart is completed and the values it contains shall be automatically displayed and shall apply
(unless user enters different values in creation phase) every time user selects a drill. If filled-in
rationally, this default-setting chart may reveal a very clever tool thanks to which programming new
borings becomes a very easy game.
At last we wish to precise that the entered diameter, “quick” speed, depth and slowdown type values
are only suggestions that appear in the boring data chart and they may be modified as user desires.
The parameters related to slowdown (“slow” speed, upper or lower depth along which the slow speed
is maintained) do not appear in any chart and can therefore be modified only from this page. These
parameters are indeed usually bound with workpiece dims and characteristics, therefore they do not
need to be changed for any type of boring.

10.8.3 DXF default-setting

As seen with the TED files,

also DXF files, that contain
machinings, refer to default-
settings in case the necessary
data to convert geometric
elements into machinings is not
complete in the file itself. But
differently form TED files,
those with .DXF extension
(saved with the necessary
information to perform
machinings) can be directly
created with standard programs
such as AutoCAD. While in
TED files technological
parameters are stored in fields
usually used for other
purposes, the DXF format
allows the use of fields specifically created for the management of machinings (fields 8 and 39).

As you can see on the here-aside chart, also in DXF format you may set default values to balance the
lack of specific information on machinings (saved as geometric elements): specifically you may set a
default value for the working speed, the selected measurement unit for DXF files in which it is not
specified, the tools table associated with such DXF project and so on.

Page 282
MW310 – Project Windows

10.8.4 TED default-setting

The TED settings page is made

up of 5 options. Click on one of
them to display the list of
default settings that are
necessary to convert the
geometric elements of a TED file
(Tecnos Extended DXF): this is
a kind of extension of DXF files
that contains extended data
aiming at converting into
machinings the geometric
elements stored therein. The
extended data in TED files refers
to those technological
parameters that are necessary to
interpret a geometric figure as a
machining. Does the program
not find such extended data
inside the TED file, it withdraws it out of the default-setting page. Each type of machining is
associated with a specific set of parameters displayed in a specific chart, as we’ll see in the following.

[Link] General default-setting

These are the default parameters related to project general data.

It is necessary to indicate the type of tooling machine in the first field, since MasterWork works
only in combination with the MW310 application program.
The value to enter in the field aside “Inches” is 1 in case you intend to set the imperial system as
default measurement unit for TED files or enter 0 if you intend the metric system as default.

Page283
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Boring default-setting

These values are attributed to every

circumference contained in a TED file,
which is interpreted as a vertical hole, in
case the relevant extended data is not
specified. Please note that the rotation
speed is expressed in thousandths of
laps per min and must be an entire
number without decimals.

[Link] Cutting default-setting

These values are attributed to every straight line contained in a TED file, which is interpreted as a
cut on the horizontal surface, in case the relevant extended data is not specified. Please note that the
rotation speed is expressed in thousandths of laps per min and must be an entire figure without
decimals.

Page 284
MW310 – Project Windows

[Link] Routing default-setting

These are the technological parameters attributed to all geometric elements (but circumferences, that
are interpreted as vertical holes), contained in a TED file, in case the relevant extended data is not
specified.
Admitted compensation values are ‘0’, ‘1’, or ‘2’, commanding respectively no compensation,
compensation on the left or compensation on the right.
Please note that the rotation speed is expressed in thousandths of laps per min and must be an entire
figure without decimals.

[Link] Indexed boring default-setting

These are the technological parameters attributed to a rectangular geometric element, that is
interpreted as an indexed hole, contained in a TED file, that are to be fixed in case the relevant
extended data is not specified or partially missing.

Page285
MW310 – Project Windows

10.8.5 Defining tool names

Masterwork allows specifying the type of tool that will be used for each machining, both as code
number - corresponding to its position inside machine head - and as an alias, that is to say a free
name that is univocally associated with a specific code number. This might make it easier to
identify the tool to be used without having to remember its position on the head; nonetheless, these
names have to be clear and must easily recall the tool they stand for. Aliases may be assigned to
each tool that is available on the machine, through the following box, which may be opened within
the settings menu:

The field on the left contains the name assigned by

users, while the right-hand one will display its
code number. At first Masterworkrunning, this
table is automatically initialized. All tools detected
on the machine are displayed in the second field
and each of them is given ‘Tool i’ as default name,
where ‘i’ stands for a progressive number.
THis table may then be freely modified by users,
who may assign the names they wish to the
available tools. Thereafter, every time users wish
to add a tool to a machining table and specify they
want to do so by means of the tool alias, the 'Scroll'
button - located beside the corresponding textbox -
will display the list of the defined aliases, instead
of the code numbers.

Page 286
MW310 – Project Windows

10.9 DXF FORMAT

Specifications dated April 20, 2001.
DXF format is the most common standard being used by software houses, in the United States, to
transfer data for creating machine code (ISO) programs.

The aim is to transfer as much information as possible and keep, at the same time, its compatibility
with "standard" DXF format, that is to say through a DXF file that may be read by AutoCAD.
Opening and displaying contents of DXF files created with AutoCAD (or other CADs) allows
visually checking file information and easier debugging, when need be.

The DXF file should anyways contain enough information to create complete programs requiring no
modifications by the operator. Programs such as Cabinet Vision “Solid”, Cabnetware "Euro” or
Pattern Systems “Drill Mate” may produce tens of workpieces per session and it's impossible for an
operator to manually modify the tens pf DXF files generating machine programs.

It is also important to remember that US and Canadian users are already familiar with the automatic
conversion of files created by Solid, Euro, Drill Mate and similar programs; a product not providing
for the automatic conversion of DXF files into ISO codes would have few chances of selling on the
American market.

The DXF format was created to allow data exchange between different CAD environments and was
not specifically designed for the wood processing industry. Larger amounts of data may be
transferred, without quitting the DXF standard, thanks to conventions and expedients that are
currently being adopted by software houses and that actually make up the current standard:

1) Workpiece is displayed in 2D format.

2) The different types of machinings are divided among different layers. There are layers for:
Workpiece dimensions (PANEL)
Top face boring (TOP[$Fn])
Left face boring (LEFT[$Fn])
Front face boring (FRONT[$Fn])
Right face boring (RIGHT[$Fn])
Rear face boring (BACK[$Fn])
Horizontal indexed boring (INDEX[$NOME_UTENSILE][$Fn])
Saw-cutting (SAW[$Fn][$En])
Routing (TOOL$NOME_UTENSILE[$R;$L][$Fn][$En][$Sn])

Page287
MW310 – Project Windows

Layer reading

Is the name of
the layer in the No The layer is ignored (no
machining error is generated).
table?

Sì

No DXF importing is
Does the layer aborted with error
contain proper generation
data?

Sì

The machining is
interpreted on the basis
of
Machinings –to- layer
names correspondence

Items inside square brackets are optional parameters and are explained later in this document.
Above-mentioned layer names are used as default, but are not intended to be binding. The program
initialization file contains a configuration table where layer names are associated with machining
types. Layers not being acknowledged as machinings are ignored without generating any error
message. This feature was expressly intended for application when DXF files contain values, or
other descriptive data, that are irrelevant to the machining. Layers acknowledged as machinings are
instead analyzed, in order to check that the information they contain is correct. In this case, instead,
any inaccuracy (i.e., a tool not existing) results in an error and the conversion procedure is therefore
aborted. With the file-group automatic conversion mode (batch mode), the process goes on even
when errors occur, a log file containing the list of the files causing conversion errors is anyway
created.

Pag.288
MW310 – Project Windows

3) Information concerning the Z-axis (workpiece thickness, machining depth on top face and Z
value in horizontal boring) is identified by the "thickness" parameter for the different entities,
its value is always taken as depth, regardless of its sign. Such solution allows a very effective
3D presentation, despite the project is drawn in 2D.
Note: some programs provide for the Z value (machining thickness or depth) to be entered in
the layer name (i.e., PANEL19P00 or TOOL_A12P50 - where letter “P” is used instead of the
decimal point, which, in AutoCAD versions before the 2000 release, could not be included in
the layer name-). With this solution, nonetheless, the three-dimensional effect is lost.

4) Each layer may be associated with a different color, with which are associated also the colors
of the different entities. Using a different color for each type of machining allows immediately
understanding if the drawing is correct, even though the related "color" does not provide any
information to the conversion program.

5) Importing is compatible with DXF formats for AutoCAD 12, 13, 14 and 2000. LINE, ARC,
CIRCLE, POLYLINE and LWPOLYLINE are also acknowledged and interpreted.

6) There is also a DXF default table where the values taken on by the parameters not being
specified in the DXF are set (i.e., speed of travel, of rotation, etc.) during the DXF ISO
conversion process
.

7) Workpiece dimensions X and Y are defined by the dimensions of a rectangle located in the
appropriate layer (PANEL). Thickness is given by the value of the rectangle “thickness”
parameter. All machinings are defined with reference to the workpiece bottom left corner. All
data concerning the workpiece dimensions are compulsory.

8) Vertical holes are defined by circles located in the appropriate layer (TOP). Boring co-
ordinates correspond to the circles' center co-ordinates. The diameter of the drill to be used is
given by the diameter of each single circle. Boring depth is given by the circle's thickness
parameter.

9) Horizontal holes are defined by rectangles (closed polylines) located in the appropriate layer
(LEFT; FRONT; RIGHT; BACK). Boring direction is bound to the layer. The diameter of the
drill to be used and the boring depth are functions of the rectangle's dimensions and of the
boring direction. The boring start-point co-ordinates are defined by the mid-point of the
segment representing the diameter, still as a function of the boring direction. The value along
the Z-axis is defined by the “thickness” parameter.

10) Horizontal indexed holes (horizontal holes with different direction than the Cartesian axes'
one) are defined by rectangles (closed polylines) located in the appropriate layer (INDEX). The
tool to be used in the machining may also be defined, as an optional; if it isn't, the tool set
within the DXF default table will be used. Given a rectangle defined by the points P1, P2, P3
and P4, the diameter of the drill to be used is identified by the distance between P1 and P4; the
hole depth is identified by the distance between P1 and P2; the boring direction is identified by
the vector going from P1 to P2; the boring start-point co-ordinates are defined by the mid-point
between P1 and P4. The value along the Z-axis is defined by the “thickness” parameter.

11) Saw-cuts are defined by parallel lines to the Cartesian axes (or by polylines made of a single
straight segment) or by rectangles (closed polylines consisting in four segments) located in the
appropriate layer (SAW). Cutting depth is given by the entity's “thickness” parameter. Two
cases are possible, according to the entity being used:
a) If the cut is identified by a segment, the latter always defines the tool path. The cutting
direction is identified by the vector going from P1 to P 2.

Pag.289
MW310 – Project Windows
b) If the cut is identified by a rectangle, the area defined by the latter will be emptied. Cutting
direction is given by the longest side and the emptying width is given by the shortest side. The
cutting start-point is always close to point 1 of the rectangle.

12) Routing works are defined by lines, arches, circles or polylines located in the appropriate
layer (TOOL$NOME_UTENSILE). Specification of tool name is compulsory. The ”/” symbol
(ASCII 47 - Hex.2Fh), in the tool name, should be replaced by symbol ”_” (ASCII 95 -
Hex.5Fh) in the layer name. Cutting depth is given by the entity's “thickness” parameter. The
cutting direction is identified by the vector going from the first to the last point. If parameter
$R is specified in the layer name, the machining will be executed on the right of this vector; If
parameter $L is specified in the layer name, the machining will be executed on the left of this
vector.

13) The speed of travel in meters/min. may be specified, for all machinings, in the layer name,
through the optional parameter $Fn (n = number).
The layer name may also contain, with saw-cuts, the entry speed in meters/min., through the
optional parameter $En.
With saw-cuts, instead, the layer name may feature, besides the entry speed in meters/min.,
also the tool speed of rotation in thousands of rpm through the optional parameters $En and
$Sn.
Parameters $F, $E, $S, whenever included, may be entered in any order. If they are not
specified, the value set in the DXF default table will be taken. With the speed of rotation only,
if the value on the DXF default table is 0 (zero), the speed will be taken from the tool table.

Examples:
• With the following “TOP” string, the vertical holes in the layer will be executed at the
speed specified within the DXF default table.

• With the following “TOP$F3” string, the vertical holes in the layer will be executed at
3 meters/min.

• With the following “TOOL$41_2” string, the routing works in the layer will be
executed at the speeds specified within the DXF default table.

• With the following “TOOL$41_2$S12$F3$E1” string, the routing works in the layer
will be executed at 12000 rpm, with 3 meter/min. speed of travel and 1 meter/min.
entry speed.

• With the following “TOOL$41_2$S12” string, the routing works in the layer will be
executed at 12000 rpm, with the speed of travel and the entry speed taken from the
DXF default table.

14) The speed of rotation may only be assigned values with integers. The entry speed and the
speed of travel may take on values with both integers and fractions. Since the DXF format with
AutoCAD versions before the 2000 release do not allow the decimal point, the symbol "P" is to
be used instead of character “.” (decimal point). The "DECIMALPOINTCHAR" parameter,
within the initialization file, also allows defining what character is to be used instead of the
decimal point.

Pag.290
MW310 – Project Windows

Here follows the plan and isometric drawing of a sample workpiece featuring machinings that
comply with the above-listed rules:

Pag.291
Via Romania, 18/20
47900 Rimini - ITALY
Telephon + 39 - 0541 745211
Telefax + 39 - 0541 745350
[Link]
E-mail: masterw@[Link]